巴利语辭典

诸大德合编

Gāmaṇika: {'def': '=gāmaṇi S.I,61; A.III,76 (pūga°). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāmaṇī: {'def': '(m.) the head of a company, a chief, a village headman Vin.II,296 (Maṇicūḷaka). Title of the G.‹-› Saṁyutta (Book VIII, of the Saḷāyatana-Vagga) S.IV,305 sq.; & of the G.-Jātaka J.I,136, 137. --S.IV,306 (Talapuṭa naṭa°), 308 (yodhājīvo g.), 310 (hatthāroho g.), 312 (Asibandhakaputta), 330 (Rāsiya). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】村长。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】村长。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gāmaṇḍala: {'def': '“the round of the ox,” like the oxen driven round & round the threshing-floor Th.1, 1143. -- Cp. gomaṇḍala (s.v. go). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāmeyya: {'def': '(adj.) belonging to a village in sa° of the same v., a clansman S.I,36=60 (+sakhā). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāmika: {'def': '【阳】村民。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】村民。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1. [to gāma] a governor of a village, overseer of a parish Vin.I,179; A.III,76, 78, 300 (in series w. raṭṭhika pettanika, senāpatika, pūgagamaṇika). -- 2. [to gam] adj. going wandering, travelling (-°) J.II,112. (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāmī: {'def': '(在【合】中) 【形】去的人，导致。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(在【合】中) 【形】去的人，导致。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gāna: {'def': '【中】歌唱，歌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】歌唱，歌。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gārava: {'def': '【阳】尊敬。 ~tā, 【阴】尊敬。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m. and [later] nt.) [cp. Sk. gaurava, fr. garu] reverence, respect, esteem; with Loc. respect for, reverence towards; in the set of six venerable objects: Buddhe [Satthari], Dhamme, Saṅghe, sikkhāya, appamāde, paṭisanthāre Vin.V,92=D.III,244. As 7 gāravā (the 6+samānhi) in adj. a° and sa° at A.IV,84 (see below). D.III,284; Sn.265; Vism.464 (atta° & para°). Expl^d KhA 144 by garubhāvo; often in combⁿ with bahumāna PvA.135 (=pūjā), sañjāta-g°-bahumāna (adj.) PvA.50; VvA.205. Instr. gāravena out of respect, respectfully D.II,155; J.I,465. Appl^d to the terms of address bhante & bhaddante PvA.33, 121, & āyasmā (see cpd. °adhivacana). -- agārava (m. nt.) disrespect Vin.V,92 (six: as above); J.I,217; PvA.54. -- As adj. in sagārava and agārava full of reverence toward (with Loc.) & disrespectful; D.III,244 (six g.); A.IV,84 (seven); M.I,469; comb^d with appatissa & sappatissa (obedient) A.III,7 sq., 14 sq., 247, 340. Also in tibba-gārava full of keen respect (Satthu-garu Dhamma-garu Saṅghe ca tibba-gārava, etc.) A.III,331=IV.28 sq.

--âdhivacana a title of respect, a reverential address Nd² 466 (with ref. to Bhagavā), cp. sagārava sappaṭissâdhivacana Nd² 130 (āyasmā). (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】尊敬。gāravatā,【阴】尊敬。tibbagārava﹐【阳】虔诚的恭敬。agārava﹐【反】不尊敬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gāravatā: {'def': '[Der. fr. gārava] reverence, respect, in Satthu°, Dhamma°, etc. A.III,330 sq., 423 sq.; IV,29 (ottappa°). (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gārayha: {'def': '【形】卑鄙的，卑贱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】卑鄙的，卑贱的。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of garahati] contemptible, low Vin.III,186; IV,176 sq.; 242; V,149; M.I,403; A.II,241 (kammaṁ pādaṁ gārayhaṁ mosallaṁ); Sn.141; Nett 52; SnA 192. a° not to be blamed J.VI,200 (spelt aggarayha). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāthaka: {'def': '[demin. of gāthā]=gāthā, in ekaṁ me gāhi gāthakaṁ “sing to me only one little verse” J.III,507. (Page 248)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāthā: {'def': '【阴】偈，诗句，节，诗的一行。gāthāpada,【阳】诗节的一行。gāthabhigīta,【形】藉由背诵诗而获得的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic gāthā, on derⁿ see gāyate] a verse, stanza, line of poetry, usually referring to an Anuṭṭhubbaṁ or a Tuṭṭhubbaṁ, & called a catuppādā gāthā, a stanza (śloka) of four half-lines A.II,178; J.IV,395. Def. as akkhara-padaniya-mita-ganthita-vacanaṁ at KhA 117. For a riddle on the word see S.I,38. As a style of composition it is one of the nine Aṅgas or divisions of the Canon (see navaṅga Satthu sāsana). Pl. gāthā Sn.429; J.II,160; gāthāyo Vin.I,5, 349; D.II,157. gāthāya ajjhābhāsati to address with a verse Vin.I,36, 38; Kh v. intr. -- gāthāhi anumodati to thank with (these) lines Vin.I,222, 230, 246, 294, etc. -- gāthāyo gīyamāna uttering the lines Vin.I,38. -- anantaragāthā the foll. stanza J.IV,142; Sn.251; J.I,280; Dh.102 (°sataṁ).

--abhigīta gained by verses S.I,167=Sn.81, 480 (gāthāyo bhāsitvā laddhaṁ Com. cp. Ger. “ersungen”). --âvasāne after the stanza has been ended DhA.III,171; --jānanaka one who knows verses Anvs. p. 35; --dvaya (nt.) a pair of stanzas J.III,395 sq.; PvA.29, 40; --pada a half line of a gāthā Dh.101; KhA 123; --sukhattaṁ in order to have a well-sounding line, metri causā, PvA.33. (Page 248)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】诗句，节，诗的一行。 ~pada, 【阳】诗节的一行。 ~abhigīta,【形】藉由背诵诗而获得的。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gāvo: {'def': 'see go. (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳.主.复】牛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、主、复】牛。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gāvuta: {'def': '【中】伽浮他（¼ 由旬 yojana ＝ 80 勒沙婆 usabha），一里格（长度单位），只稍微少了一点点就有二里长度。 ~tika, 【形】至一伽浮他的长度。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district),【中】伽浮他(1由旬 yojana ＝ 80 勒沙婆 usabhas)，一里格(league长度单位)，略少於2英哩(miles；J.I,57, 59; II.209; Vism.118; DhA.I,396.)。gāvutika,【形】至一伽浮他(league；DA.I,284.)的长度。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic gavyūti pasture land, district] a linear measure, a quarter of a yojana=80 usabhas, a little less than two miles, a league J.I,57, 59; II,209; Vism.118; DhA.I,396. (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāvutika: {'def': '(adj.) reaching a gāvuta in extent DA.I,284. (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāvī: {'def': '(‹go),【阴】母牛。Gen.sg. gāviyā (Pug.56=A.II,207); Nom.pl. gāviyo (SnA 323; VvA.308); Gen.pl. gāvīnaṁ DhA.I,396; SnA 323; VvA.308). -- A cow Vin.I,193; A.IV,418; J.I,50; Ud.8, 49; Vism.525 (in simile); DhA.II,35; VvA.200.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [see go] Gen. sg. gāviyā (Pug.56=A.II,207); Nom. pl. gāviyo (SnA 323; VvA.308); Gen. pl. gāvīnaṁ DhA.I,396; SnA 323; VvA.308). -- A cow Vin.I,193; A.IV,418; J.I,50; Ud.8, 49; Vism.525 (in simile); DhA.II,35; VvA.200. (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】母牛。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gāyaka: {'def': '【阳】歌手。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. next] a singer PvA.3 (naṭaka°). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】歌手。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gāyana: {'def': '【中】歌唱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】歌唱。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) singing VvA.315 (naccana+). (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gāyati: {'def': '[Vedic gai, gāyate] to sing, to recite, often comb w. naccati to dance; ppr. gāyanto, gāyamāna & gīyamāna (Vin.I,38); imper. gāhi (J.III,507); fut. gāyissati; grd. gāyitabba. Vin.II,108 (dhammaṁ), 196 (gāthaṁ); Sn.682 (g° ca vādayanti ca); J.I,290 (gītaṁ); III,507 (naccitvā gāyitvā); Vism.121 (aor. gāyi); PvA.151. Cp. gāthā, gīta, geyya. (Page 249)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ge + a), 唱，背诵。【过】 gāyi, 【现分】 gāyanta, gāyamāna, 【过分】gāyita, gīta, 【独】 gāyitvā。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ge+a), 唱，背诵。【过】gāyi,【现分】gāyanta, gāyamāna,【过分】gāyita, gīta,【独】gāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gāyikā: {'def': '【阴】女歌手。(p118)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】女歌手。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gāḷha: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. gāḍha] 1. [cp. gādha¹] strong, tight, close; thick. In phrase pacchābāhaṁ g° bandbanaṁ bandhati to pinion the arms tightly D.I,245; A.II,241; J.I,264; PvA.4. Of an illness (gāḷhena rogâtaṅkena phuṭṭha) A.II,174 sq.; appl^d to poison smeared on an arrow M.I,429. -- gālhaṁ & gālhakaṁ (adv.) tightly J.I,265, 291. -- agāḷha (? prob. to be read āgāḷha) (of vacana, speech, comb^d with pharusa) strong (?) Pug.32 (expl by Com. atigāḷha thaddha), cp. 2. and gaḷita. ‹-› 2. [cp. gādha¹ deep J.I,155 (°vedhin, piercing); Miln.370 (ogāhati). Cp. ajjhogāḷha, atigāḷha, ogāḷha, nigāḷhita, pagāḷha. (Page 250)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】强壮的，紧，严重的。gāḷhaṁ,【副】紧紧地，强烈地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】强壮的，紧，严重的。 ~aŋ, 【副】紧紧地，强烈地。(p119)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gīta: {'def': '[pp. of gāyati] 1. (pp.) sung, recited, solemnly proclaimed, enunciated: mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ D.I,104 (cp. gira). -- 2. (nt.) singing, a song; grouped under vācasikā khiḍḍā, musical pastimes at Nd² 219; SnA 86. Usually comb^d with nacca, dancing: A.I,261; Vv81¹⁰ as naca gītādi J.I,61; VvA.131; referring to nacca-gīta-vādita, dancing with singing & instrumental accompaniment D.III,183 (under samajja, kinds of festivities); Vv 32⁴. Same with visūkadassana, pantomimic show at D.I,5≈(cp. DA.I,77; KhA 36).

--rava sound of song Mhvs VII.30; --sadda id. J.IV,3; Dhs.621; DhA.I,15; --ssara id. Vin.II,108; A.III,251; J.III,188. (Page 251)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】歌，歌唱。 (gāyati 的【过分】) 已唱。 ~rava, ~sadda,【阳】歌声。(p119)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】歌，唱歌。(gāyati 的【过分】) 已唱。gītarava, gītasadda,【阳】歌声。“Ruṇṇamidaṁ bhikkhave, ariyassa vinaye yadidaṁ gītaṁ.”(诸比丘！於圣者之律，唱歌是哭泣。)(A.3.103./ I,261.)受八戒中，「离唱歌」之一项，《小诵注释》：gītanti yaṁkiñci gītaṁ.(唱歌：任何歌) (KhA.CS:p.26；Pāci.IV,267) A.5.209./III,251.︰“Pañcime bhikkhave, ādīnavā āyatakena gītassarena dhammaṁ bhaṇantassa. Katame pañca? Attanāpi tasmiṁ sare sārajjati, parepi tasmiṁ sare sārajjanti, gahapatikāpi ujjhāyanti– ‘yatheva mayaṁ gāyāma, evamevaṁ kho samaṇā sakyaputtiyā gāyantī’ti, sarakuttimpi nikāmayamānassa samādhissa bhaṅgo hoti, pacchimā janatā diṭṭhānugatiṁ āpajjati.(诸比丘！拉长歌音而诵(经)法有五种过患。什么是五？(1)自己即爱著其音；(2)他人也爱著其音；(3)在家众(听到)发牢骚︰我们这样唱歌，这些释迦沙门子也唱歌；(4)修练音调也会妨碍禅定；(5)往后的人会效法所看到的。) 《毘尼母经》(卷二，T24.809上)︰「尔时诸比丘用歌音诵戒。佛言︰不应当以高声了了诵戒，歌音诵戒有五事过︰一心染著此音。二为世人所嫌。三与世人无异。四妨废行道。五妨入定。是名五事过也。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gītaka: {'def': '(nt.) & gītikā (f.) a little song J.III,507. (Page 252)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gītikā: {'def': '【阴】歌。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】歌。(p119)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gīveyyaka: {'def': '【中】脖子的装饰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】脖子的装饰。(p119)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. graiveyaka] necklace, an ornament for the neck (orig. “something belonging to the neck,” cp. necklet, bracelet, etc.) Vin.I,287; A.I,254 sq. (=Vism.247, where gīveyya only); 257; III,16; J.IV,395 (gīveyya only); V,297; VI,590; VvA.104. (Page 252)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gīvā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. grīvā, to *gǔer to swallow, as signifying throat: see note on gala for etym.] the neck Sn.609; J.I,74 (°ṁ pasāreti to stretch forth), 167 (pasārita°), 207, 222, 265; III,52; VvA.27 (mayūra°), 157; DA.I,296 (°āya kuṇḍa-daṇḍaka-bandhana, as exhibition & punishment): similarly in the sense of “life” (hinting at decapitation) J.II,300 (°ṁ karissāmi “I shall go for his neck”); IV,431=V.23. -- Syn. kaṇṭha the primary meaning of which is neck, whereas gīvā orig. throat. (Page 252)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】脖子。(p119)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】脖子，颈。gīvaṭṭhika, 颈骨。颈：后颈曰「脰tau7」或「领脰nia2tau7」；前颈曰「颔am7」或「颔颈am7kun2」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gū: {'def': '(-°) [fr. gam, cp. °ga] going, having gone (through), being skilled or perfected in. See addha°, anta°, chanda°, dhamma°, paṭṭha°, pāra, veda°. (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gūhana: {'def': '【中】隐匿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】隐匿。(p120)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) hiding, concealment Sdhp.65 (laddhi°-citta). (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gūhanā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. gūhati]=gūhanā (q. v.) Pug. 19. Cp. pari°. (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gūhati: {'def': '(gūh+a；Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha), 藏，隐藏(to hide, to conceal)。【过】gūhi。【现分】gūhamana, gūhaya。【独】gūhitvā。【使】gūhayati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(gūh + a), 藏，隐藏, 【过】 gūhi, 【现分】 gūhamana, 【独】 gūhitvā。(p120)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. gūhati, pp. gūḍha; see guyha, guhā, etc.] to hide, to conceal. See paṭi°, pari°. -- Caus. gūhayati Sdhp.189 (gūhayaṁ ppr.). Cp. gūḷha. (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gūhita: {'def': 'gūḷha (gūhati 的【过分】), 已藏，已隐藏，已秘密。(p120)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'gūḷha (gūhati 的【过分】), 已藏，已隐藏，已秘密。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Gūtha: {'def': '【中】排泄物，粪，大便。gūthakaṭāha,【阳】便盆，便器。gūthakūpa,【阳】粪坑。gūthagata,【中】粪堆。gūthapāṇaka,【阳】粪甲虫(casebearing beetle)，锹形虫，牛屎龟，蜣螂，屎壳郎。gūthabhakkha,【形】吃粪的，食屎的。gūthabhāṇī,【阳】脏话。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. gūtha; probably to Lat. bubino, see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.] excrements, fæces, dung. As food for Petas frequently mentioned in Pv; (cp. Stede, Peta Vatthu 24 sq.), as a decoction of dung also used for medicinal purposes (Vin.I,206 e. g.). Often combⁿ with mutta (urine): Pv.I,9¹; PvA.45, 78; DA.I,198.

--kaṭāha an iron pot for defecation Vin.IV,265. --kalala dung & mire J.III,393; --kīḷana playing with excrements Vism.531. --kūpa a privy (cp. karīsa) M.I,74; Sn.279; Pv.II,3¹⁶; Pug.36; J.VI,370; Vism.54. --khādaka living on fæces J.II,211 (°pāṇaka) PvA.266; --gata having turned to dung It.90; --gandhin smelling of excrements Pv.II,3¹⁵; --ṭṭhāna a place for excrementation Th.1, 1153; --naraka=foll. Vism.501; --niraya the mirepurgatory VvA.226; Sdhp.194; --pāṇa an insect living on excrement (=°khādakapāṇa) J.II,209, 212; --bhakkha feeding on stercus M.III,168; PvA.192; DhA.II,61; --bhānin of foul speech A.I,128; Pug.29 (Kern, Toev. s. v. corrects into kūṭa°?). (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】排泄物，粪，大便。 ~kaṭāha, 【阳】便盆，便器。 ~kūpa, 【阳】粪坑。 ~gata, 【中】粪堆。 ~pāṇaka, 【阳】蜣螂，屎壳郎。 ~bhakkha,【形】吃粪的，食屎的。 ~bhāṇī, 【阳】脏话。(p120)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Gūthaka: {'def': '“a sort of gūtha,” excretion, secretion, rheum, in akkhi° and kaṇṇa° (of eye & ear) Sn.197 (cp. SnA 248; Vism.345 sq.). (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Gūḷha: {'def': '& gūḷhaka (adj.) [pp. of gūhati] hidden, secret Vin.II,98 (gūḷha-ko salākagāho). (Page 253)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

H: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第三十一个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的 h。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第三十一个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中的ㄏ。梵文还有‘h’(visarga)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ha: {'def': '[freq. in Rigveda, as gha or ha, Idg. *gho, *ghe; cp. Lat. hi-c, Sk. hi] an emphatic particle “hey, oh, hallo, I say” Vin.II,109; Sn.666; iti ha, thus Vin.I,5, 12; D.I,1; a common beginning to traditional instruction Sn.1053; itihītihaṁ (saying), “thus and thus” Sn.1084; SnA 416 (ha-kāra); PvA.4 (ha re), 58 (gloss for su). (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(freq. in Rigveda, as gha or ha, Sk. hi), (表示惊讶、疑问、喜悦或用以唤起注意等)嗨，喂(hey, oh, hallo, I say)。iti ha, 如此(thus; a common beginning to traditional instruction. Sn.1053)。itihītihaṁ, 如此如此((saying), “thus and thus” Sn 1084；SnA.416.(ha-kāra)；PvA 4 (ha re), 58 (gloss for su))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hacca: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. han] killing, in bhūnahacca killing an embryo A.IV,98; J.VI,579=587; Miln.314 (text bhūta-) (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. han),【形】杀(killing)。bhūnahacca,堕胎(killing an embryo)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hadaya: {'def': '(梵 hrdaya‹hrd),【中】心(甲骨文︰心；金文︰心。金文更像心脏之形，可见古人以心脏为思虑之所)。音译纥利陀耶、汗栗驮。意译作肉团心、真实心、坚实心，乃意根之所托。英文的心脏是以希腊语的kardia(καρδια)来的，心脏(拉丁语cor)是一种器官，其主要作用相当於一个动力泵，推动血液在人体中不停地循环流动，有规律的收缩。「心」指心脏或肉团心，此非心识(citta)，非具有思考作用之心(缘虑心)，但是它是心识所赖以生起之处，即意根是心法(名法)的所依，即心所依靠的色法(心所依处色hadaya rūpa or hadaya vatthu )，它在心脏内，据禅修者所说：它存在於心藏的下部，它取色法及名法当它的对象。它本身即迅速生灭，当它取色法及名法当它的对象时，由心藏内的下部上升到心藏的上部。hadayaṅgama,【形】愉快的，迷人的，惬意的。hadayamaṁsa,【中】心脏肉。hadayadasakakalāpa,【中】心色十法聚(地、水、火、风、颜色、香、味、食素、命根色、心色)。hadayavatthu,(=hadayarūpa) 【中】心所依处色，心色，心基，心所依(支持意界及意识界，存在於有分意界的下端，在心脏上端孔内(hadayakosabbhantara心脏内室)的一小撮滞留血中(非循环血中)。依医学观点，脑的功能包括记忆、思维等，但依深度禅定所见，记忆、思维的作用在心。)。hadayasantāpa,【阳】伤心事。hadayassita, hadayanissita,【形】与心连接的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】心。 ~ṅgama, 【形】愉快的，迷人的，惬意的。 ~maŋsa, 【中】心脏肉。 ~vatthu, 【中】心基，心所依。 ~santāpa, 【阳】伤心事。~ssita,~nissita, 【形】与心连接的。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic hṛdaya, hṛd=Av. ƶ∂r∂dā, not the same as Lat. cor(dem), but perhaps=Lat. haru entrails (haruspex). See K.Z. XL.419] the heart. -- 1. the physical organ D.II,293; S.I,207 (ettha uro hadayan ti vuttaṁ DhsA.140); in detail: Vism.256, 356; VbhA.60, 239. ‹-› 2. the heart as seat of thought and feeling, esp. of strong emotion (as in Vedas!), which shows itself in the action of the heart S.I,199. Thus defined as “cintā” at Dhtm 535 (as had), or as “hadayaṁ vuccati cittaṁ,” with ster. explⁿ “mano mānasa paṇḍara” etc. Dhs.17; Nd¹ 412. Cp. DhsA.140 (cittaṁ abbhantar’aṭṭhena hadayan ti vuttaṁ). -- With citta at Sn.p. 32 (hadayaṁ te phalessāmi “I shall break your heart”); hadayaṁ phalitaṁ a broken heart J.I,65; DhA.I,173. chinna h. id. J.V,180. hadayassa santi calmness of h. A.V,64 sq.; hadayā hadayaṁ aññāya tacchati M.I,32. h. nibbāyi the heart (i. e. anger) cooled down J.VI,349; h. me avakaḍḍhati my heart is distraught J.IV,415. -- duhadaya bad-hearted J.VI,469.

--aṭṭhi a bone of the heart KhA 49, 50 (so read for pādaṭṭhi, see App. to Pj 1.); Vism.255; SnA 116. --gata [°ngata] gone to the heart, learnt by heart Miln.10. --gama [°ngama] heart-stirring, pleasant, agreeable D.I,4; III,173; M.I,345; A.II,209; V,205; Vin.III,77; Nd¹ 446; Dhs. 1343; DA.I,75. --pariḷāha heart-glow Miln.318. --phālana bursting of the heart J.I,282. --maṁsa the flesh of the heart, the heart J.I,278, 347; II,159 etc. (very frequent in the Jātakas); DhA.I,5; II,90. --bheda “heart-break,” a certain trick in cheating with measures DA.I,79. --vañcana deluding the heart SnA 183 (cp. J.VI,388 hadaya-tthena), --vatthu (1) the substance of the heart Miln.281; DhsA.140. (2) “heart-basis,” the heart as basis of mind, sensorium commune Tikp 17, 26, 53 sq., 62, 256; Vism.447; SnA 228; DhsA.257, 264. See the discussion at Dhs. trslⁿ lxxxvi. and Cpd. 277 sq. --santāpa heart-burn, i. e. grief, sorrow Vism.54. --ssita stuck in the heart (of salla, dart) Sn.938; Nd¹ 411. (Page 728)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hala: {'def': '【中】犁。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】犁。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Halaŋ: {'def': '【无】够了！〔表示异议的感叹词〕为什么？(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Halaṁ: {'def': '【无】够了！〔表示异议的感叹词〕为什么?', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '=hi alaṁ (q. v.); “halaṁ dāni pakāsituṁ” why should I preach? Vin.I,5=D.II,36=M.I,168=S.I,136. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haliddā: {'def': '【阴】姜黄（一种产于印度的被广泛种植的热带植物 (Curcumadomestica)，花黄色，有一个芳香多肉的根茎）。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Haliddī (f.) [cp. Sk. haridrā] turmeric. ‹-› 1. haliddā: Vin.I,201; J.V,89. -- 2. haliddī (haliddi°) M.I,127; A.III,230, 233; S.II,101; KhA 64; °rāga like the colour of turmeric, or like the t. dye, i. e. not fast, quickly changing & fading J.III,148 (of citta), cp. J.III,524 sq. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '& Haliddī (cp. Sk. haridrā)【阴】姜黄(turmeric﹐别名︰姜黄、黄姜、毛姜黄、宝鼎香、黄丝郁金，一种产於印度的被广泛种植的热带植物 (Curcuma domestica)，花黄色，有一个芳香多肉的根茎。Vin I.201; J .V.89)。haliddārāga﹐像姜黄的颜色(like the colour of turmeric, i.e. not fast, quickly changing & fading)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haliddī: {'def': '(cp. Sk. haridrā),【阴】姜黄(turmeric)(见 Haliddā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】姜黄（见 Haliddā）。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Halāhala: {'def': '¹ [onomat.; cp. Sk. halāhala] a kind of deadly poison, usually as °visa J.I,271, 273, 380; III,103; V,465; Miln.256; Vism.57; ThA.287. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [onomat.] uproar, tumult J.I,47 sq.; Miln.122. Cp. kolāhala. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】诃罗诃罗（致命的毒药）。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵halāhala),【中】诃罗诃罗(the most vicious and venomous poison(神话中)致命的毒药)。halāhalavisa﹐毒药。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hambho: {'def': '用来称呼同辈的虚词。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [haṁ+bho] a particle expressing surprise or haughtiness J.I,184, 494. See also ambho. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '用来称呼同辈的虚词。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hammiya: {'def': '【中】大房子，楼房。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic harmya house & BSk. harmikā “summer-house” (?) Divy 244] customarily given as “a long, storied mansion which has an upper chamber placed on the top,” a larger building, pāsāda, (store-) house Vin.I,58, 96, 239; II,146 (with vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, guhā, as the 5 lenāni), 152, 195; Miln.393; Nd¹ 226=Vism.25. °-gabbha a chamber on the upper storey Vin.II,152. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】大房子，楼房。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Han: {'def': '(indecl.) see haṁ. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hanakāra: {'def': '(ahaṁ-ākāra)﹐【阳】【形】有我相的、有我慢的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hanana: {'def': '(fr. hanati),【中】打击、杀害(striking, injuring)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. hanati] killing, striking, injuring Mhvs 3, 42. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】杀害，打击。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hanati: {'def': 'hanti (han + a), 杀，袭击，伤害。【过】 hani。【过分】 hata。【现分】 hananta, hanamāna。【独】 hantvā, hanitvā。【不】 hantuŋ, hanituŋ。【潜】 hantabba, hanitabba。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1, hanti (han杀+a), 1.袭击(to strike, to thresh S IV.201; J IV.102.)。2.杀(to kill D.I,123; A.IV,97 (asinā hanti attānaṁ); Sn 125; Dh 405; maggaṁhanati to slay travellers on the road J I.274; III.220.)。3.伤害(to destroy, to remove Sn.118; Dh.72.)。【过】hani。【过分】hata。【现分】hananta, hanamāna。【独】hantvā, hanitvā。【不】hantuṁ, hanituṁ。【义】hantabba, hanitabba。pres. 1st sg. hanāmi J II.273; 2nd sg. hanāsi J III.199; V.460; 3rd sg. hanti Sn 118; A IV.97; DhA II.73 (=vināseti); Dh 72; hanāti J V.461; hanati J I.432; 1st pl. hanāma J I.200; 3rd pl. hananti Sn 669. Imper. hana J III.185; hanassu J V.311; hanantu J IV.42; Dh 355; J I.368. Pot. hane Sn 394, 400; haneyya D I.123; Sn 705. ppr. a-hanaṁ not killing D I.116; hananto J I.274. fut. hanissati J IV.102; hañchati J IV.102; hañchema J II.418. aor. hani Mhvs 25, 64; 3rd pl. haniṁsu Sn 295; J I.256; ger. hantvā Sn 121; Dh 294 sq.; hanitvāna J III.185. -- Pass. haññati D II.352; S IV.175; Sn 312; J I.371; IV.102; DhA II.28. ppr. haññamāna S IV.201. grd. hantabba D II.173. aor. pass. haññiṁsu D I.141. fut. haññissati DA I.134. Caus. hanāpeti to cause to slay, destroy J I.262; DA I.159; ghātāpeti Vin I.277; ghāteti to cause to slay Dh 405; Sn 629; a-ghātayaṁ, not causing to kill S I.116; Pot. ghātaye Sn 705; ghātayeyya Sn 394; aor. aghātayi Sn 308; ghātayi Sn 309; pass. ghātīyati Miln 186. See also ghāteti. cp. upahanati, vihanati; °gha, ghāta etc., paligha.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (& hanti) [han or ghan to smite, Idg. *gǔhen, as in Av. jainti to kill; Gr. qei/nw to strike, fόnos murder; Lat. de-fendo “defend” & of-fendo; Ohg. gundea= Ags. gūd “battle.” The Dhtp (363 & 429) gives “hiṁsā” as meaning of han] 1. to strike, to thresh S.IV,201; J.IV,102. -- 2. to kill D.I,123; A.IV,97 (asinā hanti attānaṁ); Sn.125; Dh.405; maggaṁ° to slay travellers on the road J.I,274; III,220. -- 3. to destroy, to remove Sn.118; Dh.72. -- Forms: Pres. 1^st sg. hanāmi J.II,273; 2^nd sg. hanāsi J.III,199; V,460; 3^rd sg. hanti Sn.118; A.IV,97; DhA.II,73 (=vināseti); Dh.72; hanāti J.V,461; hanati J.I,432; 1^st pl. hanāma J.I,200; 3^rd pl. hananti Sn.669. Imper. hana J.III,185; hanassu J.V,311; hanantu J.IV,42; Dh.355; J.I,368. Pot. hane Sn.394, 400; haneyya D.I,123; Sn.705. ppr. a-hanaṁ not killing D.I,116; hananto J.I,274. fut. hanissati J.IV,102; hañchati J.IV,102; hañchema J.II,418. aor. hani Mhvs 25, 64; 3^rd pl. haniṁsu Sn.295; J.I,256; ger. hantvā Sn.121; Dh.294 sq.; hanitvāna J.III,185. -- Pass. haññati D.II,352; S.IV,175; Sn.312; J.I,371; IV,102; DhA.II,28. ppr. haññamāna S.IV,201. grd. hantabba D.II,173. aor. pass. haññiṁsu D.I,141. fut. haññissati DA.I,134. -- Caus. hanāpeti to cause to slay, destroy J.I,262; DA.I,159; ghātāpeti Vin.I,277; ghāteti to cause to slay Dh.405; Sn.629; a-ghātayaṁ, not causing to kill S.I,116; Pot. ghātaye Sn.705; ghātayeyya Sn.394; aor. aghātayi Sn.308; ghātayi Sn.309; pass. ghātīyati Miln.186. See also ghāteti. Cp. upahanati, vihanati; °gha, ghāta etc., paligha. Hanati² [*han for had, probably from pp. hanna. The Dhtm (535) gives had in meaning of “uccāra ussagga”] to empty the bowels Pv IV.8⁸ (=vaccaṁ osajjate PvA.268). -- pp. hanna. Cp. ūhanati² & ohanati. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (*han for had, probably from pp. hanna. The Dhtm (535) gives had in meaning of “uccāra ussagga”),空掉钵(to empty the bowels Pv IV.88 (=vaccaṁ osajjate PvA 268).pp. hanna. cp. ūhanati2 & ohanati.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Handa: {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Sk. hanta, haṁ+ta] an exhortativeemphatic particle used like Gr. a)/ge dή or French allons, voilà: well then, now, come along, alas! It is constructed with 1^st pres. & fut., or imper, 2^nd person D.I,106, 142; II,288; Sn.153, 701, 1132; J.I,88, 221, 233; III,135; DA.I,237 (=vavasāy’atthe nipāto); Nd² 697 (=padasandhi); Pv.I,10³ (=gaṇha PvA.49); II,3²¹ (=upasagg’atthe nipāta PvA.88); DhA.I,16, 410 (handa je); SnA 200 (vvavasāne), 491 (id.); VvA.230 (hand’‹-› âhaṁ gamissāmi). (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(表示指示、容许或听任的虚词), 那么，喂，好了，让。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(表示指示、容许或听任的虚词), 那么，喂，好了，让。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hanna: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of hanati²] easing oneself, emptying of the bowels; su° a good (i. e. modest) performance of bodily evacuation, i. e. modesty J.I,421. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hantar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. hanati] a striker, one who kills D.I,56; A.II,116 sq.; III,161 sq.; S.I,85; Dh.389. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hantu: {'def': '【阳】杀的人，袭击的人。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】杀的人，袭击的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hantvā: {'def': '(hanati 的【独】)。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[hanati杀] 的【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hanu: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic hanu; cp. Lat. gena jaw, Gr. gέnus chin, Goth. kinnus=Ger. kinn=E. chin, Oir. gin mouth] the jaw D.I,11; J.I,28 (mahā°), 498; SnA 30 (°sañcalana); VbhA.145 (°sañcopana). °-saṁhanana jaw-binding, incantations to bring on dumbness D.I,11; DA.I,97. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'hanuka(Vedic hanu),【阴】颚(the jaw)。D.I,11; J I.28 (mahāhanu), 498; Sn.A.30 (hanusañcalana); VbhA.145 (hanusañcopana). hanu-saṁhanana jaw-binding, incantations to bring on dumbness D I.11; DA I.97.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'hanuka, 【阴】颚。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hanukā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. hanu] the jaw J.I,498; DA.I,97; Miln.229; also nt. Vin.II,266; J.I,461; II,127; IV,188; --°aṭṭhika the jaw bone J.I,265 sq.; Vism.251; VbhA.58; KhA 49; SnA 116. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hara: {'def': '【阳】湿婆（印度三大神中司破坏之神），大自在天。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. hṛ] taking, fetching; vayo° bringing age (said of grey hairs) J.I,138; du° S.I,36. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】湿婆(印度三大神中司破坏之神)，大自在天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Harati: {'def': '(har + a), 携带，取走，掠夺，偷。【过】 hari。【过分】 haṭa。【现分】 haranta, haramāna。【独】 haritvā。【不】 harituŋ。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Idg. *ĝher; in meaning “take” cp. Gr. xeiρ hand; in meaning “comprise” cp. Lat. cohors. Gr. xόrtos; Ags. geard=yard. -- The Dhtm expl^s har laconically by “haraṇa”] 1. to carry J.II,176; Dh.124; to take with one D.I,8, 142; opposed to paccāharati VbhA.349-354; SnA 52-58. -- 2. to bring J.I,208; to offer J.I,238; Sn.223. -- 3. to take, gather (fruits) Miln.263. -- 4. to fetch, buy J.I,291 (mama santikā). -- 5. to carry away, to remove D.II,160, 166; J.I,282; Sn.469; Mhvs 1, 26; to do away with, to abolish J.I,345. -- 6. to take away by force, to plunder, steal D.I,52; J.I,187; V,254. ‹-› 7. to take off, to destroy J.I,222 (jīvitaṁ), 310 (visaṁ); to kill J.I,281. -- Forms: aor. ahāsi Sn.469 sq.; Dh.3; J.IV,308; cp. upasaṁhāsi S.V,214; pahāsi, pariyudāhāsi, ajjhupāhari; ger. haritvā D.II,160; hātūna J.IV,280 (=haritvā C.); inf. harituṁ J.I,187; hātave Th.1, 186; hātuṁ: see voharati; hattuṁ: see āharati; Fut. hāhiti J.VI,500 (=harissati). -- Pass. harīyati M.I,33; hīrati J.V,254; pret. ahīratha J.V,253; grd. haritabba J.I,187, 281. -- pp. haṭa. -- Caus. hāreti to cause to take Sn.395; to cause to be removed, to remove J.I,345; II,176; III,431 (somebody out of office); hāretabba that which should be taken out of the way J.I,298; Caus. II. harāpeti to cause to be brought, to offer Vin.I,245; J.II,38; to cause to be taken (as a fine) Miln.193. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(har取走+a), 1.携带(to carry；【反】paccāharati)。2.带、提供(to bring, to offer)。3.拿、采集( to take, gather (fruits))。4.卖得、买(to fetch, buy)。5.取走、摒弃(to carry away, to remove, to do away with, to abolish J I.345)。6.掠夺、偷(to take away by force, to plunder, steal)。7.移去、杀(to take off, to destroy,J I.222 (jīvitaṁ), 310 (visaṁ); to kill J I.281.)。【过】hari。【过分】haṭa。【现分】haranta, haramāna。【独】haritvā, hātūna。【不】harituṁ, hātave, hātuṁ, hattuṁ。aor. ahāsi; ger. haritvā; fut. hāhiti(=harissati); pass. harīyati, hīrati; pret. ahīratha; grd. haritabba. caus. hāreti, hāretabba; caus.II. harāpeti to cause to be brought, to offer.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haraṇa: {'def': '【中】运载。 ~ka, 【形】运送的，可移动的。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. hṛ] taking, seizing, removing J.I,117, 118, 232; DA.I,71. kucchi° n. filling of the belly J.I,277. °bhatta a meal to take along DhA.II,144. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹hr),【中】运载。haraṇaka,【形】运送的，可移动的。kucchiharaṇa,【中】填饱肚子(filling of the belly J I.277.)。VbhA.p.354.︰实践‘回原处再走’的「往返的任务」者(haraṇapaccāharaṇasaṅkhātaṁ gatapaccāgatavattaṁ pūrento)(如︰黑藤堂的大龙长老(Kāḷavallimaṇḍapavāsī Mahānāgatthero)决定只有在心专注於业处之下才提脚，而如果在心脱离了业处之下提脚时，他即会转身走回原处。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haraṇaka: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. haraṇa] goods in transit, movable goods Vin.III,51. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haraṇī: {'def': '(f.) [fr. haraṇa] 1. a nerve conveying a stimulus (lit. “carrier”); only used with rasa° nerve of taste Vin.II,137; usually given as “a hundred thousand” in number, e. g. J.V,4, 293, 458; DhA.I,134. -- 2. in kaṇṇamala°, an instrument to remove the wax from the ear Vin.II,135. Cp. hāraka. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hare: {'def': '用来称呼小辈的虚词。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '用来称呼小辈的虚词。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hareṇukā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. hareṇukā] a pea M.I,245; J.V,405 (=aparaṇṇajā ti 406); VI,537; hareṇuka-yūsa pea-soup M.I,245 (one of the 4 kinds of soup). (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hari: {'def': '(adj.) [Idg. *ĝhel, as in Lat. helvus yellow, holus cabbage; Sk. harita, hariṇa pale (yellow or green), hiri (yellow); Av. ƶairi; Gr. xlόos green, xlόh “greens”; Ags. geolo=E. yellow. Also the words for “gold”: hāṭaka & hiraṇya] green, tawny Dhs.617; DhsA.317; °-ssavaṇṇa gold-coloured J.II,33 (=hari-samāna-vaṇṇa suvaṇṇa° C.).

--candana yellow sandal Vv 83¹; DhA.I,28; --tāla yellow orpiment Th.2, 393; DhA.III,29; IV,113; --ttaca gold-coloured Th.2, 333; ThA.235; --pada gold foot, yellow leg, a deer J.III,184. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2,【阳】毘瑟挐(印度教主神之一，守护之神)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(Sk. harita, hariṇa pale (yellow or green), hiri (yellow)) ,【形】绿色的，黄褐色的(green, tawny)。harissavaṇṇa, 金色的(gold-coloured)。haricandana, 黄褐色的(yellow sandal)。haritāla,雌黄(yellow orpiment)。harittaca, 金色的(gold-coloured)。haripada, 金色的脚(gold foot, yellow leg, a deer.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】毗瑟挐（印度教主神之一，守护之神）。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Harissavaṇṇa: {'def': '【形】有金色的。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】有金色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Harita: {'def': '(adj.) [see hari for etym.] 1. green, pale(-green), yellowish. It is expl^d by Dhpāla as nīla (e. g. VvA.197; PvA.158), and its connotation is not fixed. -- Vin.I,137; D.I,148; S.I,5; J.I,86, 87; II,26, 110; Pv.II,12¹⁰ (bank of a pond); Vv 45⁷ (°patta, with green leaves, of a lotus); J.II,110 (of wheat); SnA 277 (°haṁsa yellow, i. e. golden swan). -- 2. green, fresh Vin.III,16; A.V,234 (kusa); nt. (collectively) vegetables, greens Vin 266 (here applied to a field of fresh (i. e. green) wheat or cereal in general, as indicated by explⁿ “haritaṁ nāma pubbaṇṇaṁ aparaṇṇaṁ” etc.); cp. haritapaṇṇa vegetables SnA 283. -- 3. haritā (f.) gold Th.1, 164=J.II,334 (°maya made of gold; but expl^d as “harita-maṇi-parikkhata” by C.). -- 4. Two cpds., rather odd in form, are haritāmātar “son of a green frog” J.II,238 (in verse); and haritupattā (bhūmi) “covered with green” M.I,343; J.I,50, 399. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1.绿色的，黄褐色的。2.新鲜的。【中】蔬菜，青菜，草。haritamaṇḍūka,【阳】青蛙。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】绿色的，黄褐色的，新鲜的。【中】蔬菜，青菜。 haritta, 【中】绿色，清新。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haritabba: {'def': '(harati 的【潜】) 应该携带，应该迁移。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(harati 的【义】) 应该携带，应该迁移。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haritaka: {'def': '(nt.) [harita+ka] a pot-herb D.II,342. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haritatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. harita] greenness Vin.I,96. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haritta: {'def': '【中】绿色，清新。haritapaṇṇa, 蔬菜。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Harittaca: {'def': '【形】黄金色的。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】黄金色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haritu: {'def': '【阳】拿走的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】拿走的人。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haritā: {'def': '【阴】黄金(gold Th 1, 164=J II.334. haritamaya made of gold)。haritāmātar,青蛙之子(son of a green frog, J II.238)。haritupattā, 覆盖绿色(covered with green)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haritāla: {'def': '【中】雌黄。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】雌黄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hariṇa: {'def': '[fr. hari] a deer J.II,26. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鹿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】鹿。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Harāpeti: {'def': '(harati 的【使】), 使携带，使取走。【过】harāpesi。【过分】harāpita。【独】harāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(harati 的【使】), 使携带，使取走。【过】 harāpesi。【过分】harāpita。【独】 harāpetvā。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Harāyati: {'def': '(hiri‘惭愧’的【派】), 1.感到惭愧(to be ashamed)。【现分】harāyanto, & harāyamāna(often combd with aṭṭiyati)。2.感到沮丧，感到焦急，烦恼(=Vedic hr to be angry. pres. hrṇīte) to be depressed or vexed, to be cross, to worry (cp. hiriyati)。【现分】hariyyamāna(mā hari “don’t worry”)。【过】harāyi。【独】harāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[denom. fr. hiri (=hrī), cp. Vedic hrī to be ashamed, Pres. jihreti. -- The Dhtp (438) gives roots hiri & hara in meaning “lajjā”] 1. to be ashamed Vin.I,88; II,292; D.I,213; M.I,120; S.IV,62; It.43; Pv.I,10²; ppr. harāyanto Nd¹ 466, & harāyamāna J.IV,171; Nd² 566. Often comb^d with aṭṭiyati (q. v.). See also hiriyati. -- 2. [in this meaning=Vedic hṛ to be angry. Pres. hṛṇīte] to be depressed or vexed, to be cross, to worry (cp. hiriyati) J.V,366 (ppr. hariyyamāna); Th.1, 1173 (mā hari “don’t worry”). (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hiri 的【派】), 感到惭愧，感到沮丧，感到焦急，烦恼。【过】 harāyi。【独】 harāyitvā。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Harītaka: {'def': '【中】harītakī,【阴】诃子、阿黎勒果、诃黎勒果(见 Abhayā)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Epic Sk. harītaka] yellow myrobalan (Terminalia citrina or chebula) Vin.I,201, 206; J.I,80; IV,363; Miln.11; DhsA.320 (T. harīṭaka); VvA.5 (ṭ); °-kī (f.) the myrobalan tree Vin.I,30; M.III,127. pūtiharīṭakī Vism.40; °paṇṇika all kinds of greens Vin.II,267. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 harītakī, 【阴】诃子（见 Abhayā）。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hasamānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. of hasati+ka] laughing, merry Mhvs 35, 55; (nt.) as adv. °ṁ jokingly, for fun Vin.I,185. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hasana: {'def': 'hasita, 【中】笑。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. hasati] laughter Dhtp 31. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'hasita,【中】笑，莞尔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hasati: {'def': '& Hassati (has笑+a)(owing to similarity of meaning the two roots has to laugh (Sk. hasati, pp. hasita) & hrs to be excited (Sk. hrsyati, pp. hrsita & hrsṭa) have become mixed in Pāli (see also hāsa)), 微笑，笑，莞尔。【过】hasi。【过分】hasita。【现分】hasanta, hasamāna。【义】hasitabba。【独】hasitvā。hasāpekkha, 开玩笑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(has + a), 微笑，笑。【过】 hasi。【过分】 hasita。【现分】 hasanta,hasamāna。【潜】 hasitabba。【独】 hasitvā。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& Hassati [owing to similarity of meaning the two roots has to laugh (Sk. hasati, pp. hasita) & hṛṣ to be excited (Sk. hṛṣyati, pp. hṛṣita & hṛṣṭa) have become mixed in Pāli (see also hāsa). -- The usual (differentiated) correspondent of Sk. hṛṣyati is haṁsati. The Dhtp (309) gives haṁsa (=harṣa) with tuṭṭhi, and (310) hasa with hasana] 1. to laugh, to be merry; pres. hasati Bu I.28; Mhvs 35, 59; hassati Sn.328, 829; ppr. hasamāna is preferable v. l. at J.IV,281 for bhāsamāna; aor. hasi J.II,103; DhA.II,17.-Caus. hāseti [i. e. both fr. has & hṛṣ] to cause to laugh; to please, to gladden Mhvs 32, 46; J.VI,217, 304; DhA.II,85; aor. hāsesi Vin.III,84; ppr. hāsayamana making merry J.I,163, 209. 210; ger. hāsayitvāna Miln.1. -- Caus. II. hāsāpeti SnA 401; J.VI,311. Cp. pari°, pa°. -- 2. to neigh (of horses) J.I,62; VI,581 (strange aor. hasissiṁsu, expl^d as hasiṁsu by C.). -- pp. hasita (& haṭṭha). (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hasita: {'def': '[pp. of hasati, representing both Sk. hasita & hṛṣita] laughing, merry; (nt.) laughter, mirth A.I,261; Pv III,3⁵ (=hasitavant hasita-mukhin C.); Miln.297; Bu I.28; J.I,62 (? read hesita); III,223; Vism.20.

--uppāda “genesis of mirth,” æsthetic faculty Tikp 276; see Cpd. 20 sq. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hasituppāda: {'def': '【阳】发微笑，美观性的根。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】发微笑，生笑。hasituppāda-citta﹐生笑心(阿毘达摩用语，欲地(kāmāvacara)阿罗汉微笑时生起的心之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hassa: {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsya] ridiculous Sn.328; (nt.) 1. laughter, mirth D.I,19; Sn.926; DA.I,72; PvA.226; DhA.III,258; Miln.266. -- 2. a joke, jest hassā pi, even in fun M.I,415; hassena pi the same J.V,481; Miln.220; °vasena in jest J.I,439. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】笑，笑话，笑柄，嘲笑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】笑，笑话，笑柄。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hasula: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. has] is rather doubtful (“of charming speech”? or “smiling”?). It occurs in (corrupted) verse at J.VI,503=Ap 40 (& 307), which is to be read as “aḷāra-bhamukhā (or °pamhā) hasulā sussoññā tanu-majjhimā.” See Kern’s remarks at Toev. s. v. hasula. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hata: {'def': '(hanati 的【过分】), 已杀，已伤害，已破坏。hatabhāva,【阳】被破坏的情况。hatantarāya,【形】已经除掉障碍的人。hatavakāsa,【形】已断除善恶的所有机会的人(Dh.97; DhA.II.188)。reṇuhata,以尘土攻击，以尘土覆盖(struck with dust, covered with dust)。hatatta, 【中】被破坏的状态。hatqvasesaka, 活下来，幸存(surviving D.I.135); pakkhahata, 跛子，残废的人(a cripple)。hatavikkhittaka, 屠杀(slain & cut up, killed & dismembered Vism.179, 194)。nāgahata, 屠龙。hatantarāya,移除障碍(one who removes an obstacle)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(hanati 的【过分】), 已杀，已伤害，已破坏。 ~bhāva, 【阳】被破坏的情况。 ~ntarāya, 【形】已经除掉障碍的人。 ~avakāsa, 【形】已断除善恶的所有机会的人。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of hanti] struck, killed D.II,131; destroyed, spoilt, injured Vin.I,25; Dhs.264; J.II,175; reṇuhata struck with dust, covered with dust Vin.I,32; hatatta (nt.) the state of being destroyed Dh.390; hatâvakāsa who has cut off every occasion (for good and evil) Dh.97; DhA.II,188; hatâvasesaka surviving D.I,135; pakkha° a cripple (q. v.); °vikkhittaka slain & cut up, killed & dismembered Vism.179, 194. -- hata is also used in sense of med., i. e. one who has destroyed or killed, e. g. nāga° slayer of a nāga Vin.II,195; °antarāya one who removes an obstacle PvA.1. -- ahata unsoiled, clean, new D.II,160; J.I,50; Dāvs II.39. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hati: {'def': '(f.) [fr. han] destruction Dāvs.IV,17. (Page 728)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. han),【阴】破坏(destruction Dāvs IV.17.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hattha: {'def': '[fr. hṛ, cp. Vedic hasta] 1. hand D.I,124; A.I,47; Sn.610; J.VI,40. -- forearm Vin.IV,221; of animals S.V,148; J.I,149; °pāda hand and foot M.I,523; A.I,47; J.II,117; PvA.241; DhA.IV,7. sahassa° thousand-armed Mhvs 30, 75; pañca° having five hands J.V,425; J.V,431 (mukhassa ceva catunnaṁ ca caranāṇaṁ vasena etaṁ vuttaṁ); kata° a practised hand, practised (of an archer) S.I,62; A.II,48; J.IV,211. -- hatthe karoti to bring under one’s hand, to take possession of, to subdue J.VI,490; hatthaṁ gacchati to come under somebody’s hand, to come under the sway of J.I,179; hatthaga being in the power of; hatthagata fallen into the hand or possession of, hatthappatta what one can put one’s hand on, i. e. “before his very eyes” Vin.I,15. As °hattha in hand, --handed; e. g. daṇḍa° stick in hand J.I,59; ritta° empty-handed Sdhp.309; vīṇā° lute in hand Mhvs 30, 75. Cp. sa° with one’s own hand. ‹-› 2. the hand as measure, a cubit J.I,34, 233 (asīti°, q. v.); Mhvs 38, 52; Vism.92 (nava° sāṭaka). -- 3. a handful, a tuft (of hair) VvA.197.

--aṅguli finger PvA.124 (+pādaṅguli toe). --aṭṭhika hand-bone KhA 49. --antara a cubit Vism.124. --âpalekhana licking the hands (to clean them after eating -- cp. the 52^nd Sekhiya Vin.IV,198) D.I,166; III,40; M.I,77, 238, 307; A.I,295 (v. l. °āva°); Pug.55. --ābharaṇa bracelet Vin.II,106. --âbhijappana (nt.) incantations to make a man throw up his hands D.I,11; DA.I,97. --âlaṅkāra a (wrist) bracelet, wristlet VvA.167. --kacchapaka making a hollow hand J.III,505. --kamma manual work, craft, workmanship, labour J.I,220; DhA.I,98, 395; IV,64. --gata received, come into the possession of J.I,446; II,94, 105; VvA.149; (nt.) possession J.VI,392. --gahaṇa seizing by the hand Vin.IV,220. --cchinna whose hand is cut off M.I,523; Miln.5. --ccheda cutting off the hand J.I,155 (read sugatiyā va hatthacchedādi). --cchedana=°cheda J.IV,192; DhA.III,482. --tala palm of the hand VvA.7. --ttha [cp. Sk. hasta-stha, of sthā] lit. standing in the hand of somebody, being in somebody’s power (cp. hattha-gata); used as abstr. hatthattha (nt.) power, captivity, °ṁ gacchati & āgacchati to come into the power of (Gen.), to be at the mercy of [cp. hattha-gata & hatthaṁ gacchati] J.II,383 (āyanti hatthatthaṁ); IV,420, 459; V,346 (°ṁ āgata). As pp. hatth-attha-gata in somebody’s power J.I,244; III,204; VI,582. An abstr. is further formed fr. hatthattha as hatthatthatā J.V,349 (°taṁ gata). The BSk. equivalent is hastatvaṁ MVastu II.182. --pajjotikā hand-illumination, scorching of the hand (by holding it in a torch), a kind of punishment M.I,87; A.I,47; II,122; Miln.197; Nd¹ 154. --patāpaka a coal-pan, heating of the hand Vv 33³²; VvA.147; see mandāmukhi. --pasāraṇa stretching out one’s hand Vism.569. --pāsa the side of the hand, vicinity Vin.IV,221, 230. --bandha a bracelet D.I,7; DA.I,89. --vaṭṭaka hand-cart Vin.II,276. --vikāra motion of the hand J.IV,491. --sāra hand-wealth, movable property DhA.I,240; J.I,114; DA.I,216. (Page 728)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(skt. asāḍhā),【阳】轸宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】手，柄，〈圣经〉腕尺（古时的长度单位）。 ~ka, 【阳】像手的东西。【形】有手的。 ~kamma, 【中】手工。 ~gata, 【形】取得的（到手的）。 ~gahaṇa,【中】 ~gāha,【阳】抓在手中，抓着。 ~cchinna,【形】断手的。 ~ccheda, 【阳】 ~chedana, 【中】切断手。 ~tala, 【中】手掌。 ~pasāraṇa, 【中】伸出手。 ~pāsa, 【阳】手的长度。 ~vaṭṭaka,【阳】手推车。 ~vikāra, 【阳】手的运动。 ~sāra, 【阳】最有价值的事物。 ~apalekhana, 【形】食后舔手的。 ~ābharaṇa, 【中】手镯。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】轸宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. hr, cp. Vedic hasta),【阳】手，柄，腕尺(等於手肘至指尖的距离或两个张手，1肘=46~56 cm)。hatthaka,【阳】像手的东西。【形】有手的。hatthakacchapaka,造作空手状(making a hollow hand J.III.505.)。hatthakamma,【中】手工(manual work, craft, workmanship, labour. J I.220; DhA I.98, 395; IV.64.)。hatthaga,掌权(being in the power of)。hatthagata,【形】取得的(到手的)。hatthagahaṇa,【中】hatthagāha,【阳】抓在手中，抓著。hatthacchinna,【形】断手的。hatthaccheda,【阳】hatthachedana(=hatthacchedana),【中】切断手。hatthaṅguli,手指(finger PvA.124 (pādaṅguli,脚趾toe))。hatthaṭṭhika,手骨(hand-bone KhA.49.)。hatthantara, 腕尺(a cubit, 古时一种量度,自肘至中指端,长约18-22英寸Vism 124.)。hatthatala,【中】手掌。hatthatthagata(hatth-attha-gata),在掌控中(in somebody’s power J I.244; III.204; VI.582. )。hatthapajjotikā,烧烤手(hand-illumination, scorching of the hand (by holding it in a torch), a kind of punishment M I.87; A I.47; II.122; Miln 197; Nd1 154. )。hatthapatāpaka,烧煤盘(a coal-pan, heating of the hand Vv 3332; VvA 147; see mandāmukhī煤斗)。hatthabandha,手镯(a bracelet D I.7; DA I.89. )。hatthapasāraṇa,【中】伸出手。hatthapāda,手足。hatthapāsa,【阳】手的长度(the side of the hand, vicinity Vin IV.221, 230。古译为「伸手所及处」。等於两个半肘尺(hattha)的长度，一个肘尺长等於手肘至指尖的距离或两个指距。当僧团在举行任何羯磨法时，比丘们彼此之间的距离必须在一手臂距离之内，如果超过该距离的话，僧团所举行的羯磨法则无效。)。hatthasāra,动产(hand-wealth, movable property DhA I.240; J I.114; DA I.216.)。hatthavaṭṭaka,【阳】手推车(hand-cart Vin.II.276.)。hatthavikāra,【阳】手移动、手的运动。hatthasāra,【阳】最有价值的事物。hatthapalekhana,【形】(食后)舔手的(licking the hands (to clean them after eating, cp. the 52nd Sekhiya Vin IV.198))。hatthahattha,在手头上(in hand)。hatthābharaṇa,【中】手镯、臂钏(bracelet Vin II.106.)。hatthālaṅkāra, 手镯、臂钏(a (wrist) bracelet, wristlet VvA.167.)。sahassahattha,千手(thousand-armedm. Mhvs. 30, 75); pañcahattha, 五只手(having five hands J.V.425; J.V.431)。katahattha, 使用的手，弓箭手(a practised hand, practised (of an archer))。hatthappatta,放在手中(what one can put one’s hand on, i. e. “before his very eyes” Vin I.15. )。\xa0hatthābhijappana,【中】以咒语把人举起(incantations to make a man throw up his hands D.I,11; DA.I,97.)。daṇḍahattha,棍在手(stick in hand J I.59)。rittahattha,空手(empty-handed Sdhp 309)。vīṇāhattha, 琵琶在手(lute in hand Mhvs.30, 75. )。sahattha,用自己的手(with one’s own hand)。hatthaṁ gacchati & āgacchati,权力在望、权力在握(to come into the power of (āyanti hatthatthaṁ) )。hatthe karoti,以手携带、拥有(to bring under one’s hand, to take possession of, to subdue J VI.490.)。hatthaṁ gacchati, 握权(to come under somebody’s hand, to come under the sway of J I.179)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hatthaka: {'def': '(hattha+ka),一手之量(a handful, a quantity (lit. a little hand))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[hattha+ka] a handful, a quantity (lit. a little hand) Vv 45⁵ (=kalāpa VvA.197). (Page 728)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hatthatthara: {'def': '【阳】（披在象身上的）象毡垫。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】(披在象身上的)象毡垫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hatthi: {'def': '(hatthī 〔= 象〕的短化词形)。 ~kantavīṇā, 【阴】诱骗象的琵琶。~kalabha, 【阳】小象。 ~kumbha, 【阳】象的球状额骨。~kula, 【中】象种。 ~kkhandha, 【阳】象背。 ~gopaka, 【阳】看象人。 ~danta, 【阳、中】象牙。 ~damaka, 【阳】驯象师。 ~damma, 【阳】在训练中的象。~pada, 【中】象脚，象足迹。 ~pākāra, 【阳】浮雕象画像的墙壁。~ppabhinna, 【形】怒象。 ~bandha, ~meṇḍa, 【阳】看象人。 ~matta,【形】像象一样的大。 ~māraka, 【阳】猎象人。 ~yāna, 【中】乘象，骑象。 ~yuddha, 【中】象兵战。 ~rūpaka, 【中】象的体形。 ~laṇḍa, 【阳】象粪。 ~liṅgasakuṇa, 【阳】鹮（构成鹮科 (Threskiornithidae) 的几种与鹭有亲缘关系的涉禽，产于东西两半球的温暖地带，以水生动物及两栖动物为食，特征是有一个细长的向下弯的与麻鹬的喙相似的喙）。 ~sālā,【阴】象棚。 ~sippa, 【中】训练象的知识。 ~soṇḍā, 【阴】象鼻。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hatthin: {'def': '[Vedic hastin, lit. endowed with a hand, i. e. having a trunk] an elephant Vin.I,218, 352; II,194 sq. (Nālāgiri)=J.V,335 (Nom. sg. hatthī; Gen. hatthissa); D.I,5; A.II,209; J.I,358; II,102; DhA.I,59 (correct haṭṭhi!), 80 (Acc. pl. hatthī); size of an elephant Miln.312; one of the seven treasures D.I,89; II,174; often mentioned together with horses (°ass’ādayo), e. g. A.IV,107; M.III,104; Vism.269; DhA.I,392. ekacārika-h., an elephant who wanders alone, a royal elephant J.III,175; caṇḍa h. rogue elephant M.I,519; DA.I,37. -- hatthinī (f.) a she-elephant Dh.105. hatthinikā (f.) the same Vin.I,277; D.I,49; DA.I,147.

--atthara elephant rug Vin.I,192; D.I,7; A.I,181. --âcariya elephant trainer Vin.I,345; J.II,94, 221, 411; IV,91; Miln.201. --āroha mounted on an elephant, an elephant-driver D.I,51; S.IV,310. --âlaṅkāra elephant’s trappings J.II,46. --kanta=manta el. charm DhA.I,163. --kantavīṇā lute enticing an elephant DhA.I,163. --kalabha the young of an elephant A.IV,435. --kumbha the frontal globe of an elephant J.II,245. --kula elephant species, ten enum^d at VbhA.397. --kkhandha the shoulder or back of an elephant J.I,313; Mhvs VI,24. PvA.75. 178. --gopaka an elephant’s groom or keeper J.I,187. --damaka elephant tamer M.III,132, 136; SnA 161. --damma an elephant in training M.III,222. --nakha a sort of turrent projecting over the approach to a gate; °ka provided with such turrets, or supported on pillars with capitals of elephant heads Vin.II,169. --pada an elephant’s foot M.I,176, 184; S.V,43; J.I,94. --pākāra “elephant-wall,” wall of the upper storey with figures of elephants in relief Mhvs 33, 5. See Geiger, Mhvs trslⁿ 228, n. 2. --ppabhinna a furious elephant Dh.326; M.I,236. --bandha J.I,135=hatthibhaṇḍa. --bhaṇḍa an elephant-keeper Vin.I,85; II,194. --magga elephant track J.II,102. --maṅgala an elephant festival J.II,46. --matta only as big as an elephant J.I,303. --māraka elephant hunter DhA.I,80. --meṇḍa an elephant’s groom J.III,431; V,287; VI,498. --yāna an elephant carriage, a riding elephant D.I,49; DA.I,147; PvA.55. --yuddha combat of elephants (as a theatrical show) D.I,6. --rūpaka elephant image or picture, toy elephant (+assa°) DhA.II,69. --laṇḍa elephant dung DhA.IV,156. --liṅgasakuṇa a vulture with a bill like an elephant’s trunk DhA.I,164. --vatta elephant habit Nd¹ 92. --sālā elephant stable Vin.I,277; II,194; DhA.I,393. --sippa the elephant lore, the professional knowledge of elephant-training J.II,221 sq. --sutta an elephant-trainer’s manual J.II,46 (cp. Mallinātha on Raghuv. VI,27). --soṇḍaka “elephant trunk,” an under-garment arranged with appendages like elephant trunks Vin.II,137. (Page 728)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hatthī)(=hatthi‘象’的短化词形)。hatthikantavīṇā,【阴】诱骗象的琵琶。hatthikalabha,【阳】小象。hatthikumbha,【阳】象的球状额骨。hatthikula,【中】象种。hatthikkhandha,【阳】象背。hatthigopaka,【阳】看象人。hatthidanta,【阳】【中】象牙。hatthidamaka,【阳】驯象师。hatthidamma,【阳】在训练中的象。hatthipada,【中】象脚，象足迹。hatthipākāra,【阳】浮雕象画像的墙壁。hatthippabhinna,【形】怒象。hatthibandha, hatthimeṇḍa,【阳】看象人。hatthimatta,【形】像象一样的大。hatthimāraka,【阳】猎象人。hatthiyāna,【中】乘象，骑象。hatthiyuddha,【中】象兵战。hatthirūpaka,【中】象的体形。hatthilaṇḍa,【阳】象粪。hatthiliṅgasakuṇa,【阳】鹮(构成鹮科 (Threskiornithidae) 或朱鹭科的几种与鹭有亲缘关系的涉禽，产於东西两半球的温暖地带，以水生动物及两栖动物为食，特徵是有一个细长的向下弯的与麻鹬的喙相似的喙)。hatthisālā,【阴】象棚。hatthisippa,【中】训练象的知识。hatthisoṇḍā,【阴】象鼻。ekacārika-hatthi., 独行之象、王家之象(an elephant who wanders alone, a royal elephant J III.175.)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hatthinī: {'def': '【阴】母象。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(=hatthinikā),【阴】母象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hatthācariya: {'def': '【阳】驯象者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】训象者。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hatthāroha: {'def': '【阳】骑象者。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】骑象者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hatthī: {'def': '【阳】象。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】象。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hava: {'def': '[cp. Vedc hava; hū or hvā to call] calling, challenge Dāvs II.14. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Have: {'def': '【无】当然，的确。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [ha+ve] indeed, certainly Vin.I,2; D.II,168; S.I,169; Sn.120, 181, 323, 462; Dh.104, 151, 177, 382; J.I,31, 365; DhA.II,228. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Vedc hava; hū or hvā to call),【无】叫做，挑战(calling, challenge)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Havya: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic havya; fr. hū to sacrifice] an oblation, offering S.I,169; Sn.463 sq.; 490. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】供奉。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic havya; fr. hū to sacrifice),【中】供奉(an oblation, offering)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haya: {'def': '【阳】马。 ~potaka, 【阳】小马。 ~vāhī, 【形】被马拉的（车等）。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic haya, fr. hi to impel. A diff. etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. haedus] 1. a horse Vv 64¹; J.II,98; Miln.2. -- 2. speed M.I,446. --°vāhin drawn by horses J.VI,125. (Page 729)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】马。hayapotaka,【阳】小马。hayavāhī,【形】被马拉的(车等)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hayānīka: {'def': '【中】骑兵，马兵。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】骑兵，马兵。(p356)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hañci: {'def': '(indecl.) [haṁ+ci] if Kvu 1. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(indecl.)(haṁ+ci),假如(if)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haññana: {'def': '【中】虐待，苦恼，杀害。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】虐待，苦恼，杀害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haññati: {'def': '(han+ya), 被杀，被破坏。【过】haññi。【现分】haññamāna。S.42.3./IV,309.︰‘Ime sattā haññantu vā bajjhantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā ahesuṁ iti vā’ti.(这些有情，当杀！当捕！当斩！当灭！勿使存在。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& hañchati see hanati. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(han + ya), 被杀，被破坏。【过】 haññi。【现分】 haññamāna。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haŋsa: {'def': '【阳】天鹅。 ~potaka, 【阳】小天鹅。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haŋsana: {'def': '【中】（毛发等）竖立的。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haŋsati: {'def': '(haŋs + a), 1. （毛发等）竖起。 2. 高兴。 haŋsi, 【过】。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haŋseti: {'def': '(haŋsati 的【使】)。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haŋsī: {'def': '(haŋsa 的【阴】)。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haṁ: {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Sk. haṁ] an exclamation “I say, hey, hallo, look here!” Vv 50⁸ (=nipāta VvA.212); J.V,422; VvA.77. Sometimes as han ti, e. g. J.V,203; DhA.III,108. See also handa & hambho. In combⁿ iti haṁ (=iti) Sn.783; Nd¹ 71; or with other part. like haṁ dhī DhA.I,179, 216 (here as haṁ di). (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(indecl.)(cp. Sk. haṁ), 感叹词(an exclamation “I say, hey, hallo, look here!” Sometimes as han ti)。iti haṁ(=iti)。haṁ dhī(DhA I.179, 216 (here as haṁ di))。handa, 喂！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haṁsa: {'def': '【阳】天鹅。haṁsapotaka,【阳】小天鹅。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [cp. Sk. haṁsa=Lat. (h)anser “goose,” Gr. xήn= Ags. gōs=E. goose, Ger. gans] 1. a water-bird, swan S.I,148; Sn.221, 350, 1134; Dh.91, 175; DhA.II,170; J.II,176 sq.; SnA 277; Pv.II,12³; III,3⁴. Considered as (suvaṇṇa-) rāja-haṁsa (“golden royal swan”) to be king of the birds: J.I,207; II,353; Vism.650. -- At SnA 277 Bdhgh gives various kinds of haṁsa’s, viz. harita°, tamba°, khīra°, kāḷa°, pāka°, suvaṇṇa°. -- pāka° a species of water bird J.V,356; VI,539; SnA 277. -- f. haṁsī Dāvs.V,24 (rāja°). -- 2. a kind of building J.I,92.

--potaka a young swan Vism.153 (in simile). --rāja the king of swans Vv 35⁸; Vin.IV,259. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(fr. haṁsati), (毛发等)直立，倒竖(bristling)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(cp. Sk. haṁsa),1.鹅(a water-bird, swan)。suvaṇṇa-rāja-haṁsa,金鹅王(“golden royal swan”) to be king of the birds: J I.207; II.353; Vism.650.) haritahaṁsa-tambahaṁsa-khīrahaṁsa-kāḷahaṁsa-pākahaṁsa-suvaṇṇahaṁsesu, At SnA.277.)。pākahaṁsa,(a species of water bird J V.356; VI.539; SnA 277)。f. haṁsī Dāvs V.24 (rāja°)。2.一种建筑物(a kind of building J.I.92.)。haṁsapotaka,幼鹅(a young swan)。haṁsarāja, 鹅王(the king of swans)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [fr. haṁsati] bristling: see lomahaṁsa Sn.270 etc. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haṁsana: {'def': '【中】(毛发等)竖立的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(fr. hrs),【形】【中】(毛发等)直竖(bristling, see lomahaṁsa)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.-nt.) [fr. hṛṣ] bristling, see lomahaṁsa Sn.270 etc. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haṁsati: {'def': '(毛发等)直竖(to bristle, stand on end (said of the hair)。caus. haṁseti使直竖。pp. haṭṭha.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(haṁs高兴+a), 1.(毛发等)竖起。2.高兴。haṁsi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic harṣate Idg. *ĝher to bristle (of hair), as in Lat. horreo (“horrid, horripilation”), ēr hedgehog (“bristler”)=Gr. xήr id.; Lat. hirtus, hispidus “rough”; Ags. gorst=gorse; Ger. granne & many others, for which see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v. ēr. -- The Dhtp (309) defines as “tuṭṭhi.” See also ghaṁsati², pahaṁsati², pahaṭṭha², pahaṁsita²] to bristle, stand on end (said of the hair) Vin.III,8; M.I,79; Caus. haṁseti to cause to bristle J.V,154. -- pp. haṭṭha. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haṁseti: {'def': '[haṁsati高兴] 的【使】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haṁsi: {'def': '(indecl.) [?]=hañci if, in case that J.VI,343. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haṁsī: {'def': '(haṁsa 的【阴】)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Haṅkhati: {'def': 'see paṭi°. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haṭa: {'def': '² [cp. Sk. haṭha & haṭa] a kind of water-plant, Pistia stratiotes D.I,166; M.I,78, 156; Pug.55 (text sāta-); A.I,241, 295 (v. l. sāta; cp. hāṭaka). (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(harati 的【过分】)。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(harati 的【过分】), 已带，获得(taken, carried off)。haṭahaṭakeso, 使(头发)蓬松(with dishevelled hair, S.4.19./I,115)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(cp. Sk. haṭha & haṭa), 水芙蓉、水浮莲(可净化污水)(Pistia stratiotes. D I.166; M I.78, 156; Pug 55 (text sāta-); A I.241, 295 (v. l. sāta; cp. hāṭaka))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of harati] taken, carried off Vin.IV,23; J.I,498. haṭa-haṭa-kesa with dishevelled hair S.I,115. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Haṭha: {'def': '(Dhtp.101=balakkāra),【阳】暴力(violence)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[only as lexicogr. word; Dhtp 101=balakkāra] violence. (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】暴力。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Haṭṭha: {'def': '[pp. of haṁsati] 1. bristling, standing on end M.I,83; Dāvs.V,64; lomahaṭṭhajāta (cp. °loma) with bristling hairs, excited D.II,240; Sn.p. 14. -- 2. joyful, happy Vin.I,15; Sn.1017; J.I,31, 335; II,32; often comb^d with either tuṭṭha (e. g. J.VI,427; PvA.113), or pahaṭṭha (DhA.III,292). (Page 727)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(haṁsati 的【过分】), 1.已毛发竖立(bristling, standing on end)。2.已欢喜，已快乐(joyful, happy)。haṭṭhatuṭṭha,【形】充满欢笑的。haṭṭhaloma,【形】毛发竖立的。lomahaṭṭhajāta, 毛发竖立(with bristling hairs, excited)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(haŋsati 的【过分】), 1. 已欢喜，已快乐。 2. 已毛发竖立。~tuṭṭha, 【形】充满欢笑的。 ~loma, 【形】毛发竖立的。(p355)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

He: {'def': '(indecl.) a vocative (exclam.) particle “eh,” “here,” hey M.I,125, 126 (+je); DhA.I,176 (double). (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(呼格的虚词)嗨！啊！喂！亲爱的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '（呼格的虚词）嗨！啊！喂！亲爱的。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hehiti: {'def': 'is Fut. 3^rd sg. of bhavati, e. g. Bu II.10=J.I,4 (v. 20). (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'is Fut. 3rd sg. of bhavati(他将存在)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hema: {'def': '【中】黄金。 ~jāla, 【中】金网。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】黄金。hemajāla,【中】金网。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Epic Sk. heman] gold D.II,187; J.VI,574.

--jāla golden netting (as cover of chariots etc.) A.IV,393; Vv 35¹, 36² (°ka). --vaṇṇa golden-coloured D.II,134; Th.2, 333; ThA.235; DhsA.317. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hemanta: {'def': '【阳】冬天(寒季，九月十六至正月十五)。hemantika,【形】冬天的，冰冷的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】冬天。 ~ntika, 【形】冬天的，冰冷的。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[hema(=hima)+anta] winter A.IV,138; J.I,86; Miln.274. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hemantika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hemanta] destined for the winter, wintry, icy cold Vin.I,15, 31 (rattiyo), 288; M.I,79; S.V,51; A.IV,127; Vism.73. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hemavataka: {'def': '【形】住在喜马拉雅山的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】住在喜马拉雅山的。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. himavant] belonging to, living in the Himālaya J.I,506; IV,374, 437; °vatika id. Dpvs.V,54. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hemavatika: {'def': 'Hemavata m. [BSk. Haimavata] 雪山部 [部派の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Hemavaṇṇa: {'def': '【形】金色的。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】金色的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Heraññika: {'def': '【阳】金匠，兑换业者。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& °aka) [fr. hirañña, cp. BSk. hairaṇyika Divy 501; MVastu III,443] goldsmith (? for which suvaṇṇakāra!), banker, money-changer Vism.515=VbhA.91; J.I,369; III,193; DA.I,315; Miln.331 (goldsmith?).

--phalaka the bench (i. e. table, counter) of a money changer or banker Vism.437=VbhA.115; J.II,429; III,193 sq. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】金匠，兑换业者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hesa: {'def': '(=hi确实+esa那个人)﹐确实，那个人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hesati: {'def': '[both heṣ (Vedic) & hreṣ (Epic Sk.); in Pāli confused with hṛṣ (hasati): see hasati²] to neigh J.I,51, 62 (here hasati); V,304 (T. siṁsati for hiṁsati; C. expl^s hiṁsati as “hessati,” cp. abhihiṁsanā for °hesanā). ‹-› pp. hesita. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(both hes (Vedic) & hres (Epic Sk.)), 马嘶声( to neigh)。pp. hesita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hesita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of hesati] neighing J.I,62 (here as hasita); Mhvs 23, 72. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. of hesati,【中】马嘶声(neighing)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hessati: {'def': '1. Fut. of bhavati(将存在)。2. Fut. of jahati。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'is: 1. Fut. of bhavati, e. g. J.III,279. -- 2. Fut. of jahati, e. g. J.IV,415; VI,441. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hesā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. hesati] neighing, neigh Dāvs.V,56. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. hesati),【阴】hesārava,【阳】马嘶声(neighing, neigh)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 hesārava, 【阳】马嘶声。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hetaṁ: {'def': '=hi etaṁ. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '=hi etaṁ(确实，这)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hetu: {'def': '【阳】因素，理由，情况。 ~ka, 【形】联系因素的。 ~ppabhava, 【形】由因素而出现的。 ~vāda, 【阳】因素的理论。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic hetu, fr. hi to impel] 1. cause, reason, condition S.I,134; A.III,440 sq.; Dhs.595, 1053; Vism.450; Tikp 11, 233, 239. In the older use paccaya and hetu are almost identical as synonyms, e. g. n’atthi hetu n’atthi paccayo D.I,53; aṭṭha hetū aṭṭha paccayā D.III,284 sq.; cp. S.III,69 sq.; D.II,107; M.I,407; A.I,55 sq., 66, 200; IV,151 sq.; but later they were differentiated (see Mrs. Rh. D., Tikp introd. p. xi. sq.). The diff. between the two is expl^d e. g. at Nett 78 sq.; DhsA.303. -- There are a number of other terms, with which hetu is often comb^d, apparently without distinction in meaning, e. g. hetu paccaya kāraṇa Nd² 617 (s. v. saṅkhā); mūla h. nidāna sambhava pabhava samuṭṭhāna āhāra ārammaṇa paccaya samudaya: frequent in the Niddesa (see Nd² p. 231, s. v. mūla). ‹-› In the Abhidhamma we find hetu as “moral condition” referring to the 6 mūlas or bases of good & bad kamma, viz. lobha, dosa, moha and their opposites: Dhs.1053 sq.; Kvu 532 sq. -- Four kinds of hetu are distinguished at DhsA.303=VbhA.402, viz. hetu°, paccaya°, uttama°, sādhāraṇa°. Another 4 at Tikp 27, viz. kusala°, akusala°, vipāka°, kiriya°, and 9 at Tikp 252, viz. kusala°, akusala°, avyākata°, in 3X3 constellations (cp. DhsA.303). -- On term in detail see Cpd. 279 sq.; Dhs. trslⁿ §§ 1053, 1075. -- Abl. hetuso from or by way of (its) cause S.V,304; A.III,417. -- Acc. hetu (-°) (elliptically as adv.) on account of, for the sake of (with Gen.); e. g. dāsa-kammakara-porisassa hetu M.II,187; kissa hetu why? A.III,303; IV,393; Sn.1131; Pv.II,8¹ (=kiṁ nimittaṁ PvA.106); pubbe kata° by reason (or in consequence) of what was formerly done A.I,173 sq.; dhana° for the sake of gain Sn.122. -- 2. suitability for the attainment of Arahantship, one of the 8 conditions precedent to becoming a Buddha Bu II.59=J.I,14, 44. ‹-› 3. logic Miln.3.

--paccaya the moral causal relation, the first of the 24 Paccayas in the Paṭṭhāna Tikp 1 sq., 23 sq., 60 sq., 287, 320; Dukp 8, 41 sq.; Vism.532; VbhA.174. --pabhava arising from a cause, conditioned Vin.I,40; DhA.I,92. --vāda the theory of cause, as adj. “proclaimer of a cause,” name of a sect M.I,409; opp. ahetu-vāda “denier of a cause” (also a sect) M.I,408; ahetu-vādin id. J.V,228, 241 (=Jtm 149). (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】因素，理由，情况。hetuka,【形】联系因素的。hetuppabhava,【形】由因素而出现的。hetuvāda,【阳】因素的理论。pubbe katahetu由於前世所作业(宿命造)。issara-nimmāna hetu﹐由於自在天创造(尊佑造)。ahetu-appaccaya由於无因、无缘。“Ye dhammā hetuppabhavā, tesaṁ hetuṁ Tathāgato āha; Tesañca yo nirodho, evaṁvādī mahāsamaṇo”ti.(梵文Ye dharmā hetu-prabhavā hetuṃ tesaṃ Tathāgato avadat; tesṃ ca yo nirodho evaṃ vādī mahā-wramaṇah.)「凡是诸法因缘生，如来说诸因。诸法因缘灭，大沙门如是说。」《普端严》Sp.Mv.V,975.；CS:Mv.pg.256：Ye dhammā hetuppabhavāti hetuppabhavā nāma pañcakkhandhā; tenassa dukkhasaccaṁ dasseti. Tesaṁ hetuṁ Tathāgato āhāti tesaṁ hetu nāma samudayasaccaṁ; tañca Tathāgato āhāti dasseti. Tesañca yo nirodhoti tesaṁ ubhinnampi saccānaṁ yo appavattinirodho; tañca Tathāgato āhāti attho. Tenassa nirodhasaccaṁ dasseti. Maggasaccaṁ panettha sarūpato adassitampi nayato dassitaṁ hoti, nirodhe hi vutte tassa sampāpako maggo vuttova hoti. Atha vā tesañca yo nirodhoti ettha tesaṁ yo nirodho ca nirodhupāyo cāti evaṁ dvepi saccāni dassitāni hontīti. Idāni tamevatthaṁ paṭipādento āha--“evaṁvādī mahāsamaṇo”ti.(凡是诸法因缘生：‘因缘生’是指五蕴；以此令见到苦谛。如来说诸因：诸因是集谛，如来令见它。诸法因缘灭：这二谛皆是非存在的灭谛；这是如来说的意思。如来令见灭谛。然而，道谛好像未出示的道理令出现，已说‘灭’而导致‘道’之说。诸法因缘灭，此处诸法因缘‘灭’及‘接近灭’，如是令见到二谛。大沙门如是说：今令正向之说。) ahetuka﹐无因人(结生时不具有无贪、无瞋、无痴之因的人)。dvihetuka﹐二因人(结生时具有无贪、无瞋之因的人)。tihetuka﹐三因人(结生时具有无贪、无瞋、无痴之因的人，只有这类人才能证得禅那或道果。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hetuka: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. hetu] connected with a cause, causing or caused, conditioned by, consisting in Mhvs 1, 45 (maṇi-pallaṅka°); Dhs.1009 (pahātabba°); VbhA.17 (du°, ti°). usually as sa° and a° (with & without a moral condition) A.I,82; Vism.454 sq.; Dukp 24 sq. sa° Dhs.1073 (trslⁿ “having root-conditions as concomitants”); Kvu 533 (“accompanied by moral conditions”); a° S.III,210 (°vāda, as a “diṭṭhi”); Vism.450. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hetutta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. formation fr. hetu] reason, consequence; Abl. in consequence of (-°) Vism.424 (diṭṭhivisuddhi°). (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hetuvādin: {'def': 'm. 說因部 [部派の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Hetuye: {'def': 'see bhavati. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hevaṁ: {'def': 'see hi. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Heṭhaka: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. heṭheti] one who harasses, a robber J.IV,495, 498. Cp. vi°. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】骚扰的人，困扰的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】骚扰的人，困扰的人。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Heṭhanā: {'def': '【阴】骚扰。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】骚扰。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. heṭheti] harassing D.II,243; VbhA.75. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Heṭheti: {'def': '(heṭh+e), 骚扰，烦恼，伤害。【过】heṭhesi。【过分】heṭhita。【现分】heṭhenta, heṭhayamāna。【独】heṭhetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic heḍ=hel or hīḍ (see hīḷeti)] to harass, worry, injure J.IV,446, 471; Pv III,5² (=bādheti PvA.198); ppr. a-heṭhayaṁ Dh.49; S.I,21. med. a-heṭhayāna S.I,7; IV,179; ger. heṭhayitvāna J.III,480. -- pp. heṭhayita J.IV,447. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(heṭh + e), 骚扰，烦恼，伤害。【过】 heṭhesi。【过分】 heṭhita。【现分】 heṭhenta, heṭhayamāna。【独】 heṭhetvā。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Heṭṭhato: {'def': '【副】从下面。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】从下面。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [fr. heṭṭhā] below, from below Ps.I,84; Dhs.1282, 1284, Mhvs 5, 64. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Heṭṭhima: {'def': '【形】降低的。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】降低的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [compar.-superl. formation fr. heṭṭhā] lower, lowest Vin.IV,168; Dhs.1016; Tikp 41; PvA.281; Sdhp.238, 240, 256. °tala the lowest level J.I,202. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Heṭṭhā: {'def': '【副】在下面。heṭṭhābhāga,【阳】较低的部分。heṭṭhāmañce,【副】在床下。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】在下面。 ~bhāga, 【阳】较低的部分。 ~mañce, 【副】在床下。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Vedic adhastāt=adhaḥ+Abl. suff. °tāt] down, below, underneath Vin.I,15; D.I,198; It.114; J.I,71; VvA.78; PvA.113. As prep. with Gen. (Abl.) or cpd. “under” J.I,176; II,103; lower in the manuscript, i. e. before, above J.I,137, 206, 350; VvA.203; lower, farther on J.I,235.

--āsana a lower seat J.I,176. --nāsika-(sota) the lower nostril J.I,164. --bhāga lower part J.I,209, 484. --mañce underneath the bed J.I,197 (°mañcato from under the bed); II,275, 419; IV,365. --vāta the wind below, a wind blowing underneath J.I,481. --sīsaka head downwards J.III,13. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hi: {'def': '(indecl.) [cp. Sk. hi] for, because; indeed, surely Vin.I,13; D.I,4; Dh.5; Sn.21; Pv.II,1¹⁸; II,7¹⁰ (=hi saddo avadhāraṇe PvA.103); SnA 377 (=hi-kāro nipāto padapūraṇa-matto); PvA.70, 76. In verse J.IV,495. h’etaṁ =hi etaṁ; no h’etaṁ not so D.I,3. hevaṁ=hi evaṁ. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】因为，的确。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】因为，的确。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hidaṁ: {'def': '(hi + idaṁ) ind.因为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hikkā: {'def': '【阴】打嗝。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Epic Sk. hikkā, fr. hikk to sob; onomat.] hiccup Sdhp.279. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】打嗝。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hikkāra: {'def': '[hik+kāra]=hikkā, VbhA.70. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hima: {'def': '【中】雪，冰。 ~vantu, 【形】有雪的，有冰的，喜马拉雅山。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [cp. Vedic hima; Gr. xeίma & xeimw/n winter, xiw/n snow; Av. ƶaya winter; Lat. hiems etc.] cold, frosty DhsA.317. -- (nt.) ice, snow J.III,55.

--pāta-samaya the season of snow-fall Vin.I,31, 288; M.I,79; J.I,390; Miln.396. --vāta a snow or ice wind J.I,390. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic hima),【中】雪，冰(ice, snow)。himavantu,【形】有雪的，有冰的，喜马拉雅山。himapāta-samaya the season of snow-fall. himavāta a snow or ice wind.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Himavant: {'def': '(adj.) [hima+vant] snowy J.V,63 (=himayutta C.). (m.) Himavā the Himālaya: see Dict. of Names. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. [〃hima-vant] 雪山, ヒマラヤ山. -padesa 雪山地方. ~ pabbatarājan 山王雪山.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(hima+vant),有雪的(snowy (=himayutta C.))。Himavā,【阳】喜玛拉雅山(the Himālaya)。Himavantapassato, 喜玛拉雅山麓。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'Himavanta: m. [〃hima-vant] 雪山, ヒマラヤ山. -padesa 雪山地方. ~ pabbatarājan 山王雪山. -passa 雪山辺', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': 'm. [〃hima-vant] 雪山, 喜馬拉雅山. -padesa 雪山地方. ~ pabbatarājan 山王雪山.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》李瑩譯词数 708.'}

Himavanta: {'def': 'Himavant: m. [〃hima-vant] 雪山, ヒマラヤ山. -padesa 雪山地方. ~ pabbatarājan 山王雪山. -passa 雪山辺', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Hind: {'def': '﹐【字根I.】到处走路(to walk about)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hindagu: {'def': '[probably for indagu, inda+gu (=°ga), i. e. sprung from Indra. The h perhaps fr. hindu. The spelling h° is a corrupt one] man, only found in the Niddesa in stock defⁿ of jantu or nara; both spellings (with & without h) occur; see Nd¹ 3=Nd² 249. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hindi: {'def': '辛地(语)，当今印度官方语言之一。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hintāla: {'def': '【阳】海枣，枣椰子(marshy date plam﹐一种棕榈 (Phoenix dactylifera) 的长圆形果实，是北非和西亚人的主要食品)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[hiṁ+tāla] a kind of palm, Phœnix paludosa Vin.I,190; DhA.III,451. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】海枣，枣椰子（一种棕榈 (Phoenix dactylifera) 的长圆形果实，是北非和西亚人的主要食品，同时也大量引入到其它国家）。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hirañña: {'def': '【中】未加工的黄金。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】未加工的黄金。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic hiraṇya; see etym. under hari & cp. Av. ƶaranya gold] gold Vin.I,245, 276; II,159; A.IV,393; Sn.285, 307, 769; Nd² 11; gold-piece S.I,89; J.I,92. Often together with suvaṇṇa Vin.I,150; D.II,179; h°-suvaṇṇaṁ gold & money M.III,175; J.I,341. °olokana (-kamma) valuation of gold J.II,272. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiraññavatī: {'def': '凞連禅河, 有金 [河の名, 仏入滅地付近, 沙羅双樹はこの河岸にあった]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Hiri: {'def': '& hirī (f.) [cp. Vedic hrī] sense of shame, bashfulness, shyness S.I,33; D.III,212; A.I,51, 95; III,4 sq., 331, 352; IV,11, 29; Sn.77, 253, 719; Pug.71; Pv IV.7³; J.I,129, 207; Nett 50, 82; Vism.8. Expl^d Pug.23 sq.; is one of the cāga-dhana’s: see cāga (cp. Jtm 31¹). -- Often contrasted to & combined with ottappa (cp. below) fear of sin: A.I,51; D.III,284; S.II,206; It.36; Nett 39; their difference is expl^d at Vism.464 (“kāya-duccarit’ādīhi hiriyatī ti hiri; lajjāy’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ; tehi yeva ottappatī ti ottappaṁ; pāpato ubbegass’etaṁ adhivacanaṁ”); J.I,129 sq.; DhsA.124.

--ottappa shame & fear of sin M.I,271; S.II,220; It.34; A.II,78; J.I,127, 206; Tikp 61; Vism.221; DhA.III,73. Frequently spelt otappa, e. g. J.I,129; It.36. --kopīna a loin cloth M.I,10; Vism.31, 195. --nisedha restrained by conscience S.I,7, 168=Sn.462; Dh.143; DhA.III,86. --bala the power of conscientiousness A.II,150; Dhs.30, 101. --mana modest in heart, conscientious D.II,78; M.I,43; S.II,159. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Hirī,【阴】羞怯，惭。hirikopīna,【中】唤醒羞怯(即：性器官)。hirimantu,【形】谦逊的，害羞的。《阿毘达摩义广释》(Vibhv.p.84.)：「‘惭’即厌恶於身恶行等。」(Hirīyati kāya-duccaritādīhi jigucchatīti hirī)。A.2.1-9./I,51.︰Hirī ca ottappañca. Ime kho, bhikkhave, dve sukkā dhammā lokaṁ na pāleyyuṁ, nayidha paññāyetha mātāti vā mātucchāti vā mātulānīti vā ācariyabhariyāti vā garūnaṁ dārāti vā. Sambhedaṁ loko agamissa, yathā ajeḷakā kukkuṭasūkarā soṇasiṅgālā.(诸比丘！若这两种白法(惭愧)不护世，则世上所谓母、或所谓母、或所谓舅母、或所谓师母、或所谓导师之妻，将不拣别，世将混乱。譬如羊、山羊、鸡、猪、狗、野狼等。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】羞怯，羞愧感。 ~kopīna, 【中】唤醒羞怯（即：性器官）。 ~mantu, 【形】谦逊的，害羞的。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hirika: {'def': '(& hirīka) (adj.) [fr. hiri] having shame, only as --° in neg. ahirika shameless, unscrupulous A.I,51, 85; II,219; Pug.19; It.27 (°īka); J.I,258 (chinna° id.); nt. °ṁ unscrupulousness Pug.19. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hirimant: {'def': '(& hirīmant)(‹hiri),【形】羞怯，惭(bashful, modest, shy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& hirīmant) (adj.) [fr. hiri] bashful, modest, shy D.III,252, 282; S.II,207 sq.; IV,243 sq.; A.II,218, 227; III,2 sq., 7 sq., 112; IV,2 sq., 38, 109; V,124, 148; It.97; Pug.23. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hirivera: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. hrīvera] a kind of Andropogon (sort of perfume) J.VI,537; DA.I,81. Hilādati [hlād] to refresh oneself, to be glad Dhtp 152 (=sukha), 591 (id.). (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiriya: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [fr. hiri] shame, conscientiousness VvA.194. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiriyati: {'def': '(hirīyati) [see harāyati] to blush, to be shy; to feel conscientious scruple, to be ashamed Pug.20, 24; Miln.171; Vism.464 (hirīyati); DhsA.149. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hirottappa: {'def': '【中】对违犯教规的羞愧和害怕。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】对违犯教规的羞愧和害怕。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hirīyanā: {'def': '【阴】参考 hiri。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】羞怯，惭。参考 hiri。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hirīyati: {'def': '(hiri 的【派】), 脸红，害羞，惭愧。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(hiri‘惭’的【派】), 脸红，害羞，惭愧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of dahati¹] useful, suitable, beneficial, friendly A.I,58, 155 sq.; II,191; D.III,211 sq.; Dh.163. -- (m.) a friend, benefactor Mhvs 3, 37. -- (nt.) benefit, blessing, good Vin.I,4; Sn.233; A.II,96 sq., 176; It.78; SnA 500. -- Opp. ahita A.I,194; M.I,332.

--ânukampin friendly & compassionate D.I,4, 227; Sn.693; J.I,241, 244. --ûpacāra beneficial conduct. saving goodness J.I,172. --esin desiring another’s welfare, well-wishing M.II,238; S.IV,359; V,157; °tā seeking another’s welfare, solicitude Dhs.1056; DhsA.362; VvA.260. --kara a benefactor Mhvs 4, 65. Hinati [hi, hinoti] to send; only in cpd. pahiṇati. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】利益，祝福，好处，福利。【形】有用的，有益的。【阳】朋友。 ~kara, 【形】做有益的（事）。 ~āvaha, 【形】有益的。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】利益，祝福，好处，福利。【形】有用的，有益的。【阳】朋友。hitakara,【形】做有益的(事)。hitāvaha,【形】有益的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hitesī: {'def': '【阳】恩人，寻求他人的福利(Hitassa esanavasena hitesitā.DhsA.CS:p.395)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】恩人，想他人的福利。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hitvā: {'def': '舍弃了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hiyyo: {'def': '【副】昨天。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】昨天。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adv.) [Vedic hyaḥ, Gr. xqέs, Lat. heri; Goth. gistradagis “to-morrow,” E. yester-day, Ger. gestern etc.] yesterday Vin.I,28; II,77; J.I,70, 237; V,461; VI,352, 386; Miln.9. In sequence ajja hiyyo pare it seems to mean “to-morrow”; thus at Vin.IV,63, 69; J.IV,481 (=sve C.). See para 2. c. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiŋsana: {'def': '【中】 hiŋsanā, hiŋsā, 【阴】欺负，伤害。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hiŋsati: {'def': '(hiŋs + a), 伤害，欺负。【过】 hiŋsi。【过分】 hiŋsita。【现分】 hiŋsanta, hiŋsamāna。【独】 hiŋsitvā。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hiŋsāpeti: {'def': '(hiŋsati 的【使】), 使伤害。【过】 hiŋsāpesi。【过分】 hiŋsāpita。【独】 hiŋsāpetvā。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hiṁsana: {'def': '【中】hiṁsanā, hiṁsā,【阴】欺负，伤害。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. hiṁs] striking, hurting, killing Mhvs 15, 28. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṁsati: {'def': ' [hiṁs, Vedic hinasti & hiṁsanti] 1. to hurt, injure D.II,243; S.I,70; Sn.515; Dh.132; Pv.II,9⁹ (=bādheti C.); III,4² (=paribādheti C.); SnA 460. -- 2. to kill M.I,39; Dh.270. -- Caus. II. hiṁsāpeti PvA.123. -- Cp. vi°. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hiṁs+a), 伤害，欺负。【过】hiṁsi。【过分】hiṁsita。【现分】hiṁsanta, hiṁsamāna。【独】hiṁsitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hiṁsitar: {'def': '[n. ag. fr. hiṁsati] one who hurts D.II,243; J.IV,121. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṁsā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic hiṁsā] injury, killing J.I,445; Dhtp 387. hiṁsa-mano wish to destroy Dh.390. Opp. a°. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṁsāpeti: {'def': '(hiṁsati‘伤害’的【使】), 使伤害。【过】hiṁsāpesi。【过分】hiṁsāpita。【独】hiṁsāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hiṅgu: {'def': '【中】阿魏（多种波斯和印度阿魏属 (Ferula) 植物〔尤指 Ferulaassafoetida, Ferula foetida 或 Ferula narthex〕的恶臭的胶脂，呈珠状或黑色块状，有强烈的臭味，以前医学上作为解痉药应用）。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(梵语同),【中】阿魏、兴渠(asafoetida﹐多种波斯和印度阿魏属 (Ferula) 植物〔尤指Ferula assafoetida, Ferula foetida 或 Ferula narthex〕的恶臭的胶脂，呈珠状或黑色块状，有强烈的臭味，作为解痉药)为五辛之一。又作兴瞿、兴旧、兴宜、形虞、形具。产於新疆和阗、西藏、印度、伊朗、阿富汗等地，为高达二公尺之草本植物。根粗如细蔓菁之根，色白，其臭如蒜，可供食用。若切断茎枝，在断口处会渗出液体，凝固后供作药用，称为阿魏药，可驱除小虫或除臭。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. hiṅgu] the plant asafetida Vin.I,201; VvA.186.

--cuṇṇa powder of asafetida DhA.IV,171. --rāja a sort of bird J.VI,539. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṅgulaka: {'def': '【中】 hiṅguli, 【阴】朱砂，朱红色。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】hiṅguli,【阴】朱砂，朱红色。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. hiṅgula, nt.] vermilion; as jāti° J.V,67. 416; VvA⁴, 168. Also as °ikā (f.) VvA.324. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṅguli: {'def': '[Sk. hiṅguli] vermilion Mhvs 27, 18. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṅkāra: {'def': '(indecl.) [hiṁ=hi, +kāra, i. e. the syllable “hiṁ”] an exclamation of surprise or wonder J.VI,529 (C. hin ti kāraṇaṁ). (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hiṇḍati: {'def': '[*Sk. hiṇḍ] to roam Dhtp 108 (=āhiṇḍana). See ā°. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Homa: {'def': '(m. & nt.) [fr. hu, juhati] oblation D.I,9; DA.I,93 (lohita°). (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. hu, juhati),【中】【阳】祭品(oblation; DA I.93 (lohitahoma))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】祭品。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Horā: {'def': '(原本是希腊语；Sk. horā “hour”),【阴】小时，钟头，音译：火罗。horāpāṭhaka(horā +pāṭhaka, i. e. expert),【阳】占星家(astrologer)。horāyanta,【中】显示时间的仪器，时钟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】小时，钟头，…点钟。 ~pāṭhaka, 【阳】占星家。 ~yanta, 【中】显示时间的仪器，时钟。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Horālocana: {'def': '【中】手表，时钟。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】手表，时钟。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Horāpāṭhaka: {'def': '[late Sk. horā “hour” (in astrol. literature, fr. Gr. w(ρa: cp. Winternitz, Gesch. d. Ind. Lit. III,569 sq.)+pāṭhaka, i. e. expert) an astrologer Mhvs 35, 71. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hoti: {'def': '(hū+a), 是，有，存在。【过】ahosi。【现分】honta。【义】hotabba。【不】hotuṁ。【句型】「Gen.(A) + Nom.(B) + hoti(动词)」，表达「拥有」的句型(表『A有 B』(A的B存在)，「命令式」表达「意志、强烈的愿望」。ahosi,他那时是。ahosi,你那时是。ahosiṁ,我那时是。ahesuṁ,他们那时是。ahuvatha,你们那时是。ahumha,我们那时是。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'hotabba etc. see bhavati. (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hu + a), 是，有，存在。【过】 ahosi。【现分】 honta。【潜】 hotabba。【不】 hotuŋ。(p359)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hotta: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic hotra] (function of) offering; aggi° the sacrificial fire SnA 436 (v. l. BB °hutta). (Page 733)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic hotra),【中】供奉((function of) offering)。aggihotta, 火供(物) (the sacrificial fire SnA 436 (v. l. BB aggihutta))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Huhuṅka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. huṁ] saying “huṁ, huṁ,” i. e. grumbly, rough; °jātika one who has a grumbly nature, said of the brahmins Vin.I,2; Ud.3 (“proud of his caste” Seidenstūcker). nihuhuṅka (=nis+h.) not grumbly (or proud), gentle Vin.I,3; Ud.3. Thus also Kern, Toev. I.137; differently Hardy in J.P.T.S. 1901, 42 (“uttering & putting confidence into the word huṁ”) Bdhgh (Vin.I,362) says: “diṭṭha-maṅgaliko mānavasena kodhavasena ca huhun ti karonto vicarati.” (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hukku: {'def': 'the sound uttered by a jackal J.III,113. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hunitabba: {'def': 'is grd. of juhati “to be sacrificed,” or “venerable” Vism.219 (=āhuneyya). (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hupeyya: {'def': '“it may be” Vin.I,8;=huveyya M.I,171. See bhavati. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Huraŋ: {'def': '【形】在另一个世界中，在另外的生存。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Huraṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [of uncertain origin] there, in the other world, in another existence. As prep. with Acc. “on the other side of,” i. e. before Sn.1084; Nd¹ 109; usually in connection idha vā huraṁ vā in this world or the other S.I,12; Dh.20; Sn.224=J.I,96; hurāhuraṁ from existence to existence Dh.334; Th.1, 399; Vism.107; DhA.IV,43. -- The explⁿ by Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 105 may be discarded as improbable. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】在另一个世界中，在另外的生存。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Huta: {'def': '[pp. of juhati] sacrificed, worshipped, offered Vin.I,36=J.I,83; D.I,55; J.I,83 (nt. “oblation”); Vv 34²⁶ (su°, +sudinna, suyiṭṭha); Pug.21; Dhs.1215; DA.I,165; DhA.II,234.

--āsana [cp. Sk. hutāśana] the fire, lit. “oblationeater” Dāvs II.43; Vism.171 (=aggi). (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】祭品，供奉。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】祭品，供奉。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hutta: {'def': '【中】赠礼。DhA(v.108；CS:p.1.422)：Hutanti abhisaṅkharitvā kataṁ pāhunadānañceva, kammañca phalañca saddahitvā katadānañca.(已周全安排好赠与款待宾客的食物后，并且相信业及果，作布施。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】牺牲。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic hotra] sacrifice: see aggi°. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hutvā: {'def': '(hoti 的【独】), 有了，是了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(hoti 的【独】), 有了，是了。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hutāsna: {'def': '【中】火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】火。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Huṁ: {'def': '(indecl.) the sound “huṁ” an utterance of discontent or refusal DhA.III,108=VvA.77; Vism.96. Cp. haṁ. huṅkāra growling, grumbling Vism.105. huṅkaroti to grumble DhA.I,173. huṅkaraṇa=°kāra DhA.I,173 sq. See also huhuṅka. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Huṁhuṁ: {'def': '哼哼。Huṁhuṅkajātiko, 哼哼作声者(以‘哼哼’表示傲慢)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Huṅkāra: {'def': '【阳】“哼”的声音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 “哼”的声音。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hā: {'def': '(indecl.) an exclamation of grief, alas! ThA.154 (Ap.V,154); VvA.323, 324. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】唉！', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】唉！(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hāhasi: {'def': 'is 2^nd sg. fut. of jahati (e. g. J.III,172); in cpd. also °hāhisi: see vijahati. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāhiti: {'def': 'is fut. of harati. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hālidda: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. haliddā] dyed with turmeric; a° undyed, i. e. not changing colour J.III,88; cp. III,148. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāna: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. hā, cp. Sk. hāna] relinquishing, giving up, falling off; decrease, diminution, degradation A.II,167; III,349 sq. (opp. visesa), 427; Vism.11.

--gāmin going into disgrace or insignificance A.III,349 sq. --bhāgiya conducive to relinquishing (of perversity and ignorance) D.III,272 sq.; A.II,167; Nett 77; Vism.85. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hānabhāgiya: {'def': '【形】有益於作罢的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有益于作罢的。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hāni: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. hāni] 1. decrease, loss A.II,434; V,123 sq.; S.I,111; II,206, 242; J.I,338, 346. -- 2. falling off, waste Mhvs 33, 103. Cp. saṁ°, pari°. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】减少，损失，下降。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】减少，损失，下降。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hāpaka: {'def': '【形】使减少的，使损失的，减少。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】使减少的，使损失的，减少。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hāpana: {'def': '【中】减少，缩小。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】减少，缩小。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'at J.V,433 is with Kern. Toev. I.132 (giving the passage without ref.) to be read as hāpaka “neglectful” [i. e. fr. hāpeti¹]. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāpeti: {'def': '(hā + āpe), 省略，疏忽，减少，延迟。【过】 hāpesi。【过分】 hāpita。【现分】 hāpenta。【独】 hāpetvā。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Caus. of hā to leave: see jahati; to which add fut. 2^nd sg. hāhasi J.III,172; and aor. jahi J.IV,314; V,469] 1. to neglect, omit A.III,44 (ahāpayaṁ); IV,25; Dh.166; J.II,437; IV,182; ahāpetvā without omitting anything, i. e. fully A.II,77; J.IV,132; DA.I,99. atthaṁ hāpeti to lose one’s advantage, to fail Sn.37; J.I,251. ‹-› 2. to postpone, delay (the performance of . . .) J.III,448; Vism.129. -- 3. to cause to reduce, to beat down J.I,124; II,31. -- 4. to be lost Sn.90 (? read hāyati). (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hā+āpe), 省略，疏忽，减少，延迟。【过】hāpesi。【过分】hāpita。【现分】hāpenta。【独】hāpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [in form=Sk. (Sūtras) hāvayati, Caus. of juhoti (see juhati), but in meaning=juhoti] to sacrifice to, worship, keep up, cultivate J.V,195 (aggiṁ;=juhati C.). See Kern, Toev. I.133. -- pp. hāpita. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāpita: {'def': '[pp. of hāpeti²] cultivated, attended, worshipped J.IV,221; V,158 (aggihuttaṁ ahāpitaṁ; C. wrongly= hāpita); V,201=VI,565. On all passages & their relation to Com. & BSk. see Kern, Toev. I.132, 133. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāra: {'def': '【阳】（一）串（珍珠等），项链。 hāraka, 【形】运送的，迁移的。hārikā, 【阴】。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】(一)串(珍珠等)，项链。hāraka,【形】运送的，迁移的。hārikā,【阴】。satthahārakaṁ(sattha n.+hāraka m.),携带武器。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. harati] 1. that which may be taken; grasping, taking; grasp, handful, booty. In cpd. °hārin taking all that can be taken, rapacious, ravaging J.VI,581 (of an army; Kern, Toev. I.133 wrong in trslⁿ “magnificent, or something like it”). Of a river: tearing, rapid A.III,64; IV,137; Vism.231. -- 2. category; name of the first sections of the Netti Pakaraṇa Nett 1 sq., 195. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāraka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hāra] carrying, taking, getting; removing (f. hārikā) M.I,385; J.I,134, 479; Pv.II,9¹ (dhana°); SnA 259 (maṁsa°). -- mala° an instrument for removing ear-wax Ap 303; cp. haraṇī. sattha° a dagger carrier, assassin Vin.III,73; S.IV,62. See also vallī. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāri: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hṛ; cp. Sk. hāri] attractive, charming S.IV,316; J.I,204 (°sadda). (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hārika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hāra] carrying D.II,348. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hārin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hāra] 1. taking, carrying (f. hārinī) J.I,133; Pv.II,3¹⁰ (Nom. pl. f. hārī); PvA.113. -- 2. robbing J.I,204. -- Cp. hāra°. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāritā: {'def': 'Hārīti: f. 鬼子母 [夜叉女の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Hāriya: {'def': '【形】轻便的，便于携带的。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hāra] carrying Vv 50⁹; ThA.200; VvA.212. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】轻便的，便於携带的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hārīti: {'def': 'Hāritā: f. 鬼子母 [夜叉女の名]', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Hāsa: {'def': '【阳】笑，欢笑。 ~kara, 【形】令人快乐的。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】笑，欢笑。hāsakara,【形】令人快乐的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. has, cp. Sk. hāsa & harṣa] laughter; mirth, joy Dh.146; DA.I,228=SnA 155 (“āmeṇḍita”); J.I,33; II,82; V,112; Miln.390. See also ahāsa.

--kara giving pleasure, causing joy Miln.252. --kkhaya ceasing of laughter Dhtp 439 (in defⁿ of gilāna, illness). --dhamma merriment, sporting Vin.IV,112. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāsaniya: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. has or hṛṣ; cp. Sk. harṣanīya] giving joy or pleasure Miln.149. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāseti: {'def': 'see hasati. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(has + e), 使发笑，使喜悦。【过】 hāsesi。【过分】hāsita。【现分】 hāsenta, hāsayamāna。【独】 hāsetvā。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(has笑+e), 搞笑，使发笑。【过】hāsesi。【过分】hāsita。【现分】hāsenta, hāsayamāna。【独】hāsetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hāsu°: {'def': '(of uncertain origin) occurs with hāsa° in combⁿ with °pañña and is customarily taken in meaning “of bright knowledge” (i. e. hāsa+paññā), wise, clever. The syn. javana-pañña points to a meaning like “quickwitted,” thus implying “quick” also in hāsu. Kern, Toev. I.134 puts forth the ingenious explⁿ that hāsu is a “cockneyism” for āsu=Sk. āśu “quick,” which does not otherwise occur in Pāli. Thus his explⁿ remains problematic. -- See e. g. M.III,25; S.I,63; V,376; J.IV,136; VI,255, 329. -- Abstr. °tā wisdom S.V,412; A.I,45. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hātabba: {'def': '(hāyati 的【义】), 可以避免，可以放弃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(hāyati 的【潜】), 可以避免，可以放弃。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'at Nett 7, 32 may be interpreted as grd. of hā to go (pres. jihīte). The C. expl^s it as “gametabba, netabba” (i. e. to be understood). Doubtful. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hātave: {'def': 'hātuṁ﹐[携带harati] 的【不】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hātuŋ: {'def': '(hāyati 的【不】), 要除去，要放弃。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hātuṁ: {'def': '(hāyati 的【不】), 要除去，要放弃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hātūna: {'def': 'see harati. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāyana: {'def': '【中】减少，衰退，变少，年。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】减少，衰退，变少，年。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (nt.) [Vedic hāyana] year; in saṭṭhi° 60 years old (of an elephant) M.I,229; J.II,343; VI,448, 581. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [fr. hā] diminution, decay, decrease D.I,54; DA.I,165. Opposed to vaḍḍhana (increase) at M.I,518. (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāyati: {'def': 'is Pass. of jahati [hā], in sense of “to be left behind,” as well as “to diminish, dwindle or waste away, disappear,” e. g. Nd¹ 147 (+pari°, antaradhāyati); Miln.297 (+khīyati); ppr. hāyamāna Nd² 543. Cp. hāyana. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hā+ya), 减少，缩小，变瘦，变得衰弱。【过】hāyi。【过分】hīna。【现分】hāyanta, hāyamāna。【独】hāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(hā + ya), 减少，缩小，变瘦，变得衰弱。【过】 hāyi。【过分】 hīna。【现分】 hāyanta, hāyamāna。【独】 hāyitvā。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hāyin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. hā] abandoning, leaving behind Sn.755= It.62 (maccu°). (Page 731)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hāyī: {'def': '【形】放弃的人，遗留的人。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】放弃的人，遗留的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hāṭaka: {'def': '【中】黄金。(p357)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】黄金。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. hāṭaka, connected with hari; cp. Goth. gulp=E. gold] gold A.I,215; IV,255, 258, 262 (where T reads haṭaka, with sātaka as v. l. at all passages); Th.2, 382; J.V,90. (Page 730)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hīlana: {'def': '【中】 hīlanā, 【阴】轻蔑，轻视。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】hīlanā,【阴】轻蔑，轻视。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīna: {'def': '【形】低的，劣等的，低级的，可鄙的。 ~jacca, 【形】出生低贱的。~viriya, 【形】缺乏活力的。 ~adhimuttika, 【形】爱好劣等的。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of jahati] 1. inferior, low; poor, miserable; vile, base, abject, contemptible, despicable Vin.I,10; D.I,82, 98; S.II,154 (hīnaṁ dhātuṁ paṭicca uppajjati hīnā saññā); III,47; IV,88, 309 (citta h. duggata); D.III,106, 111 sq., 215 (dhātu); A.II,154; III,349 sq.; V,59 sq.; Sn.799, 903 sq.; Nd¹ 48, 103, 107, 146; J.II,6; Pv IV.1²⁷ (opp. paṇīta); Vv 24¹³ (=lāmaka VvA.116); Dhs.1025; DhsA.45; Miln.288; Vism.13; DhA.III,163. -- Often opposed to ukkaṭṭha (exalted, decent, noble), e. g. Vin.IV,6; J.I,20, 22; III,218; VbhA.410; or in graduated sequence hīna (›majjhima)›paṇīta (i. e. low, medium, excellent), e. g. Vism.11, 85 sq., 424, 473. See majjhima. -- 2. deprived of, wanting, lacking Sn.725= It.106 (ceto-vimutti°); Pug.35. -- hīnāya āvattati to turn to the lower, to give up orders, return to secular life Vin.I,17; S.II,231; IV,191; Ud.21; A.III,393 sq.; M.I,460; Sn.p. 92; Pug.66; hīnāya vattati id. J.I,276; hīnāy’āvatta one who returns to the world M.I,460, 462; S.II,50; IV,103; Nd¹ 147.

--âdhimutta having low inclinations J.III,87; Pug.26; °ika id. S.II,157; It.70. --kāya inferior assembly VvA.298 (here meaning Yamaloka); PvA.5. --jacca lowborn, low-caste J.II,5; III,452; V,19, 257. --vāda one whose doctrine is defective Sn.827; Nd¹ 167. --viriya lacking in energy It.116; DhA.I,75; II,260. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】1.低的，劣等的，低级的，可鄙的。2.jahati舍断的【过分】。hīnajacca,【形】出生低贱的。hīnaviriya,【形】缺乏活力的。hīnadhimuttika,【形】爱好劣等的。Vbh.2.︰6.Tattha katamaṁ rūpaṁ hīnaṁ? Yaṁ rūpaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ 1uññātaṁ 2avaññātaṁ 3hīḷitaṁ 4paribhūtaṁ 5acittīkataṁ 6hīnaṁ 7hīnamataṁ 8hīnasammataṁ 9aniṭṭhaṁ 10akantaṁ 11amanāpaṁ, rūpā saddā gandhā rasā phoṭṭhabbā--idaṁ vuccati rūpaṁ hīnaṁ.(在此，什么是劣色？凡是色法，那个这个其他诸有情1鄙视(uññātaṁ；contemptible)、2轻视(avaññātaṁ；despised)、3无价值(hīḷitaṁ；worthless)、4可笑的(paribhūtaṁ；derisible)、5不敬重的(acitīkataṁ；disrespected)、6劣(hīnaṁ；inferior)、7认为劣(hīnamatāṁ；thought to be inferior)、8思为劣(hīnasammataṁ；considered to be inferior)、9不可爱(aniṭṭhaṁ; undesirable)、10不可乐(akantaṁ；unattractive)、11不可意色(amanāpaṁ;unpleasant)的色、声、香、味、触，这称为劣色。) Tattha katamaṁ rūpaṁ paṇītaṁ? Yaṁ rūpaṁ tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ 1anuññātaṁ 2anavaññātaṁ 3ahīḷitaṁ 4aparibhūtaṁ 5cittīkataṁ 6paṇītaṁ 7paṇītamataṁ 8paṇītasammataṁ 9iṭṭhaṁ 10kantaṁ 11manāpaṁ, rūpā saddā gandhā rasā phoṭṭhabbā--idaṁ vuccati rūpaṁ paṇītaṁ. Taṁ taṁ vā pana rūpaṁ upādāyupādāya rūpaṁ hīnaṁ paṇītaṁ daṭṭhabbaṁ.(在此，什么是胜色？凡是色法，那个这个其他诸有情1不鄙视(auññātaṁ；auññātaṁ；not contemptible)、2不轻视(anavaññātaṁ；not despised)、3非无价值(ahīḷitaṁ；not worthless)、4不可笑的(aparibhūtaṁ；not derisible)、5敬重(citīkataṁ；respected)、6胜(paṇīnaṁ; superior)、7认为胜(paṇītamataṁ；thought to be superior)、8思为胜(paṇītasammataṁ；considered to be superior)、9可爱(iṭṭhaṁ; desirable)、10可乐(kantaṁ；attractive)、11可意的(manāpaṁ；pleasant)色、声、香、味、触，这称为胜色。取这个色、取那个色，当见到劣色、胜色。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīnavīriya: {'def': '【形】勇悍(精进)已被舍断。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīnayāna: {'def': '【中】小乘(带有偏见的称呼上座部佛教的用词)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīnāyāvattati: {'def': '﹐转为卑劣(还俗)。S.20.10./II,271.︰ariyassa vinaye yo sikkhaṁ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati.(於圣律，现前之学因而还俗(转为卑劣))。AA.3.39./II,242.：Hīnāyāvattatīti hīnāya lāmakāya gihibhāvāya āvattati.(还俗︰成为卑下的、低劣的、俗人的。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīra: {'def': 'hīraka, 【中】碎片，斑纹。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. late Sk. hīra] 1. a necklace (?) VvA.176. -- 2. a small piece, splinter J.IV,30 (sakalika°); hīrahīraṁ karoti to cut to pieces, to chop up J.I,9; DhA.I,224 (+khaṇḍâkhaṇḍaṁ). (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'hīraka,【中】碎片，斑纹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīraka: {'def': '[hīra+ka, cp. lexic. Sk. hīraka “diamond”] a splinter; tāla° “palm-splinter,” a name for a class of worms Vism.258. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hīrati: {'def': 'is Pass. of harati. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hīyati: {'def': 'is Pass. of jahati. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hāyati 的【被】), 被减少，被缩小，衰退，被留下，被放弃。【过】hīyi。【现分】hīyamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(hāyati 的【被】), 被减少，被缩小，衰退，被留下，被放弃。【过】hīyi。【现分】 hīyamāna。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hīyo: {'def': '【副】昨天。参考 hiyyo。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '参考 hīyyo。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Hīḷana: {'def': '(nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. hīḍ] scorn(ing), disdain, contempt Miln.357; DA.I,276 (of part. “re”: hīlana-vasena āmantanaṁ); as °ā at Vbh.353 (+ohīḷanā); VbhA.486. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hīḷetabba: {'def': '【义】应轻视。hīḷetabbataṁ, 应轻视性。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīḷeti: {'def': '(hīḷ + e), 轻蔑，蔑视，轻视。【过】 hīḷesi。【过分】 hīḷita。【独】 hīḷetvā。【现分】 hīḷayamāna。(p358)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic hīḍ or hel to be hostile; cp. Av. ƶēaša awful; Goth. us-geisnan to be terrified. Connected also with hiṁsati. -- The Dhtp (637) defines by “nindā”] 1. to be vexed, to grieve S.I,308; to vex, grieve Vv 84⁴⁶. ‹-› 2. to scorn, disdain, to feel contempt for, despise D.II,275; Sn.713 (appaṁ dānaṁ na hīḷeyya); J.II,258; DA.I,256 (=vambheti); DhA.IV,97; Miln.169 (+garahati). -- pp. hīḷita. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(hīḷ轻视+e), 轻蔑，蔑视，轻视。【过】hīḷesi。【过分】hīḷita。【独】hīḷetvā。【现分】hīḷayamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Hīḷita: {'def': '[pp. of hīḷeti] despised, looked down upon, scorned Vin.IV,6; Miln.227, 251; Vism.424 (+ohīḷita oññāta etc.); DA.I,256. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Hūti: {'def': '(f.) [fr. hū, hvā “to call,” cp. avhayati] calling, challenging S.I,208. (Page 732)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

I: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第三个元音字母。发音好像汉语中去声的 i。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第三个母音字母。发音好像汉语中去声的 i。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'in i-kāra the letter or sound i SnA 12 (°lopa), 508 (id.). (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ibbha: {'def': '(adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇḍakā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādâpaccā D.I,90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; M.I,334 (kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā). Also at J.VI,214. Expl^d. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA.I,254, (also at J.VI,215). (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants),【形】仆人的(menial; a retainer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ibha: {'def': '【阳】象。 ~pipphalī, 【阴】大型的长胡椒。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】象。ibhapipphalī,【阴】大型的长胡椒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Iccha: {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 愿，渴望，想。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [the adj. form of icchā] wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp° having evil desires S.I,50; II,156; an° without desires S.I,61, 204; Sn.707; app° id. Sn.628, 707. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】【阳】(在【合】中) 愿，渴望，欲望(wishing, longing, having desires)。pāpiccha﹐恶欲(having evil desires)。AA.6.36./III,364.：Pāpicchoti asantasambhāvanicchako dussīlo.(恶欲：产生不安份之欲者是无戒者。)。aniccha﹐无欲(without desires)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Icchaka: {'def': '(-°) (adj.) [fr. iccha] wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad-icchikaṁ (and yen°) after one’s wish or liking M.III,97; A.III,28. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】想要的人。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. iccha),【形】想要的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Icchana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. iṣ², cp. Sk. īpsana] desiring, wish J.IV, 5; VI,244. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. is2, cp. Sk. īpsana),【中】icchā,【阴】欲望，希望，渴望。icchāvacara,【形】为所欲为。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 icchā, 【阴】欲望，希望，渴望。 ~āvacara, 【形】为所欲为。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Icchantika: {'def': '(梵)，一阐提、一阐提迦、一顚迦、阿阐底迦，断善根者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Icchati: {'def': '(is +a；Sk. icchati‹is), 愿，想要，渴望。icchi,【过】。icchanta,【现分】。Pot. icche & iccheyya; ppr. icchaṁ, aor. icchi. -- grd. icchitabba. -- pp. iṭṭha & icchita. In prep.-cpds. the root is2 (icchati) is confused with root is1 (isati, esati) with pp. both °iṭṭha and °isita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti] see aticchati & cp. icchatā. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(is + a), 愿，想要，渴望。 icchi, 【过】。 icchanta, 【现分】。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning “seek, wish”] to wish, desire, ask for (c. Acc.), expect S.I,210 (dhammaṁ sotuṁ i.); Sn.127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh.162, 291; Nd¹ 3, 138, 164; Nd² s. v.; Pv.II,6³; Pug.19; Miln.269, 327; SnA 16, 23, 321; KhA 17; PvA.20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh.84; Sn.835 Pv.II,6⁶ & iccheyya D.II,2, 10; Sn.35; Dh.73, 88; ppr. icchaṁ Sn.826, 831, 937; Dh.334 (phalaṁ) aor. icchi PvA.31. -- grd. icchitabba PvA.8. -- pp. iṭṭha & icchita (q. v.). ‹-› Note. In prep.-cpds. the root iṣ² (icchati) is confused with root iṣ¹ (iṣati, eṣati) with pp. both °iṭṭha and °iṣita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Icchatā: {'def': '(-°) (f.) [abstr. fr. icchā] wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vbh.350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah° & pāp° Vbh.351, 370. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Icchita: {'def': '(icchati 的【过分】)。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(icchati 的【过分】) 愿，想要，渴望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of icchati] wished, desired, longed for J.I,208; DhsA.364; PvA.3, 53, 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha, which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113, 127 (twice). (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Icchitālābha: {'def': '【阳】求不得。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Icchā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. icchati, iṣ²] wish, longing, desire D.II,243; III,75; S.I,40 (°dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraṁ parikassati); A.II,143; IV,293 sq.; 325 sq.; V,40, 42 sq.; Sn.773, 872; Dh.74, 264 (°lobha-samāpanna); Nd¹ 29, 30; Pug.19; Dhs.1059, 1136; Vbh.101, 357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA.250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs.trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA.65, 155; Sdhp.242, 320.

--âvacara moving in desires M.I,27 (pāpaka); Nett 27. --âvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn.306. --pakata same Vin.I,97; A.III,119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug.69; Miln.357; Vism.24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as “icchāya apakata” and puts apakata = upadduta). --vinaya discipline of one’s wishes D.III,252, A.IV,15; V,165 sq. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iccāhu: {'def': '(‹ iti āhu; iti为「引号」，-ti + 母音› -cc +母音(连音规则))﹐如说：。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ida: {'def': '& Idaṁ (ima 的【中.主.宾.单】), 这个(事物)。【阳】：单.主.ayaṁ；复.主ime；单.宾.imaṁ；复.宾.ime；单.具.imenā(﹑aminā﹑anena)；复.具.imehi﹑imebhi；单.离.imasmā﹑imamhā(﹑asmā)；复.离.imehi﹑imebhi；单.与.﹑属.Imassa(﹑assa)；复.与.﹑属.imesaṁ﹑imesānaṁ(﹑esaṁ﹑esānaṁ)；单.处.imasmiṁ﹑imamhi(﹑asmiṁ)；复.处.imesu(﹑esu)。【阴】：单.主ayaṁ；复.主.imā﹑imāyo；单.宾.imaṁ；复.宾.imā﹑imāyo；单.具.imāya；复.具.imāhi﹑imābhi；单.离imāya；复.离.imāhi﹑imābhi；单.与.﹑属.imāya(﹑assā﹑assāya﹑imissā﹑imissāya；复.与.﹑属.imāsaṁ﹑imāsānaṁ；单.处.imāya﹑assā﹑assāya﹑imissā﹑imassāyaṁ﹑imissaṁ﹑assaṁ；复.处.imāsu。【中】：单.主.imaṁ﹑idaṁ；复.主.imāni；单.宾.imaṁ﹑idaṁ；复.宾.imāni。idampi(ima这+pi强调词), 【中.主.单】这，(也)…。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '& Idaṁ (indecl.) [nt. of ayaṁ (idaṁ) in function of a deictic part.] emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here: idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i. e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin.I,5 = S.I,136; D.I,185; Dhs.1004, 1061; Vbh.340, 362, 365; Vism.518; etc. -- (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) D.II,267, 270, almost syn. (for with kira. -- (3) just (this), even so, only: idam-atthika just sufficient, proper, right Th.1, 984 (cīvara); Pug.69 (read so for °maṭṭhika, see Pug.A 250); as idam-atthitā “being satisfied with what is sufficient” at Vism.81: expl^d. as atthika-bhāva at Pug.A 250. idaṁsaccâbhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i. e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya-ganthā, viz. abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata-parāmāsa, idaṁ° (see Dhs.1135 & Dhs.trsl. 304); D.III,230; S.V,59; Nd¹ 98; Nett 115 sq. (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Idappaccayatā: {'def': '(ida此+paccaya缘+tā性),【阴】此缘性，基础在此(缘起的道理)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】此缘性，基础在此即：有原因地连接。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '此缘性;缘起的道理(PS:ida 此; paccaya 缘; -tā 性)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Idaŋ: {'def': '(ima 的【中，主，宾，单】), 这个事物。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iddha: {'def': '(ijjhati 的【过分】), 已繁荣，已丰裕，已成功。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ijjhati 的【过分】), 已繁荣，已丰裕，已成功。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha] (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy D.I,211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana, of a prosperous town); A.III,215 (id.); J.VI,227, 361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs.I,11. -- (b) successful, satisfactory, sufficient Vin.I,212 (bhattaṁ); IV,313 (ovādo). (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma] in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear J.VI,223 (°khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi-khagga°); Dpvs VI,42. (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iddhi: {'def': '(Vedic rddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pāḷi ijjhati),【阴】繁荣，效力，神通。iddhapāda,【阳】(四)神足，神通力的根基。iddhabala,【中】神通力。iddhamantu,【形】有神通的。iddhavisaya,【阳】神通的范围。iddhānubhāva, 神通，魔术(power or majesty of thaumaturgy)。iddhābhisaṅkhāra, 现神通(exercise of any of the psychic powers)。tathārūpaṁiddhānubhāvaṁ(abhisaṅkharoti),(现行)如其像神通威力。又作：如其像定(好像雕像不动而入定)。mahiddhiko,大神通者(S.21.5./II,279.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】繁荣，效力，神通。 ~pāda, 【阳】（四）神足，神通力的根基。 ~bala, 【中】神通力。 ~mantu, 【形】有神通的。 ~visaya, 【阳】神通的范围。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati]. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown in Europe. The main sense seems to be “potency” . -- 1. Pre-Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman. The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life, good health, and popularity (D.II,177; M.III,176, cp. J.III,454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons, 4. of good food, A.I,145. At M.I,152 the Iddhi of a hunter, is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at D.II,72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175). -- 2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind-made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (D.I,77, 212; II,87, 213; III,112, 281; S.II,121; V,264, 303; A.I,170, 255; III,17, 28, 82, 425; V,199; Ps.I,111; II,207; Vism.378 sq., 384; DA.I,122). For other such powers see S.I,144; IV,290; V,263; A.III,340. -- 3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At D.I,213 the Buddha is represented as saying: “It is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereof” . The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from M.I,34; A.III,425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on investigation (D.II,213; M.I,103; A.I,39, 297; II,256; III, 82; Ps.I,111; II 154, 164, 205; Vbh.216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Saṅgha for a Bhikkhu to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin.II,112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin.III,91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D.III,112; A.I,93; Vin.II,183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances. Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. I.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps.II,150; Vism.XII; DhA.I,91; J.I,47, 360.

--ânubhāva (iddhånu°) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; III,67; S I 147; IV,290; PvA.53. --âbhisaṅkhāra (iddhåbhi°) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin.I,16, 17, 25; D.I,106; S.III,92; IV,289; V,270; Sn.p. 107; PvA.57, 172 212. --pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin.I,25, 28, 180, 209; II,76, 112, 200; D.I,211, 212; III,3, 4, 9, 12 sq., 27; S.IV,290; A.I,170, 292; Ps.II,227. --pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin.II,240; D.II,103, 115 sq., 120; III,77, 102, 127, 221; M.II,11; III,296; S.I,116, 132; III,96, 153; IV,360; V,254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; A.IV,128 sq., 203, 463; V,175; Nd¹ 14, 45 (°dhīra), 340 (°pucchā); Nd¹ s. v.; Ps.I,17, 21, 84; II,56, 85 sq., 120, 166, 174; Ud.62; Dhs.358, 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83; DhsA.237; DhA.III,177; IV,32. --bala the power of working wonders VvA.4; PvA.171. --yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Miln.276. --vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism.373 sq. --vidhā kinds of iddhi D.I,77, 212; II,213; III,112, 281; S.II,121; v.264 sq., 303; A.I,170 sq., 255; III,17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; V,199; Ps.I,111; II,207; Vism.384; DA.I,222. --visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin.III,67; Nett 23. (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iddhika: {'def': '² (-°) (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in cpd. mah-iddhika of great power, always comb^d. with mah-ânubhāva, e. g. at Vin.I,31; II,193; III,101; S.II, 155; M.I,34; Th.1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J.V,149. See mahiddhika. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (-°) (adj.) the comp^n. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ-iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e. g. at J.I,6; IV,15; PvA.78. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iddhimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. iddhi] -- 1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an° unfortunate, miserable, poor J.VI,361. ‹-› 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin.III,67; IV,108; A.I,23, 25; II,185; III,340; IV,312; Sn.179; Nett 23; Sdhp.32, 472. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iddhipadesa: {'def': '神足的区域。SA.51.5./III,251.：iddhipadesanti tayo ca magge tīṇi ca phalāni.(神足的区域：三道与三果。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Idha: {'def': '(indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaṁ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. i]qa-genήs, Av. ida] here, in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Sn.1038, 1056, 1065; It.99 (idh’ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dh.5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd¹ 40, 109, 156; Nd² 145, 146; SnA 147; PvA.45, 60, 71. --idhaloka this world, the world of men Sn.1043 (= manussaloka Nd² 552^c); PvA.64; in this religion, Vbh.245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA.348. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】这里，此世，这个世界。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【副】这里，此世，这个世界。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Idhuma: {'def': '[Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā] fire-wood ‹-› Tela-kaṭāha-gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】木柴。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】木柴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Idāni: {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic idānīṁ] now Dh.235, 237; KhA 247. (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic idānīṁ),【副】现在(now)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【副】现在。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iha: {'def': '【无】这里。 ~loka, 【中】这个世界，此生。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q. v.)] adv. of place “here” Sn.460. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha),【无】这里(of place “here”)。ihaloka,【中】这个世界，此生。iha, 【梵】下，下地，世，世间，今，复次，此世，此间，现，现世。ihā, 【梵】今。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ijjhana: {'def': '(nt.) & Ijjhanā (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out successfully Ps.I,17 sq., 74, 181; II,125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh.217 sq.; Vism.266, 383 (°aṭṭhena iddhi); DhsA.91, 118, 237. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 ijjhanā, 【阴】成功，繁荣。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(fr. ijjhati),【中】ijjhanā,【阴】成功，繁荣(success, carrying out successfully)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ijjhati: {'def': '(idh +ya), 繁荣，成功，兴隆。ijjhi,【过】。ijjhamāna,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. a)λqomai to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic iḍā refreshment & P. iddhi power] to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed, prosper, be successful S.I,175 (“work effectively” trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaṁ hoti C.); IV,303; Sn.461, 485; J.V,393; Pv.II,1¹¹; II,9¹³ (= samijjhati PvA.120); Pot. ijjhe Sn.458, 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha) Vv 20⁶ (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha VvA.103). ‹-› pp. iddha. See also aḍḍha² & aḍḍhaka. Cp. sam°. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(idh + ya), 繁荣，成功，兴隆。 ijjhi, 【过】。 ijjhamāna, 【现分】。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ijjhita: {'def': '(ijjhati 的【过分】), 已成功，已兴隆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ijjhati 的【过分】), 已成功，已兴隆。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ikka: {'def': '[Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha²] a bear J.VI,538 [= accha C.]. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ikkhana: {'def': '【中】看见，注视着。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ikkhati: {'def': '[fr. īkṣ] to look J.V,153; ThA.147; DhsA.172. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ikkh+a), 看著。ikkhi,【过】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ikkh + a), 看着。 ikkhi, 【过】。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ikkhaṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. īkṣ] seeing Vism.16. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. īks),【中】看见，注视著，睿智。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ikkhaṇika: {'def': '(fr. īks, cp. akkhi),【阳】算命仙(a fortuneteller)。ikkhaṇikā,【阴】算命婆。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi] a fortuneteller Vin.III,107; S.II,260; J.I,456, 457; VI,504. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】算命佬。 ikkhaṇikā, 【阴】算命婆。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ikkāsa: {'def': '(?) [uncertain as regard meaning & etym.] at Vin.II,151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by “slime of trees”, according to Bdhgh’s expl^n. on p. 321 (to C. V. VI,3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Illiyā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā] = illī J.V,259; VI,50. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Illī: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon] a sort of weapon, a short one-edged sword J.V,259. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】短剑。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】短剑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Illīyituṁ: {'def': 'v. l. for allīyituṁ at J.V,154. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Imesaṁ: {'def': '﹐ima(此、这)的【与】【属】【复】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Inda: {'def': '【阳】统治者，国王，吠陀的神‘因陀’，天王。indagajjita,【中】雷电。indagopaka,【阳】一种在下雨之后从地下爬出来的红昆虫(胭脂虫)。indaggi,【阳】闪电。indajāla,【中】魔术。indajālika,【阳】魔术家，变戏法者。indadhanu(梵indradhanus),【中】彩虹(古译：帝弓、天弓、虹蜺)。indasālaguha,【阴】因陀罗石室、帝释岩、石室精舍。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. XXXI.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero]. -- 1. The Vedic god Indra D.I,244; II,261, 274; Sn.310, 316, 679, 1024; Nd¹ 177. -- 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devānaṁ indo D.I,216, 217; II,221, 275; S.I,219. Vep’citti asurindo S.I,221 ff. manussinda, S.I,69, manujinda, Sn.553, narinda, Sn.863, all of the Buddha, “chief of men” ; cp. Vism.491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. II.294‹-› 298. The idiom sa-Indā devā, D.II,261, 274; A.V,325, means “the gods about Indra, Indra’s retinue” , this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiṁsā sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D.II,208--212; S.III,90; cp. Vv 30¹) this being a Buddhist story].

--aggi (ind’aggi) Indra’s fire, i. e. lightning PvA.56. --gajjita (nt.) Indra’s thunder Miln.22. --jāla deception DA.I,85. --jālika a juggler, conjurer Miln.331. --dhanu the rainbow DA.I,40. --bhavana the realm of Indra Nd¹ 448 (cp. Tāvatiṁsa-bhavana). --liṅga the characteristic of Indra Vism.491. --sāla N. of tree J.IV,92. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】统治者，国王，吠陀的神‘因陀’，天王。 ~gajjita, 【中】雷电。 ~gopaka, 【阳】一种在下雨之后从地下爬出来的红昆虫（胭脂虫小鲜红昆虫）。 ~ggi, 【阳】闪电。 ~jāla, 【中】魔术。 ~jālika, 【阳】魔术家，变戏法者。 ~dhanu, 【中】彩虹。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Indagopaka: {'def': '[inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector] a sort of insect (“cochineal, a red beetle”, Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th.1, 13; Vin.III,42; J.IV,258; V,168; DhA.I,20; Brethren p. 18, n. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector), 一种红色的昆虫(a sort of insect (“cochineal, a red beetle”, Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indagū: {'def': 'see hindagū. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Indaka: {'def': '[dimin. fr. inda] -- 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at Pv.II,9⁵⁷; PvA.136 sq. -- 2. (-°) see inda². (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Indakhīla: {'def': '[inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, 365, 544; Av. Ś I.109, 223]. “Indra’s post”; the post, stake or column of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house D.II,254 (°ṁ ūhacca, cp. DhA.II,181); Vin.IV,160 (expl^d. ibid. as sayani-gharassa ummāro, i. e. threshold); S.V,444 (ayokhīlo +); Dh.95 (°ûpama, cp. DhA.II,181); Th.1, 663; J.I,89; Miln.364; Vism.72, 466; SnA 201; DA.I,209 (nikkhamitvā bahi °ā); DhA.II,180 (°sadisaṁ Sāriputtassa cittaṁ), 181 (nagara-dvāre nikhataṁ °ṁ). (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】门前梯级，门槛，在城门前的壮柱。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】因陀罗柱(indra’s pillar)，在城门前的壮柱。S.56.39./V,443.︰“Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ayokhīlo vā indakhīlo vā gambhīranemo sunikhāto acalo asampakampī. (诸比丘！譬如铁柱或因陀罗柱之根，深埋而不动不摇。)《杂阿含398经》︰「譬如因陀罗柱，铜铁作之，於深入地中，四方猛风不能令动。」', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indanīla: {'def': '[inda + nīla “Indra’s blue”] a sapphire J.I,80; Miln.118; VvA.111 (+ mahānīla). (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】蓝宝石。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】蓝宝石(sapphire)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indapatta: {'def': '(梵Indraprastha)，因得巴答(因陀罗普拉沙)，在Yamuna河边。据考古发现，德里及其邻近地区在约200万年以前有人类出现。靠近现今印度首都「德里」(Delhi, 印度第二大城市)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indasāla: {'def': '【阳】因陀沙罗树，印度松漆木（产于印度的一种龙脑香科乔木 (Vetaria indica)，花美丽，白色，呈圆锥状花序，其木材、树脂和油有重要经济价值）。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】因陀沙罗树，印度松漆木(产於印度的一种龙脑香科乔木 (Vetaria indica)，花美丽，白色，呈圆锥状花序，其木材、树脂和油有重要经济价值)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indavāruṇi: {'def': '【阴】黄瓜。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】黄瓜(cucumber)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indavāruṇī: {'def': '(f.) [inda + vāruṇa] the Coloquintida plant J.IV,8 (°ka-rukkha). (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Indhana: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha¹] firewood, fuel J.IV,27 (adj. an° without fuel, aggi); V,447; ThA.256; VvA.335; Sdhp.608. Cp. idhuma. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1),【中】燃料，木柴(firewood, fuel)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】燃料，木柴。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Indriya: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning “belonging to Indra”; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli sense “belonging to the ruler”, i. e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle] A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics, meaning “controlling principle, directive force, élan, du/namis”, in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense-perceptibility “faculty, function”, often wrongly interpreted as “organ”; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter “kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign, mark” (cp. woman-hood, hood = Goth. haidus “kind, form”); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, “principle, controlling” force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight “category”. ‹-› Definitions of indriya among others at DhsA.119; cp. Expositor 157; Dhs.trsl. LVII; Cpd. 228, 229. B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enum^d under A a-e, thus establishing a canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vbh.122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism.491 sq. (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh-undriya (“the eye which is a power”, Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of) vision, (2) sot-indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān° nose or smell, (4) jivh° tongue or taste, (5) kāy° body-sensibility, (6) man°) mind; (b. material) (7) itth° female sex or femininity, (8) puris° male sex or masculinity, (9) jīvit° life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh° pleasure, (11) dukkh° pain, (12) somanasa° joy, (13) domanass° grief, (14) upekh° hedonic indifference (d. moral) (15) saddh° faith, (16) viriy° energy, (17) sat° mindfulness, (18) samādh° concentration, (19) paññ° reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta-ñassāmīt° the thought “I shall come to know the unknown”, (21) aññ° (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā-v° one who knows. -- Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth° (no. 7), e. g. at Ps.I,7, 137. -- From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections, no. 6 manas (mano, man-indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc’indriyāni, the 6^th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1--19) at Ps.I,137; 10 (pañca rūpīni & pañca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos. 1~5, 10~14, 15~19) at D.III,239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i. e. nos. 15~18) at A.II,141; three (saddh°, samādh°, paññ°, i. e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at A.I,118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaṁ indriya-rūpaṁ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaṁ as indriyaṁ “form which is faculty” Dhs.661 (cp. trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1~5), the 2 séx-states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9), i. e. groups a & b of enum^n.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs.709~717, 971~973. -- It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f. -- Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sāṅkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas.

C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a-e) (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1~5): M.I,295: S.III,46 (pañcannaṁ °ānaṁ avak kanti), 225; IV,168; A.II,151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos. 1--6): M.I,9; S.IV,176; V,74, 205, 230; A.I,113; II,16, 39, 152; III,99, 163, 387 sq.; V,348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saṁvutāni S.II,231, 271; IV,112; pañcasu °esu saṁvuto Sn.340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaṁ pi vuttaṁ yeva hoti, i. e. the 6^th as manas included, SnA 343); °esu susaṁvuta Th.2, 196 (= mana-chaṭṭhesu i° suṭṭhu saṁvutā ThA.168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā D.III,107; S.II,218; IV,103, 112, 175; A.I,25, 94, 113; II,39; III,70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; IV,25, 166; V,134; It.23, 24; Nd¹ 14; Vbh.248, 360; DA.I,182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita-dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni S.II, 275; III,2, 235; IV,294; V,301; A.I,181; III,380. °ānaṁ samatā (v. l. samatha) A.III,375 sq. (see also f. below) °āni bhāvitāni Sn.516 (= cakkh’ādīni cha i. SnA 426); Nd² 475 B⁸. -- Various: S.I,26 (rakkhati), 48 (°ûpasame rato); IV,40, 140 (°sampanna); V,216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. I.190 (man°); Vbh.13 (rūpa), 341 (mud° & tikkh°) 384 (ahīn°). -- (b) physical: (above B 7--9) all three: S.V,204; Vism.447; itthi° & purisa° A.IV,57; Vbh.122, 415 sq.; puris° A.III,404; jīvit° Vbh.123, 137; Vism.230 (°upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa. -- (c) sensational (above B 10--14): S.V,207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vbh.15, 71; Nett 88. -- (d) moral (above B 15‹-› 19): S.III,96, 153; IV,36, 365 sq.; V,193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq. (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), A.IV,125 sq., 203, 225; V,56, 175; Ps.II,49, 51 sq., 86; Nd¹ 14; Nd² 628 (sat° + satibala); Kvu 589; Vbh.341; Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard comb^n. with satipaṭṭhāna, sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhaṅga, magga (see Nd² s. v. p. 263) D.II,120; Vin.III,93, Ps.II,166 & passim. As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16‹-› 19) at Nett 83. -- (e) cognitional (above B 20--22) D.III,219 = S v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); It.53; Ps.I,115; II,30. -- (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a-e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp. physical faculties. S.I,61 (pākat°), 204 (id.); III,207 (ākāsaṁ °āni saṅkamanti); IV,294 (vipari-bhinnāni); A.III,441 (°ānaṁ avekallatā). magic power A.IV,264 sq. (okkhipati °āni). indriyānaṁ paripāko (moral or physical) over-ripeness of faculties S.II,2, 42; A.V,203; Nd² 252 (in def. of jarā); Vbh.137. moral forces Vin.I,183 (°ānaṁ samatā, + viriyānaṁ s. as sign of Arahant); II,240 (pañc°). principle of life ekindriyaṁ jīvaṁ Vin.III,156; Miln.259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase °āni paricāreti to satisfy one’s heart PvA.16, 58, 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase °āni bhinditvā breaking one’s vow J.II,274; IV,190.

D. Unclassified material D I 77 (ahīn°); III 239 (domanass° & somanass°) M.I,437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); II, 11, 106; III,296; S.III,225; V,209 (dukkh°, domanass°); A.I,39, 42 sq., 297; II,38 (sant°), 149 sq.; III,277, 282; Ps.I,16, 21, 88, 180; II,1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223; Nd¹ 45 (°dhīra), 171 (°kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs.58, 121, 528, 556 (dukkh°), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (°vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok’uttara); Vism.350 (°vekallatā); Sdhp.280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473.

E. As adj. (-°) having one’s senses, mind or heart as such & such S.I,138 (tikkh° & mud°); III,93 (pākat°); V,269 (id.); A.I,70 (id) & passim (id.); A.I,70 (saṁvut°) 266 (id.), 236 (gutt°); II,6 (samāhit°); 8n 214 (susamāhit° his senses well-composed); PvA.70 (pīṇit° joyful or gladdened of heart).

F. Some compounds: --gutta one who restrains & watches his senses S.I,154; Dh.375. --gutti keeping watch over the senses, self-restraint DhA.IV,111. ^a paropariya, ^b paropariyatta & ^c paropariyatti (°ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the senses and intentions of others ^a J.I,78; ^b A.V,34, 38; ^b Ps.I,121 sq., 133 sq.; II,158, 175; ^b Vbh.340, 342; ^c S.V,205; ^c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. --bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above C^d) moral qualities Vin.I,294 (+ balabhāvanā); M.III,298. --saṁvara restraint or subjugation of the senses D.II,281; M.I,269, 346; S.I,54; A.III,360; IV,99; V,113 sq., 136, 206; Nd¹ 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism.20 sq. (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】操纵主要的，根，官能。 ~gutti, 【阴】留心着官能。 ~damana,【中】 ~saŋvara, 【阳】抑制官能。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indra王﹑主神+iya),【中】操纵主要的，根，官能。indriyagutti,【阴】留心著官能。indriyadamana,【中】indriyasaṁvara,【阳】抑制官能(守护诸根)。Bāvīsatindriyāni(二十二根)：cakkhundriyaṁ眼根, sotindriyaṁ耳根, ghānindriyaṁ鼻根, jivhindriyaṁ舌根, kāyindriyaṁ身根, manindriyaṁ意根, itthindriyaṁ女根, purisindriyaṁ男根, jīvitindriyaṁ命根, sukhindriyaṁ乐根, dukkhindriyaṁ苦根, somanassindriyaṁ喜根, domanassindriyaṁ忧根, upekkhindriyaṁ舍根, saddhindriyaṁ信根, vīriyindriyaṁ精进根, satindriyaṁ念根, samādhindriyaṁ定根、paññindriyaṁ慧根﹐anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṁ未知当知根, aññindriyaṁ已知根, aññātāvindriyaṁ具知根。channaṁ indriyānaṁ﹐六根(眼(斫乞蒭)、耳(羯拏)、鼻(竭罗拏)、舌(加贺缚)、身(迦野)、意(么那)。indriyesu guttadvāratā(梵indriya-gupta-dvāratā)﹐护诸根门(於诸(六)根守门)。indriyesu aguttadvārā﹐不护诸根门。vatthu-purejātindriya(梵indriyādhisṭhāna根所依处)﹐依处前生根(指五净色)。Katamo ca puggalo indriyesu guttadvāro? Tattha katamā indriyesu guttadvāratā? Idhekacco puggalo cakkhunā rūpaṁ disvā na nimittaggāhī hoti nānubyañjanaggāhī; yatvādhikaraṇamenaṁ cakkhundriyaṁ asaṁvutaṁ viharantaṁ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṁ, tassa saṁvarāya paṭipajjati, rakkhati cakkhundriyaṁ cakkhundriye saṁvaraṁ āpajjati.…(什么人‘护诸根门’呢？在此什么是护诸根门呢？在这里有一种人以眼见色之后，不执取相、不执取微细相；若是不保护眼根而住的原因，诸贪忧、恶不善法则流入。那种防护上路，则守护眼根，在眼根上到达防护。…) SA.47.44./III,230. “indriyasaṁvaro nāma chadvārarakkhaṇamattameva”(护(诸)根︰护六根门的范围。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indīvara: {'def': '【中】青莲。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [etym.?] the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula J.V,92 (°ī-samā ratti); VI,536; Vv 45¹ (= uddālaka-puppha VvA.197). (Page 121)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】青莲(the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula；Vv 451 (= uddālaka-puppha VvA.197).)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Indū: {'def': '﹐印度(大唐西域记以后)。古音译：身毒(史记)、申毒、天竺(汉书)、天笃、身笃、乾笃、贤豆、身豆、天豆、印土、呬度等。印地与称其国名为「婆罗多」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Irina: {'def': '【中】大森林，沙漠，不毛之地，荒地。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iriyanā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs.19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iriyati: {'def': '(iriy (梵īr )+a), 移动，激起，举止，采集(to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment)。【过】iriyi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(iriy + a), 移动，激起，举止。【过】 iriyi。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of ṛ (see acchati & icchati²); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti), pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment M.I,74, 75; S.I,53 (dukkhaṁ aticca iriyati); IV,71; A.III,451; V,41; Sn.947, 1063, 1097; Th.1,276; J.III,498 (= viharati); Nd¹ 431; Nd² 147 (= carati etc.); Vism.16; DA.I,70. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iriyā: {'def': 'iriyanā, 【阴】身体的运动，姿势。 ~patha, 【阳】举止，四姿势。即：行、住、坐、卧。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M.I,81; Sn.1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd² 148); It.31; Vism.145 (+ vutti pālana yapana).

--patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps.II,225 & DA.I,183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37. -- Vin.I,39; II,146 (°sampanna); Vin.I,91 (chinn° a cripple); S.V,78 (cattāro i.); Sn.385; Nd¹ 225, 226; Nd² s. v.; J.I,22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln.17; Vism.104, 128, 290, 396; DhA.I,9; IV,17; VvA.6; PvA.141; Sdhp.604. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'iriyanā,【阴】身体的运动，姿势。iriyāpatha,【阳】举止，四姿势(carañ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaṁ nisinno udāhu sayaṁ It.117 (walking, standing, sitting, reclining; the four iriyāpathā。行、住、坐、卧，四威仪)。sthānaṃ nisadyā wayyā-abhikramah,【梵】行住坐卧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Iriṇa: {'def': '【中】不毛之地，荒地，沙漠(barren soil, desert)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus] barren soil, desert J.VI,560 (= niroja C.). Cp. īriṇa. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Irubbeda: {'def': 'the Rig-veda Dpvs.V,62 (iruveda); Miln.178; DA.I,247; SnA 447. (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'm. [Sk. Ṛg-veda] (Rig-Veda)吠陀經典之一部.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'm. [Sk. Ṛg-veda] リグ‧ヴェーダ.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Isi: {'def': '(Vedic rsi fr. rs. -- Voc. ise; pl. Nom. isayo, Gen. isinaṁ & isīnaṁ; inst. isibhi ),【阳】1.仙人，圣人(holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, “Master”)。2.有灵感的唱赞家或作曲家(特指婆罗门传统的)。ye te ahesuṁ brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro mantānaṁ pavattāro, yesamidaṁ etarahi brāhmaṇā porāṇaṁ mantapadaṁ gītaṁ pavuttaṁ samihitaṁ, tadanugāyanti tadanubhāsanti bhāsitamanubhāsanti vācitamanuvācenti, seyyathidaṁ-- Aṭṭhako Vāmako Vāmadevo Vessāmitto Yamataggi (Yamadaggi) Aṅgīraso Bhāradvājo Vāseṭṭho Kassapo Bhagu (昔之婆罗门诸仙人是创造秘典、歌诵秘典者，犹如--阿吒摩、婆摩、婆摩提婆、耶婆提伽、鸯耆罗、跋罗陀皤闍、婆摩吒、迦叶、婆咎。今之婆罗门，不过是集受彼等古秘典之圣句、诵语、仿效而诵、仿效而语，模仿所说而说、所语而语、所告而告而已。)(Vin.Mv.I,245.; D.3./I,104. D.13./I,238.; A.5.192./III,224., A.7.49./IV,61.,etc.)。isipabbajjā,【阴】离家去当隐士。Isipatana,【中】仙人堕处(鹿野苑一个地名)。Isigilipasse Kāḷasilāyaṁ,仙人山侧黑石室。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】圣人，预言者。 ~pabbajjā, 【阴】离家去当隐士。 ~patana, 【中】鹿野苑，一个地方的名字。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. -- Voc. ise Sn.1025; pl. Nom. isayo, Gen. isinaṁ S.II,280 & isīnaṁ S.I,192; etc. inst. isibhi Th.1, 1065] -- 1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, “Master” D.I,96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); S.I,33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaṁ); II,280 (dhammo isinaṁ dhajo); A.II,24, 51; Vin.IV,15 = 22 (°bhāsito dhammo); It.123; Sn.284, 458, 979, 689, 691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev° divine Seer), 1126, Nd² 149 (isi-nāmakā ye keci isi-pabbajjaṁ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā); Dh.281; J.I,17 (v.90: isayo n’atthi me samā of Buddha); J.V,140 (°gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv.II,6¹⁴ (= yama-niyam’ādīnaṁ esanatthena isayo PvA.98); II,13³ (= jhān’ādīnaṁ guṇānaṁ esanatthena isi PvA.163); IV,7³ (= asekkhānaṁ sīlakkhandh’ādīnaṁ esanatthena isiṁ PvA.265); Miln.19 (°vāta) 248 (°bhattika); DA.I,266 (Gen. isino); Sdhp.200, 384. See also mahesi. -- 2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaṁ pubbakā isayo mantānaṁ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin.I, 245; D.I,104, 238; A.III,224, IV.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Aṅgirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu.

--nisabha the first (lit. “bull”) among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Sn.698; Vv 16⁷ (cp. VvA.82). --pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism.123; DhA.I,105; IV,55; PvA.162. --vāta the wind of a Saint Miln.19; Vism.18. --sattama the 7^th of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7^th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) M.I,386; S.I,192; Sn.356; Th.1, 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena SnA 351); Vv 21¹ (= buddha-isinaṁ Vipassi-ādīnaṁ sattamo VvA.105). (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Isikā: {'def': '(isīkā) (f.) [Sk. iṣīkā] a reed D.I,77, cp. DA.I,222; J.VI,67 (isikā). (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Isipatana: {'def': 'n. 仙人堕処 [ベナレス郊外].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'n. 仙人墮處(地名) [Benares之郊外].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Isitta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi-ship D.I,104 (= isi-bhāva DA.I,274). (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issa: {'def': '【阳】熊。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】熊。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Issara: {'def': '【阳】 1. 统治者，主人。 2. 造物主。 ~jana, 【阳】富人，有影响力的人。 ~nimmāṇa, 【中】创造。 ~nimmānavādī, 【三】信仰造物主的人。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Vedic īwvara, from īw to have power),【阳】1.统治者，主人(lord, ruler, master, chief)。2.造物主(creative deity, Brahmā, D III.28; M II.222 = A I.173; Vism 598.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa] lord, ruler, master, chief A.IV,90; Sn.552; J.I,89 (°jana), 100, 283 (°bheri); IV,132 (°jana); Pv IV.6⁷ (°mada); Miln.253 (an° without a ruler); DhsA.141; DA.I,111; PvA.31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp.348, 431. -- 2. creative deity, Brahmā, D.III,28; M.II,222 = A.I,173; Vism.598. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issarajana: {'def': '【阳】富人，有影响力的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Issaranimmānavādī: {'def': '【三】信仰造物主的人。issara-nimmāna hetu﹐尊佑造。其因为自在天创造。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Issaranimmāṇa: {'def': '【中】创造。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Issariya: {'def': '(‹issara),【中】统治，最高权力(rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca))。issariyamada,【阳】权威的自负。S.37.28./IV,246.：“issariyabalena abhibhūṭam bhikkhave mātugāmaṁ, neva rūpabalaṁ tāyati, na bhogabalaṁ tāyati, na ñātibalaṁ tāyati, na puttabalaṁ tāyati, na sīlabalaṁ tāyati.”(诸比丘！当女人被男人的主权之力制伏时，容色之力帮不了，财产之力帮不了，亲族之力帮不了，儿子之力帮不了，戒德之力也帮不了。)tāyati：解救、庇护、帮助。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】最高权力，统治，财富。 ~mada, 【阳】权威的自负。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[fr. issara] rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca) D.III,190; S.I,43, 100 (°mada); V,342 (issariy-âdhipacca); A.I,62 (°ādhipacca); II,205, 249; III,38; IV,263; Sn.112; Dh.73; Ud.18; Ps.II,171, 176; J.I,156; V,443; DhA.II,73; VvA.126 (for ādhipacca) PvA.42, 117, 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp.418, 583. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issariyatā: {'def': '(‹issariya),【阴】权威(mastership, lordship)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】权威。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. issariya] mastership, lordship Sdhp.422. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issati: {'def': '[denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. e)ρatai to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat. erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr. *)/arhs God of war, a)rh\\; Ags. eorsian to be angry] to bear illwill, to be angry, to envy J.III,7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp.89, f. °ikā A.II,203. -- pp. issita (q. v.). (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(is+a；denom. fr. issā), 嫉妒，羡慕(jealousy, to envy)。ppr. med. issamānaka。【阴】issikā。【过分】issita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(is + a), 羡慕。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Issattha: {'def': '(nt. m.) [cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa. -- Bdhgh. in a strange way dissects it as “usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaṁ hoti” (i. e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) SnA 466] -- 1. (nt.) archery (as means of livelihood & occupation) M.I,85; III,1; S.I,100 (so read with v. l.; T. has issatta, C. expl^ns. by usu-sippaṁ K. S. p. 318); Sn.617 (°ṁ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaṁ SnA 466); J.VI,81; Sdhp.390. -- 2. (m.) an archer Miln.250, 305, 352, 418. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐Issatta,【中】箭术。【阳】射手，箭手。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】箭术。【阳】射手，箭手。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Issatthaka: {'def': '[issattha + ka] an archer Miln.419. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issita: {'def': '[pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita] being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger J.V,44. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issukin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in] envious, jealous Vin.II,89 (+ maccharin); D.III,45, 246; M.I,43, 96; S.IV,241; A.III,140, 335; IV,2; Dh.262; J.III,259; Pv. II.3⁴; Pug.19, 23; DhA.III,389; PvA.174. See also an°. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issukī: {'def': '【形】嫉妒的。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Issukin) (‹issā, Sk. īrsyu + ka + in),【形】嫉妒的(envious, jealous)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Issā: {'def': '1(Sk. īrsyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry),【阴】嫉妒，生气，羡慕，恶意(jealousy, anger, envy, ill-will)。issāpakata﹐嫉妒的本性(overcome by envy, of an envious nature)。issāmacchariya﹐。issāmanaka,【形】嫉妒的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2(cp. Sk. rwya-mrga),【阴】issammiga (= issāmiga) & issāmiga。鹿角，鹿茸(the antlers of this antelope)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】妒忌，恶意，羡慕。 ~manaka, 【形】嫉妒的。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) [cp. Sk. ṛśya-mṛga] in issammiga (= issāmiga) J.V,410, & issāmiga J.V,431, a species of antelope, cp. J.V,425 issāsiṅga the antlers of this antelope. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *)/arhs God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati] jealousy, anger, envy, ill-will D.II,277 (°macchariya); III,44 (id.); M.I,15; S.II,260; A.I,95, 105 (°mala), 299; II,203; IV,8 (°saññojana), 148, 349, 465; V,42 sq., 156, 310; Sn.110; J.V,90 (°âvatiṇṇa); Pv.II,37; Vv 15⁵; Pug.19, 23; Vbh.380, 391; Dhs.1121, 1131, 1460; Vism.470 (def.); PvA.24, 46, 87; DhA.II,76; Miln.155; Sdhp.313, 510.

--pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature S.II,260; Miln.155; PvA.31. See remarks under apakata & pakata. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issāsa: {'def': '(Sk. isvāsa, see issattha),【阳】射手，弓箭手(an archer)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】弓，射手，箭手。(p63)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha] an archer Vin.IV,124; M.III,1; A.IV,423 (issāso vā issās’antevāsī vā); J.II,87; IV,494; Miln.232; DA.I,156. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issāsin: {'def': '(Sk. isvāsa in meaning “bow” + in) 弓箭手(lit. one having a bow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning “bow” + in] an archer, lit. one having a bow J.IV,494 (= issāsa C.). (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Issāyanā: {'def': '(& Issāyitatta) [abstr. formations fr. issā] = issā Pug.19, 23; Dhs.1121; Vism.470. (Page 123)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ita: {'def': '[pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur-ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs.I,61; otherwise in comp^n. with prep., as peta, vīta etc. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Itara: {'def': '¹ (adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaṁ, etaṁ, iti etc.] other, second, next; different Dh.85, 104, 222; J.II,3; III,26; IV,4; PvA.13, 14, 42, 83, 117. In repetition cpd. itarîtara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn.42; J.V,425; Nd² 141; Miln.395; KhA 145, 147; Acc. itarîtaraṁ & Instr. itarîtarena used as adv. of one kind or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu III, 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] J VI 448 (°ṁ); Dh.331 (°ena); Vv 84¹ (text reads itritarena, v. l. itaritarena, expl^d. by itaritaraṁ VvA.333). (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】另一个。na itaro﹐不是别的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.). (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】另一个。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Itarītara: {'def': '【形】无论什么，任何的。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】无论什么，任何的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Iti: {'def': '【无】如此。（作为指出刚提到的事物，或是将要提到的，或表示句子已终止，〔＝。句号〕时常词前的 i 被丢弃只余下 ti）。 ~kira, 【无】如是我闻，我曾经听到如此。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ti) (indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaṁ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. “here, there (now), then”] emphatic‹-› deictic particle “thus”. Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in conversational prose. The function of “iti” is expl^d. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a “filling” particle than trying to define its meaning viz. --itī ti padasandhi padasaṁsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc.” Nd¹ 123 = Nd² 137. The same expl^n. also for iti’haṁ (see below IV.) -- I. As deictic adv. “thus, in this way” (Vism.423 iti = evaṁ) pointing to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Sn.253 (n’eso maman ti iti naṁ vijaññā), 805; It.123 (ito devā. . . taṁ namassanti); Dh.74 (iti bālassa saṅkappo thus think the --foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti); Vv 79¹⁰ (= evaṁ VvA.307); VvA.5. -- (b) referring to what follows D.I,63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); A.I,205 (id.) -- II. As emphatic part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one’s own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one’s own or other’s) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e. g. bālo ti vuccati Dh.63 = bālo vuccati). -- 1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e. g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataṁ esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaṁ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaṁ bhante ti kho Sīho . . . . D.I,151. -- 2. in indirect speech: (a) as statement of a fact “so it is that” (cp. E. “viz.”, Ger. “und zwar”), mostly untranslated Kh IV. (arahā ti pavuccati); J.I,253 (tasmā pesanaka-corā t’eva vuccanti); III,51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuṁ makkato sigālo uddo ti); PvA.112 (aṅkuro pañca-sakaṭasatehi . . . aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca-sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata-sahassehi . . . patipannā). -- (b) as statement of a thought “like this”, “I think”, so, thus Sn.61 (“saṅgo eso” iti ñatvā knowing “this is defilement”), 253 (“neso maman” ti iti naṁ vijaññā), 783 (“iti’han” ti), 1094 (etaṁ dīpaṁ anāparaṁ Nibbānaṁ iti naṁ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā pāraṁ gaccheyya tasmā “Parāyanaṁ” iti). -- III, Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in comb^n. with other part. iti is elided & contracted as follows: icc’eva, t’eva, etc. -- (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e. g. mā evaṁ akatthā ti DhA.I,7; kati dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. ‹-› IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in truth, really; as icc’eva Pv.I,11⁹ (= evam eva PvA.59); t’eva J.I,253; Miin 114; tv’eva J.I,203; II,2. --iti kira thus now, perhaps, I should say D.I,228, 229, 240. --iti kho thus, therefore D.I,98, 103; III,135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases) Nd¹ 13 = Nd² 420 A¹. --iti ha thus surely, indeed Sn.934, 1084 (see below under ītihītihaṁ; cp. SnA Index 669: itiha? and itikirā); It.76; DA.I,247, as iti haṁ at Sn.783 (same expl^n. at Nd¹ 71 as for iti). --kin ti how J.II,159.

--kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. “so I guess” or “I have heard” A.I,189 = II.191 sq. = Nd² 151. Cp. itiha. --bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin.II,184 (°abhava); D.I,8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DA.I,91); A.II,248; It.109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q. v.). --vāda “speaking so & so”, talk, gossip M.I,133; S.V,73; A.II,26; It III,35. --vuttaka (nt.) [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaṁ] “so it has been said”, (book of) quotations, “Logia”, N. of the fourth book of the Khuddaka-nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaṁ h’etaṁ Bhagavatā “thus has the Buddha said” (see khuddaka and navaṅga) Vin.III,8; M.I,133; A.II,7, 103; III,86, 177, 361 sq.; Pug.43, 62; KhA 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaṁ. --hāsa [= iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3^rd sg. perf. of atthi] “thus indeed it has been”, legendary lore, oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase itihāsa-pañca-mānaṁ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. D.I,88 = (see DA.I,247); A.I,163; III,223; Sn.447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu I.556. --hītiha [itiha + itiha] “so & so” talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp. itikirā & anītiha. Nd² spells ītihītiha) M.I,520; S.I,154; Sn.1084; Nd² 151. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】如此。(作为指出刚提到的事物，或是将要提到的，或表示句子已终止，〔＝。句号〕时常词前的 i 被丢弃只余下 ti)。itikira(传说),【无】流传的消息(hearsay)，人云亦云。 iti vistarah 乃至广说。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Itihāsa: {'def': '【阳】历史，传统。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】历史，传统。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Itivuttaka: {'def': '【中】《如是语经》。音译为「一筑多」，「伊帝渭多伽」。属於分别说系(Vibhājyā-vadināh)的经律，如《长阿含经》作「相应」；《四分律》作「善导」，《五分律》作「育多伽」，都是「如是语」的别译。《成实论》的「伊帝曰多伽」，即「本事」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】《如是语经》。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'n. [iti-vutta-ka, BSk. ityuktaka, itivṛttaka] 如是語経 [小部経の一], 伊帝目多伽 [九分教の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'n. [iti-vutta-ka, BSk. ityuktaka, itivṛttaka] 如是語經 [小部經之一], 伊帝目多伽 [九分教之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Ito: {'def': '【无】从此，从今，因此。 ~paṭṭhāya, 【无】自此以后，今后。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic itaḥ, Abl.-adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaṁ etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space & time “from here”. “from now”. (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the “other” world) It.77; Sn.271 (°ja. °nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence = attabhāvaṁ sandhāy’āha SnA 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (°nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i. e. from me), 1101; Pv.I,5⁷ (ito dinnaṁ what is given in this world); I,6² (i. e. manussalokato PvA.33); I,12³ (= idhalokato PvA.64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā); PvA.46 (ito dukkhato mutti). -- (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c’ito here and there PvA.4, 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there DhA.II,80. -- (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since D.II,2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn.570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami); VvA.319 (ito kira tiṁsa-kappa-sahasse); PvA.19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re-birth). -- (b) referring to the future, i. e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in a week VvA.138; ito paraṁ further, after this SnA 160, 178, 412, 549; PvA.83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward J.I,63 (ito dāni p.); PvA.41. (Page 119)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】从此，从今，因此。Itopaṭṭhāya(=Ito paṭṭhāya),【无】自此以后，今后。itodāni (ito-dāni或 ito-idāni)﹐从现在起。Itojāti ito attabhāvato jātā.(从此生：从自性产生。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ittara: {'def': '(sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning “going”, going along, hence developed meaning “passing”; fr. i] -- 1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable M.I,318 (opp. dīgharattaṁ); A.II,187; J.I,393; III,83 (°dassana = khaṇika° C.), IV.112 (°vāsa temporary abode); Pv.I,11¹¹ (= na cira-kāla-ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma-dhamma PvA.60); DA.I,195; PvA.60 (= paritta khaṇika). -- 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M.II,47 (°jacca of inferior birth); A.II,34; Sn.757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna SnA 509); Miln.93, 114 (°pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e. g. Divy 317 (dāna). (Page 119)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Itara,【形】1.通过的，可变的，短的，摘要(passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief)。2.非常小的，很少的(small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean)。itthrakāla,【阳】短期。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】短命的，摘要，非常小的，很少的。 ~kāla, 【阳】短期。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ittaratā: {'def': '(fr. ittara) ,【阴】可变(changeableness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln.93 (of a woman). (Page 119)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Ittha: {'def': '(indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha] here, in this world (or “thus, in such a way”), only in cpd. °bhāv’aññathā-bhāva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form” (cp. itibhāva & itthatta) Sn.729, 740 = 752; It.9 (v. l. itthi° for iti°) = A.II,10 = Nd² 172^a; It.94 (v. l. ittha°). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaṁ = Sk. itthaṁ (see next). (Page 119)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Itthagāra: {'def': 'Itthāgāra, (itthi+āgāra),【阳】1.闺房。2.闺房淑女(women’s apartment, seraglio)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Itthatta: {'def': '【中】1.(itthaṁ+tta)目前的情况(台语：都合too1hap8)，这一生。2.(itthi+tta) 女人气质，妇女特质。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [ittha + *tvaṁ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417] being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not “thusness” or “life as we conceive it”, as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. I.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaṁ seems to exist, see ittha); “life in these conditions” K. S. II.17; expl^d. by itthabhāva C. on S.I,140 (see K. S. 318). -- See also freq. formula A of arahatta. -- D.I,18, 84; A.I,63; II,82, 159, 203; Sn.158; Dhs.633; Pug.70, 71; DA.I,112. (Page 119)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [itthi + *tvaṁ abstr. fr. itthi] state or condition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs.633 (= itthi-sabhāva DhsA.321). (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 1. (itthaŋ + tta) 目前的情况，这一生。 2. (itthi + tta) 女人气质，妇女特质。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Itthaŋ: {'def': '【副】如此，这样。 ~nāma, 【形】叫做如此，所谓的。 ~bhūta, 【形】如此，这一类型。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Itthaṁ: {'def': '(indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base °i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D.I,53, 213; Dāvs.IV,35; V,18. --nāma (itthan°) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin.I,56; IV,136; J.I,297; Miln.115; DhA.II,98. --bhūta being thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. °lakkhaṇa or °ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i. e. the ablative case SnA 441; VvA.162, 174; PvA.150. (Page 119)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. pron. base itthi, as also iti in same meaning),【副】如此，这样(thus, in this way)。itthaṁnāma,【形】叫做如此，所谓的。itthaṁbhūta,【形】如此，这一类型。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Itthi: {'def': '& Itthī (f.) [Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. °sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero, Goth. saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr. hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. XXV.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & comp^n.) see thī] woman, female; also (usually as --°) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e. g. for contrast of itthi and purisa J.V,72, 398; Nett 93; DhA.I,390; PvA.153). -- S.I,33 (nibbānass’eva santike), 42, 125 (majjhim°, mah°), 185; A.I,28, 138; II,115, 209; III,68, 90, 156; IV,196 (purisaṁ bandhati); Sn.112, 769 (Nom. pl. thiyo = itthi-saññikā thiyo SnA 513); J.I,286 (itthi doso), 300 (Gen. pl. itthinaṁ); II,415 (Nom. pl. thiyo); V,397 (thi-ghātaka), 398 (Gen. Dat. itthiyā), V.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vbh.336, 337; DA.I,147; PvA.5, 44, 46, 67, 154 (amanuss° of petīs); Sdhp.64, 79. -- anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife J.II,126 (= ucchiṭṭh° C.); kul’--itthi a wife of good descent Vin.II,10; A.III,76; IV,16, 19; dahar° a young wife J.I,291; dur° a poor woman J.IV,38. ‹-› Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enum^d. at Vin.III,139 = A.V,264 = VvA.72, viz. mātu-rakkhitā, pitu°, mātāpitu° bhātu°, bhaginī°, ñāti°, gotta°, dhamma°, sarakkhā, saparidaṇḍā; see Vin.III,139 for expl^n. -- S.I,38 (malaṁ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); J.I,287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); IV, 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaṁ pamathenti); V, 425 (sīho yathā . . . that’itthiyo); women as goods for sale S.I,43 (bhaṇḍānaṁ uttamaṁ); DhA.I,390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇḍaṁ).

--agāra (-āgāra) as itthagāra(itthāgāra) women’s apartment, seraglio Vin.I,72; IV,158; S.I,58, 89; J.I,90; also coll. for womenfolk, women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) D.II,249; J.V,188. --indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. Puris’indriya) S.V,204; A.IV,57 sq.; Vism.447, 492; Dhs.585, 633, 653 et passim. --kathā talk about women D.I,7 (cp. DA.I,90). --kāma the craving for a woman S.IV,343. --kutta a woman’s behaviour, woman’s wiles, charming behaviour, coquetry A.IV,57 = Dhs.633; J.I,296, 433; II,127, 329; IV,219, 472; DhA.IV,197. --ghātaka a woman-killer J.V, 398. --dhana wife’s treasure, dowry Vin.III,16. --dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Sn.106; J.III,260; PvA.5. --nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs.633, 713, 836. --pariggaha a woman’s company, a woman Nd¹ 11. --bhāva existence as woman, womanhood S.I,129; Th.2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī, cp. ThA.178; Dhs.633; PvA.168. --rūpa womanly beauty A.I,1; III,68; Th.2, 294. --lakkhaṇa fortune-telling regarding a woman D.I,9 (cp. DhA.I,94, + purisa°); J.VI,135. --liṅga “sign of a woman”, feminine quality, female sex Vism.184; Dhs.633, 713, 836; DhsA.321 sq. --sadda the sound (or word) “woman” DhA.I,15. --soṇḍī a woman addicted to drink Sn.112. (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'itthī,【阴】女人。cf. vanitā, nārī。itthidhutta,【阳】沉溺女色的人。itthiliṅga,【中】女人性器官，女性的特质，女性。itthi-bhāva阴性。itthinimitta,【中】女性的器官。dasa itthiyo(十种女人)︰māturakkhitā(母亲守护)、piturakkhitā(父亲守护)、mātāpiturakkhitā(父母亲守护)、 bhāturakkhitā(兄守护)、bhaginirakkhitā(姐守护)、ñātirakkhitā(亲戚守护)、gottarakkhitā(家族守护)、dhammarakkhitā(法守护)、sārakkhā(有守护。已被带至内室，而说：这是我的(女人))、saparidaṇḍā(罚护女。凡是到某某女人处，将处罚。) 《律藏．经分别》(Vin.III,139-140.；CS:p.202-3)。manussitthī, amanussitthī, tiracchānagatitthī, 人女，非人女，雌性动物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'itthī, itthikā, 【阴】女人，女性。 ~dhutta, 【阳】沉溺女色的人。 ~liṅga,【中】女性的器官，女性的质量，女性。 ~nimitta, 【中】女性的器官。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Itthikā: {'def': '(fr. itthi),【阴】女人，女性。itthika﹐【形】女人的(in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [fr. itthi] a woman Vin.III,16; D.II,14; J.I, 336; Vv 18⁷; Sdhp.79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin.II,256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); S.II,264 (id. and appitthikāni). (Page 120)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Itthāgāra: {'def': '【阳】 1. 闺房。 2. 闺房淑女。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iva: {'def': '【无】象，如同。(p62)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic iva & va] part. of comparison: like, as Dh.1, 2, 7, 8, 287, 334; J.I,295; SnA 12 (= opamma-vacanaṁ). Elided to ‘va, diaeretic-metathetic form viya (q. v.). (Page 122)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】像，如同。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Iñjana: {'def': '【中】Iñjanā,【阴】运动，动作。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】运动，动作。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iñjanā: {'def': '(f.) & Iñjanaṁ (nt.) [fr. iñj, see iñjati] shaking, movement, motion Sn.193 (= calanā phandanā SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā C.). an° immobility, steadfastness Ps.I,15; II,118. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iñjati: {'def': '(iñj + a) 移动，激起。【过】 iñji。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(iñj +a) 移动，激起。【过】iñji。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as aṅg in Sk. aṅga = P. añja & iṅgha & Vedic pali-aṅgati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati¹] to shake, move, turn about, stir D.I,56; S.I,107, 132, 181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. “impassive”); III,211; Th.1, 42; 2, 231; Nd² s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism.377; DA.I,167. -- pp. iñjita (q. v.). (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iñjita: {'def': '[pp. of iñjati] shaken, moved Th.1, 386 (an°). Usually as nt. iñjitaṁ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M.I,454; S.I,109; IV,202; A.II,45; Sn.750, 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd² 140); Dh.255; Vbh.390. ‹-› On the 7 iñjitas see J.P. T.S. 1884, 58. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(iñjati 的【过分】), 已移动，已摇动。【中】运动，摇摆游移不定。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(iñjati的【过分】), 已移动，已摇动。【中】运动，摇摆游移不定。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Iñjitatta: {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. iñjita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering, motion S.V,315 (kāyassa). (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iṅgha: {'def': '【无】发生，进行，喂；听我说（唤起注意）。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【无】发生，进行，喂；听我说(唤起注意) (part. of exhortation, lit. “get a move on”, come on, go on, look here)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Sk. aṅga prob. after P. iṅgha (or añja, q. v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84] part. of exhortation, lit. “get a move on”, come on, go on, look here, Sn.83, 189, 862, 875 = 1052; J.V,148; Pv IV.5⁷; Vv 53⁹ (= codan’atthe nipāto VvA.237); VvA.47; DhA.IV,62. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iṅghāḷa: {'def': '[according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = aṅgāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal] coal, embers, in iṅghāḷakhu Th.2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= aṅgāra-kāsu ThA.256). The whole cpd. is doubtful. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iṅgita: {'def': '(pp. of ingati = iñjati),【中】姿态，姿势(movement, gesture, sign)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of ingati = iñjati] movement, gesture, sign J.II,195, 408; VI,368, 459. (Page 117)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】姿态，姿势。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iṇa: {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an-aṇa] debt D.I,71, 73; A.III,352; V,324 (enum^d. with baddha, jāni & kali); Sn.120; J.I,307; II,388, 423; III,66; IV,184 (iṇagga for nagga?); 256; V,253 (where enum^d. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya°, iṇa°, dāya°, sāmi°); VI,69, 193; Miln.375; PvA.273, 276, iṇaṁ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism.556; SnA 289; PvA.3. -- iṇaṁ muñcati to discharge a debt J.IV,280; V,238; °ṁ sodheti same PvA.276; labhati same PvA.3.

--apagama absence of debt ThA.245. --gāhaka a borrower Miln.364. --ghāta stricken by debt Sn.246 (= iṇaṁ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). --ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v. l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt M.I,463 = S.III,93 = It.89 = Miln.279. --paṇṇa promissory note J.I,230; IV,256. --mokkha release from debt J.IV,280; V,239. --sādhaka negotiator of a loan Miln.365. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】债务。 ~ṭṭha, 【形】欠债的人，债务人。 ~paṇṇa, 【中】本票，期票。 ~mokkha, 【阳】摆脱债务。 ~sāmika, 【阳】债权人。 ~sohana, 【中】清偿债务。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. rṇa),【中】债务(debt)。iṇaṭṭha,【形】欠债的人，债务人。iṇapaṇṇa,【中】本票，期票。iṇamokkha,【阳】摆脱债务。iṇasāmika,【阳】债权人。iṇasohana,【中】清偿债务。anaṇa, 【形】无债的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Iṇāyika: {'def': '[fr. iṇa] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S.I,170; J.IV,159, 256; VI,178; ThA.271 see also dhanika); PvA.3. -- (2) a debtor Vin.I,76; Nd¹ 160. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】债务人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】债务人。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Iṭṭha: {'def': '【形】令人喜爱的，愉快的。【中】快乐，乐事。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(pp. of icchati),【形】令人喜爱的，愉快的，可喜的(pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant)。【中】快乐，乐事。【反】aniṭṭha,不愉快的，不可喜的。所缘(ārammaṇa, ālambaṇa)可以分为三组：不可喜（aniṭṭhārammaṇaṁ）、中等可喜（iṭṭhamajjhatta或iṭṭhārammaṇaṁ可喜）与极可喜（ati-iṭṭhārammaṇaṁ）。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D.I,245; II,192; M.I,85; S.IV,60, 158, 235 sq.; V,22, 60, 147; A.II,66 sq.; V,135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn.759; It. 15; Vbh.2, 100, 337. -- Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Sn.154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism.167 (id.); PvA.116 (= bhadraṁ), 140. --aniṭṭha unpleasant, disagreeable PvA.32, 52, 60, 116. -- See also pariy°, in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iṭṭhakā: {'def': 'iṭṭhikā,【阴】瓦片，瓷砖，砖块(a burnt brick, a tile)。(Cayaniṭṭhakā= 砖块，Chadaniṭṭhakā= 瓷砖)。suvaṇṇaiṭṭhakā, 金瓦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'iṭṭhikā,【阴】瓦片，瓷砖，砖块。 (Cayaniṭṭhakā= 砖块，Chadaniṭṭhakā=瓷砖)。(p61)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Itthakā) (f.) [BSk. iṣṭakā, e. g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh › *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. a]i/qw burn, ai(_qos fire-brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av. ištya tile, brick) -- 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin II 121 (°pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr. silāpakāra & dāru°); J.III,435, 446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read °aṭṭhakā); V,213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism.355 (°dārugomaya); PvA.4 (°cuṇṇa-makkhita-sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X.5 piṣṭa-cūṛn’âvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ‘haṁ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka › piṣṭa). ‹-› 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa°) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA.III,29, 61; VvA.157. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Iṭṭhi°: {'def': 'in °khagga-dhāra at J.VI,223 should be read iddha. (Page 118)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

J: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第八个辅音字母。发音是带音的 j，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第八个辅音字母。发音是带音的 j，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Ja: {'def': '(-°) [adj.-suffix from jan, see janati; cp. °ga; gacchati] born, produced, sprung or arisen from. Freq. in cpds.: atta°, ito°, eka°, kuto°, khandha°, jala°, daratha°, dāru°, di°, puthuj°, pubba°, yoni°, vāri°, saha°, sineha°. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jacca: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中), 有如此的出生。jaccandha,【形】天生盲的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中), 有如此的出生。 ~ndha, 【形】天生盲的。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [jāti+tya] of birth, by birth (usually --°) M.II,47 (ittara°. of inferior birth); Sn.p. 80 (kiṁ° of what birth, i. e. of what social standing); J.I,342 (hīna° of low birth): Sdhp.416 (id.) J.V,257 (nihīna°); Miln.189 (sama° of equal rank).

--andha (adj.) blind from birth Ud.62 sq. (Jaccandhavagga VI,4); J.I,45, 76; IV,192; Vbh.412 sq.; in similes at Vism.544, 596. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaccā: {'def': 'Instr. of jāti. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '= jātiyā。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jaddhu: {'def': '[for jaddhuṁ, inf. to jakṣ (P. jaggh), corresp. to Sk. jagdhi eating food; intens. of ghasati] only in composition as a° not eating, abstaining from food. °ka one who fasts M.I,245; °māra death by starvation J.VI,63 (=anāsaka-maraṇa; Fsb. has note: read ajuṭṭha°?); °mārika A.IV,287 (v. l. ajeṭṭha°). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jagat: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic jagat, intens. of gam, see gacchati] the world, the earth A.II,15, 17 (jagato gati); S.I,186 (jagatogadha plunged into the world). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jagati: {'def': '【阴】地球，世界。jagatippadesa,【阳】在地球上的一个地点。jagatiruha,【阳】树。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】地球，世界。 ~ppadesa, 【阳】在地球上的一个地点。 ~ruha,【阳】树。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jagatī: {'def': '(f.) [see jagat] only in cpds. as jagati°:

--ppadesa a spot in the world Dh.127=PvA.104; --ruha earth grown, i. e. a tree J.I,216. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jagga: {'def': '(nt.) [jaggati+ya] wakefulness S.I,111. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaggana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】管理，照管，培养，注意。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】jagganā,【阴】管理，照管，培养，注意。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [from jaggati] watching, tending, bringing up J.I,148 (dāraka°). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jagganatā: {'def': '(to jāgarati] watchfulness J.I,10. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaggati: {'def': '(=jāgarati, Dhtp 22 gives jagg as root in meaning “niddā-khaya.”] (a) to watch, to lie awake J.V,269. ‹-› (b) to watch over, i. e. to tend, to nourish, rear, bring up J.I,148 (dārakaṁ), 245 (āsīvisaṁ). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jagg + a), 看守，滋养，清醒地躺着。【过】 jaggi。【独】 jaggitvā。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jagg+a), 看守，滋养，清醒地躺著。【过】jaggi。【独】jaggitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jagghanā: {'def': '【阴】 Jagghita, 【中】笑。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】jagghita,【中】笑。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jagghati: {'def': '(jaggh+a), 笑，嘲弄。【过】jagghi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Intens. to sound-root ghar. for *jaghrati. See note on gala. Kern compares Ved. jakṣati, Intens. of hasati (Toev. under anujagghati); Dhtp 31 jaggh= hasane] to laugh, to deride J.III,223; V,436; VI,522. ‹-› pp. jagghita J.VI,522. See also anu°, pa°. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jaggh + a), 笑，嘲弄。【过】 ~ghi。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jagghitā: {'def': '(f.) laughter J.III,226. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaghana: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic jaghana, cp. Gr. koxw/nh; see jaṅghā] the loins, the buttocks Vin.II,266; J.V,203. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】腰部，臀部。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】腰部，臀部。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jaha: {'def': '【形】(在【合】中) 残留，放弃。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (--°) [to jahati] leaving behind, giving up, see attaṁ°, okaṁ°, kappaṁ°, raṇaṁ°, sabbaṁ°, etc (S.I,52; It.58; Sn.790, 1101, etc.); duj° hard to give up Th.1, 495. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 (在【合】中) 残留，放弃。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jahati: {'def': 'Jahāti (hā(梵hā) 离开+a, hā 重叠，而前 hā 被改变成 ja), 离开，放弃。【过】jahi。【过分】jahita, hīna。【现分】jahanta。【独】hitvā(very frequent); hitvāna, jahitvā & jahetvā, jahitvā。【义】jahitabba。【命】jahassu。【祈】jahe, jaheyya。fut. jahissāmi; in verse: hassāmi.。【不】jahituṁ。【被】hāyati, hāyate & hīyati; Sn.944 (hīyamāna)。【使】hāpeti。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'jahāti (hā + a, hā 重叠，而前 hā 被改变成 ja), 离开，放弃。【过】 jahi。【过分】 jahita。【现分】 jahanta。【独】 jahitvā。【潜】 jahitabba。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& jahāti [Vedic root hā. Cp. *ghē(i) & ghī to be devoid (of), Gr. xh_ros void of, xh_ra widow, xwρa open space (cp. Sk. vihāya=ākāsa), xwri/zw separate; Lat. her-es; Sk. jihīte to go forth=Ohg. gēn, gān, Ags. gan=go; also Sk. hāni want=Goth. gaidw, cp. Gr. xati/zw] to leave, abandon, lose; give up, renounce, forsake. Ster. explⁿ at Nd² 255 (and passim): pajahati vinodeti byantikaroti anabhāvaṁ gameti. Lit. as well as fig.; esp. w. ref. to kāma, dosa & other evil qualities. -- Pres. jahāti Sn.1, 506 (dosaṁ), 589; Dh.91; imper. jahassu Sn.1121 (rūpaṁ); pot. jahe It.34; Dh.221; J.IV,58, & jaheyya Sn.362; It.115; J.I,153; IV,58. -- Fut. jahissāmi J.III,279; IV,420; V,465; in verse: hassāmi J.IV,420; V,465. -- Ger. hitvā (very frequent) Sn.284, 328; Dh.29, 88, etc.; hitvāna (Sn.60), jahitvā & jahetvā (Sn.500). -- Inf. jahituṁ J.I,138. -- pp. jahita Sn.231; Kh 9; Miln.261. -- Pass. hāyati S.II,224; Sn.817; Miln.297, hāyate J.V,488 & hīyati J.II,65; Sn.944 (hīyamāna), cp. hāyare J.II,327; pp. hīna (q. v.). -- Caus. hāpeti (q. v.). See also hāni, hāyin, jaha. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jahitikā: {'def': '(f.) [See jahati] (a woman) who has been jilted, or rejected, or repudiated J.I,148. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jajjara: {'def': '[From intensive of jarati] withered, feeble with age Th.2, 270; J.I,5, 59 (jarā°); ThA.212; PvA.63 (°bhāva, state of being old) -- a° not fading (cp. amata & ajarāmara), of Nibbāna S.IV,369. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】由于年龄的微弱，老，枯萎，雕谢，衰弱。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】由於年老的微弱，老，枯萎(台语：蔫脯lian poo2，乌沤oo au2)，凋谢，衰弱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jajjarita: {'def': '【过分】已不老。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. of intens. of jar see jarati] weakened DhA.I,7. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已削弱。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jala: {'def': '2﹐发亮，燃烧。Jalaṁ aggīva bhāsatīti rattiṁ pabbatamatthake jalamāno aggi viya virocati.(如火在山顶燃烧︰夜晚，如火在山顶燃烧，照耀。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. jala, conn. with gala drop (?), prob. dialectical; cp. udaka] water Sn.845; J.I,222; III,188; IV,137.

--gocara living in the water J.II,158. --ja born or sprung from w. J.IV,333; V,445; VvA.42; --da “giving water,” rain-cloud Dāvs.V,32; --dhara [cp. jalandhara rain-cloud] the sea Miln.117; --dhi=prec. Dāvs.V,38. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】水。 ~gocara, ~cara, 【形】住在水的，水生动物。【阳】鱼。~ja, 【形】从水中生的，从水中跃出的。【中】睡莲。【阳】鱼。 ~da, ~dhara, 【阳】雨云。 ~niggama, 【阳】水的出口，排水沟。 ~ādhāra,【阳】蓄水，水库。 ~ālaya, ~āsaya, 【阳】湖，人造的池塘。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(Sk. jala),【中】水(water)。jalagocara, jalacara,【形】住在水的，水生动物。【阳】鱼。jalaja,【形】从水中生的，从水中跃出的。【中】睡莲。【阳】鱼。jalada, jaladhara,【阳】雨云。jalaniggama,【阳】水的出口，排水沟。jalādhāra,【阳】蓄水，水库。jalālaya, jalāsaya,【阳】湖，人造的池塘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaladhi: {'def': 'jalanidhi, 【阳】大海，海洋。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'jalanidhi,【阳】大海，海洋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jalana: {'def': '(Sk. jvalana),【中】燃烧(burning)。aggijalana, 燃料。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】光亮，燃烧。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(n.-adj.) [Sk. jvalana] burning Pgdp 16. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jalati: {'def': '[Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn (Dhtp 264: dittiyaṁ), cp. Ohg. kol=coal; Celt. gûal] to burn, to shine D 3, 188; M.I,487; J.I,62; II,380; IV,69; It.86; Vv 46²; VvA.107; Miln.223, 343. -- Caus. jaleti & jāleti (cp. janeti: jāneti) to set on fire, light, kindle S.I,169; J.II,104; Miln.47. -- pp. jalita. Intens. daddaḷhati (q. v.). Cp. ujjāleti. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jal发光+a)(Sk. jvalati, with jvarati to be hot or feverish, to jval to burn), 发亮，燃烧。【过】jali。【过分】jalita。【现分】jalanta, jalamāna。【独】jalitvā。Jalitaggi﹐燃烧的火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jal + a), 发亮，燃烧。【过】 jali。【过分】 jalita。【现分】 jalanta, jalamāna。【独】 jalitvā。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jalita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. to jalati] set on fire, burning, shining, bright, splendid Sn.396, 668, 686; Vv 21⁶ (=jalanto jotanto VvA.107); Pv.I,10¹⁴ (burning floor of Niraya); II,1¹² (°ânubhāva: shining majesty); PvA.41 (=āditta burning); ThA.292. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jalla: {'def': '² [prob.=jhalla, see Kern, Toevoegselen s. v.] athlete, acrobat J.VI,271. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】泥垢。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [*jalya to jala or gal] moisture, (wet) dirt, perspiration (mostly as seda° or in cpd. rajo°, q. v.) Sn.249 (=rajojalla SnA 291); J.VI,578 (sweat under the armpits=jallikā Com.). (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】泥垢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jallikā: {'def': '【阴】(在身体上的)污垢，树上衰退的树皮。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [demin. of jalla] a drop (of perspiration), dirt in seda°, etc. A.I,253 (kāli°); Sn.198=J.I,146; VI,578. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】（在身体上的）污垢，树上衰退的树皮。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jalogi: {'def': '(nt.?) toddy (i. e. juice extracted from the palmyra, the date or the cocoa palm) Vin.II,294 (pātuṁ the drinking of j.), 301, 307; Mhvs 4, 10. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jalābu: {'def': '【阳】胎盘。 ~jā, 【形】在胎盘中出生的，胎生的。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. jarāyu, slough & placenta, to jar see jarati, originally that which decays (=decidua); cp. Gr. gh_ras slough. As to meanings cp. gabbha] 1. the womb S.III,240. -- 2. the embryo J.IV,38. -- 3. the placenta J.II,38.

--ja born from a womb, viviparous M.I,73; D.III,230; J.II,53=V.85. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. jarāyu),【阳】1.子宫(the womb)。2.胚体(the embryo)。3.胎盘(placenta)。jalābujā,【形】在胎盘中出生的，胎生的(有情类生从胎藏出生)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jalūkā: {'def': '【阴】水蛭(leech)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】水蛭。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jalūpikā: {'def': '(f.) [Sk. *jalūkikā=jalūkā & (pop. etym.) jalaṅkā (sprung fr. water), borrowed fr. Npers. ƶalū (?Uhlenbeck); cp. Gr. bdέlla leech, Celt. gel; perhaps to gal in the sense of such (?)] a leech Miln.407 (v. l. jalopikā). jalūkā leech DA.I,117. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jambhanā: {'def': '【阴】打哈欠，唤醒，鼓励。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】打哈欠，唤醒，鼓励。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [to jambhati] arousing, activity, alertness Vbh.352. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jambhati: {'def': '[cp. Vedic jehate, Dhtp 208 & Dhtm 298 define jambh as “gatta-vināma,” i. e. bending the body] to yawn, to arouse oneself, to rise, go forth (of a lion) J.VI,40. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jabh + ŋ-a), 打哈欠，唤醒自己。【过】 jambhi。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jabh打哈欠+ṁ-a), 打哈欠，唤醒自己。【过】jambhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jambonada: {'def': '(=Jambunada),【中】阎浮河产的金。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】来自阎浮河的一种金。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. jāmbūnada; belonging to or coming from the Jambu river (?)] a special sort of gold (in its unwelded state); also spelled jambunada (J.IV,105; VvA.13, 340) A.I,181; II,8, 29; Vv 84¹⁷. Cp. jātarūpa. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jambu: {'def': 'jambū, 【阴】蒲桃（一种热带乔木 (Eugenia Jambolana)，有大而厚的叶子，花粉红色，肉质果实可食用，表面有绒毛，有玫瑰香味），（音译）阎浮树。 ~dīpa, 【阳】阎浮提洲，即：印度。 ~pakka, 【中】蒲桃果。 ~saṇḍa, 【阳】蒲桃树林。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. jambu] the rose-apple tree, Eugenia Jambolana J.II,160; V,6; Vv 6⁷; 44¹³, 164. -- As adj. f. jambī sarcastically “rose-apple-maid,” appl^d to a gardener’s daughter J.III,22.

--dīpa the country of the rose-apples i. e. India J.I,263; VvA.18; Miln.27, etc. --nada see jambonada; --pakka the fruit of Eugenia jambolana, the rose-apple (of black or dark colour) Vism.409; --pesī the rind of the r.-a. fruit J.V,465; --rukka the r.-a. tree DhA.III,211; --saṇḍa rose-apple grove (=°dīpa, N. for India) Sn.552= Th.1, 822. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'jambū(Sk. jambu),【阴】莲雾，蒲桃(rose-apple﹐一种热带乔木 (Eugenia Jambolana)，有大而厚的叶子，花粉红色，肉质果实可食用，表面有绒毛，有玫瑰香味)，(音译)阎浮树。【形】【阴】jambī, 阎浮提少女(sarcastically “rose-apple-maid,” appld to a gardener’s daughter J.III.22)。jambudīpa,【阳】阎浮提洲(the country of the rose-apples i. e. India J I.263; VvA 18; Miln 27, etc.)。jambupakka,【中】蒲桃果(果实为黑色或暗色, Vism 409)。jambusaṇḍa,【阳】蒲桃树林(rose-apple grove (=jambudīpa, India) Sn 552= Th 1, 822.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jambu-dīpa: {'def': '赡部洲，阎浮提，阎浮利，赡部提', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Jambudīpa: {'def': 'm.阎浮提，南赡部洲，インド［三十三天の南部，阎部树（jambu）が繁茂する洲］. -talaインドの平原', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Jambudīpaka: {'def': 'm. 阎浮提人，インド人', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}

Jambuka: {'def': '【阳】豺，胡狼，野干。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. jambuka, to jambh?] a jackal J.II,107; III,223. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. jambuka, to jambh?),【阳】豺(jackal)，胡狼，野干(a jackal)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jambāla: {'def': '(Sk. jambāla),泥巴(mud)。【形】jambālin,泥泞的(muddy)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. jambāla] mud; adj. jambālin muddy, as n. jambālī (f.) a dirty pool (at entrance to village) A.II,166. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jambālī: {'def': '【阴】肮脏的池(a dirty pool(at entrance to village) A.4.178./II.166)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】肮脏的池。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jambīra: {'def': '【阳】橘子树，【中】橘子。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】橘子树，【中】橘子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jamma: {'def': '【形】粗俗的，可鄙的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic *jālma (?), dialectical?] miserable, wretched, contemptible J.II,110; III,99 (=lāmaka); f. --ī S.V,217; Dh.335, 336 (of taṇhā); J.II,428; V,421; DhA.IV,44 (=lāmakā). (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】粗俗的，可鄙的。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jamman: {'def': '(a) (nt.) [to janati] birth, descent, rank Sn.1018. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jana: {'def': '-jana,【阳】人，男人。janakāya,【阳】人群。janatā,【阴】人在集会。janapada,【阳】省，国家，乡下地方。janapadakalyāṇī,【阴】一国之中最美丽的女孩。janapadacārikā,【阴】在国内旅行。janasammadda,【阳】人山人海。janapadaroga,传染病。mahājanika, 【阳】大众。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[*genē: see janati. Cp. Gr. gQnos, gόnos; Lat. genus=Fr. gens, to which also similar in meaning] a creature, living being: (a) sg. an individual, a creature, person, man Sn.121, 676, 807, 1023 (sabba everybody). Usually collectively: people, they, one (=Fr. on), with pl. of verb Dh.249 (dadanti); often as mahājana the people, the crowd S.I,115; J.I,167, 294; PvA.6; lokamahājana=loka DhA.III,175; or as bahu(j)jana many people, the many A.I,68; Dh.320; DhA.III,175. See also puthujjana. -- (b) pl. men, persons, people, beings: nānā° various living beings Sn.1102 (expl^d at Nd² 248 as khattiyā brāhmaṇā vessā suddā gahaṭṭhā pabbajitā devā manussā.) dve janā J.I,151; II,105; tayo j. J.I,63; III,52; keci janā some people PvA.20. See also Sn.243, 598, 1077, 1121.

--âdhipa a king of men J.II,369; --inda=prec. J.III,280, 294; --esabha the leader of men, the best of all people Dh.255; --kāya a body or group of people J.I,28; DhA.I,33 (dve j.: micchā & sammā-diṭṭhikā); Dpvs.I,40; --pada country see sep.; --majjhe (Loc.) before (all) the people J.I,294; Th.2, 394; --vāda people’s talk, gossip Sn.973. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】人，男人。 ~kāya, 【阳】人群。 ~tā, 【阴】人在集会。 ~pada,【阳】省，国家，乡下地方。 ~padakalyāṇī, 【阴】一国之中最美丽的女孩。 ~padacārikā, 【阴】在一国旅行。 ~sammadda, 【阳】人山人海。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Janaka: {'def': '【阳】1.生产，生产者(producing, production)。2. Janakikā, 【中】【阴】生产者，母亲(genetrix, mother)。【形】生产的。janakakamma﹐令生业，是是使善或不善心在结生时，产生结生心、身根色( kalala羯罗蓝、凝滑)、性根色(男或女性)、心所依处色，且在活命期间继续产生业生色、五根、果报心.心所。只有在临死时成熟的令生业才能产生结生心，而其他的善与不善业则能在一生中产生果报。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[to janati] 1. producing, production Vism.369; adj. (-°) producing: pasāda° Mhvs.I,4 (=°kāraka); a species of karma Vism.601; Cpd. 144 (A.I). -- 2. n. f. °ikā genetrix, mother J.I,16; Dhs.1059≈(where it represents another jānikā, viz. deception, as shown by syn. māyā & B.Sk. janikā Lal. V. 541; Kern, Toev. p. 41). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】生产者，父亲。【形】生产的。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Janana: {'def': '【中】生产，原因。【形】生产的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [to janati] producing, causing (-°) It.84 (anattha° dosa); J.IV,141; Dpvs.I,2; DhsA.258; Dhtp 428. -- f. jananī PvA.1 (saṁvega° desanā);= mother (cp. janettī) J.IV,175; PvA.79. Note. jananā DA.I,310 is misprint for janatā. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】生产，原因。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jananī: {'def': '【阴】母亲。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母亲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Janapada: {'def': '[jana+pada, the latter in function of collective noun-abstract: see pada 3] inhabited country, the country (opp. town or market-place), the continent; politically: a province, district, county D.I,136 (opp. nigama); II,349; A.I,160, 178; Sn.422, 683, 995, 1102; J.I,258; II,3 (opp. nagara), 139, 300; PvA.20, 32, 111 (province). See also gāma. The 16 provinces of Buddhist India are comprised in the soḷasa mahā-janapadā (Miln.350) enum^d at A.I,213=IV.252 sq.=Nd² 247 (on Sn.1102) as follows: Aṅgā, Magadhā (+Kālingā, Nd²) Kāsī, Kosalā, Vajjī, Mallā, Cetī (Cetiyā A.IV,), Vaṁsā (Vaṅgā A.I,), Kurū, Pañcālā, Majjā (Macchā A), Sūrasenā, Assakā, Avantī, Yonā (Gandhārā A), Kambojā. Cp. Rhys Davids, B. India p. 23.

--kathā talk or gossip about the province D.I,7≈; --kalyāṇī a country-beauty, i. e. the most beautiful girl in the province D.I,193 (see kalyāṇa); --cārikā tramping the country PvA.14; --tthāvariya stableness, security, of the realm, in °patta, one who has attained a secure state of his realm, of a Cakkavattin D.I,88; II,16; Sn.p. 106; --padesa a rural district A.IV,366; V,101. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Janati: {'def': '¹ [Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.); *gene & *gnē to (be able to) produce; Gr. gi/gnomai (gέnesis) gnwtόs =jāta=(g)nātus; Lat. gigno, natura, natio; Goth. knōps & kunps; Cymr. geni, Ags. cennan, Ohg. kind, etc.] only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd² s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaṁ j. to put forth exertion J.II,407 (see chanda); (saṁ)vegaṁ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) J.III,184; PvA.32; Mhvs.I,4; dukkhaṁ j. to cause discomfort PvA.63. -- Aor. janayi Th.2, 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaṁ: she bore). -- pp. janita produced PvA.1. -- See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti, ñāti, etc. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 (Sk. janati (trs.) & jāyate (intrs.)), 生、起、发生。(only in Caus. janeti [Sk. janayati] often spelled jāneti (cp. jaleti: jāleti) & Pass. (intrs.) jāyati to bring forth, produce, cause, syn. sañjaneti nibbatteti abhinibbatteti Nd2 s. v. (cp. karoti). ussāhaṁ j. to put forth exertion J.II,407 (see chanda); (saṁ)vegaṁ j. to stir up emotion (aspiration) J.III,184; PvA.32; Mhvs.I,4; dukkhaṁ j. to cause discomfort PvA.63. -- Aor. janayi Th.2, 162 (Māyā j. Gotamaṁ: she bore). -- pp. janita produced PvA.1. -- See also jantu jamma, jāta, jāti, ñāti, etc.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '2 出声(to make a sound J.VI,64 (=sanati saddaṁ karoti))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² to make a sound J.VI,64 (=sanati saddaṁ karoti). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Janatā: {'def': '(from janati), 【阴】人类(a collection of people (“mankind”), congregation, gathering; people, folk)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [from janati] a collection of people (“mankind”), congregation, gathering; people, folk D.I,151 (=DA.I,310, correct jananā), 206; Vin.II,128=M.II,93 (pacchimā); A.I,61 (id.); III,251 (id.); It.33; J.IV,110; Pv III,5⁷ (=janȧsamūha upāsakagaṇa PvA.200). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Janavati: {'def': '(?) A.IV,172. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Janeti: {'def': '(jan + e), 产生，生产，生。【现分】 janenta。【独】 janetvā。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jan+e), 产生，生产，生。【现分】janenta。【独】janetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Janettī: {'def': '【阴】母亲。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [f. to janitṛ=genέtws=genitor, cp. genetrix. The Sk. form is janitrī. On e: i cp. petti°: pitri°] mother D.II,7 sq.; M.III,248; A.IV,276; J.I,48; II,381; IV,48. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】母亲。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Janetu: {'def': '【阳】生产者，生殖者。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】生产者，生殖者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Janikā: {'def': '【阴】母亲，根由。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】母亲，根由。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Janita: {'def': '(Janeti的【过分】) 产生，生产。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Janitta: {'def': '(nt.) [jan+tra, cp. Gr. genέteira] birthplace J.II,80. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jannu: {'def': '[cp. jaṇṇu(ka) & jānu] the knee DhA.I,394. --°ka D.II,17≈(in marks of a Mahāpurisa, v. l. ṇṇ); J.IV,165; DhA.I,48. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Janti: {'def': 'at DA.I,296 in jantiyā (for D.I,135 jāniyā)=hāni, abandonment, giving up, payment, fine [prob.=jahanti, to jahāti]. But see jāni. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jantu: {'def': '【阳】人，创造物，生物。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】人，创造物，生物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² a grass Vin.I,196. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ [Vedic jantu, see janati] a creature, living being, man, person S.I,48; A.IV,227; Sn.586, 773 sq., 808, 1103; Nd² 249 (=satta, nara, puggala); Dh.105, 176, 341, 395; J.I,202; II,415; V,495; Pv.II,9⁴⁹ (=sattanikāya, people, a crowd PvA.134). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jantāghara: {'def': '【中】蒸汽浴房，桑拿浴屋。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】蒸汽浴房，桑拿浴屋。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Acc. to Abhp. 214=aggisālā, a room in which a fire is kept (viz. for the purpose of a steam bath, i. e. a hot room, cp. in meaning Mhg. kemenate=Lat. caminata, Ger. stube=E. stove; Low Ger. pesel (room)= Lat. pensile (bath) etc.) Etym. uncertain. Bühler KZ 25, p. 325=yantra-gṛha (oil-mill?); E. Hardy (D. Lit. Qtg. 1902, p. 339)=jentāka (hot dry bath), cp. Vin. Texts I.157; III,103. In all probability it is a distorted form (by dissimilation or analogy), perhaps of *jhānt-āgāra, to jhā to burn=Sk. kṣā, jhānti heat or heating (=Sk. kṣāti)+āgāra, which latter received the aspiration of the first part (=āghāra), both being reduced in length of vowels=jant-āghara]--1. a (hot) room for bathing purposes, a sitzbath Vin.I,47, 139; II,119, 220 sq., 280; III,55; M.III,126; J.II,25, 144; Vism.18; Dpvs VIII,45. -- 2. living room J.I,449. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Janādhipa: {'def': 'janinda, 【阳】（人类的）国王。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'janinda,【阳】(人类的)国王。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jap: {'def': '(p)aka (adj.) whispering, see kaṇṇa.° (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Japa: {'def': '(& jappa vv. ll.) [fr. japati] 1. muttering, mumbling. recitation A.III,56=J.III,205 (+manta); Sn.328 (jappa) (=niratthaka-kathā SnA 334). -- 2. studying J.III,114 (=ajjhena). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】喃喃自语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】喃喃自语。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Japana: {'def': 'jappana, 【中】喃喃自语，耳语。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'jappana,【中】喃喃自语，耳语。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(sic. DA.I,97, otherwise jappana) whispering, mumbling (see japati), in kaṇṇa°. See also pari°. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Japati: {'def': '(jap + a), 发出，喃喃而语，背诵。【过】 japi。【过分】 japita。【独】 japitvā。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(& jappati Dhtp 189, also japp 190=vacane; sound-root jap) to mumble, whisper, utter, recite J.IV,204; Pv.II,6¹ (=vippalapati PvA.94); PvA.97; ppr. jappaṁ S.I,166 (palāpaṁ); J.IV,75. See japa, japana; also pari°. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jap喃喃自语+a), 发出，喃喃而语，背诵。【过】japi。【过分】japita。【独】japitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jappanā: {'def': '=jappā Sn.945; Dhs.1059≈. Cp. pa°. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jappati: {'def': '(Sk.jalpati (=japati))﹐渴望(hunger for)。【过分】jappita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[not, as customary, to jalp, Sk. jalpati (=japati), but in the meaning of desire, etc., for cappati to capp, as in cappeti=Sk, carvayati to chew, suck, be hungry (q. v.) cp. also calaka] to hunger for, to desire, yearn, long for, (c. Acc.) Sn.771 (kāme), 839 (bhavaṁ), 899, 902; Nd² 79 (=pajappati), -- pp. jappita Sn.902. See also jappā, jappanā, etc., also abhijjappati & pa°. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jappā: {'def': 'jappanā,【阴】贪欲(desire, lust, greed, attachment)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'jappanā, 【阴】贪欲，为增益而言。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [to jappati] desire, lust, greed, attachment, hunger (cp. Nd² on taṇhā) S.I,123 (bhava-lobha°); Sn.1033; Nd² 250; Nett 12; Dhs.279, 1059. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Japā: {'def': '【阴】月季，朱槿(China-rose)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】月季，朱槿。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jara: {'def': '【阳】发烧。【形】老的，烂了的，衰老的。jaraggava,【阳】老公牛。jarasakka,【阳】帝释天(三十三天王)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) (°-) [See jarati] old, decayed (in disparaging sense), wretched, miserable; --ûdapānaṁ a spoilt well J.IV,387; --gava=°goṇa Pv.I,81; --goṇa [cp. Sk. jaradgava] a decrepit, old bull J.II,135; --sakka “the old S.” J.IV,389; --sālā a tumble-down shed PvA.78. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】发烧。【形】老的，烂了的，衰老的。 ~ggava, 【阳】老公牛。 ~sakka, 【阳】老释帝（三十三天王）。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jarati: {'def': '[Vedic jarati & jīryati, *gerā to crush, to pound, overcome (cp. jayati); as intrs. to become brittle, to be consumed, to decay, cp. Lat. granum, Goth kaúrn, E. etc. corn] to suffer destruction or decay, to become old, in two roots, viz. 1. jar [jarati] in Caus. jarayati to destroy, to bring to ruin J.V,501=VI,375. -- 2. jīr [Sk. jīryati] see jīyati, jīrati, jīrayati, jīrāpeti. -- pp. jiṇṇa. -- Cp. also jara, jarā, jajjara, jīraṇatā. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaratā: {'def': '【阴】衰退，老年。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】衰退，老年。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [see jarati] old age Dhs.644≈ (rūpassa j. decay of form); Vism.449. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jarā: {'def': '【阴】衰退，老年，老朽。jarājajjara, jarājiṇṇa,【形】由於年老而衰弱的，由於年龄而衰老的。jarādukkha,【中】老苦(老年的痛苦)。jarādhamma,【形】老法(遭受衰老的，遭受衰退的)。jarābhaya,【中】怕老(老年或衰退的恐惧)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) & (older) jaras (nt.) [of the latter only the Instr. jarasā in use: Sn.804, 1123 (=jarāya Nd² 249). -- Sk. jarā & jaraḥ to *gerā: see jarati; cp. Gr. gh_ras, gέras, grau_s old age, etc. See also jīraṇa(tā)] decay, decrepitude, old age Vin.I,10, 34; A.I,51, 138 (as Death’s messenger); V,144 sq. (bhabbo jaraṁ pahātuṁ); Sn.311 (cp. D.III,75); J.I,59; Th.2, 252 sq.; Vism.502 (def. as twofold & discussed in its valuation as dukkha). Defined as “yā tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jarā jīraṇatā khaṇḍiccaṁ pāliccaṁ valittacatā āyuno saṁhāni indriyānaṁ paripāko” D.II,305=M.I,49= S.II,2=Nd² 252=Dhs.644, cp. Dhs. trsl. p. 195. -- Frequently comb^d with maraṇa (maccu, etc.) “decay & death” (see under jāti as to formulas): °maraṇa, D.II,31 sq.; M.I,49; Sn.575; °maccu Sn.581, 1092, 1094. ajarāmara not subject to decay & death (cp. ajajjara) Th.II, 512; Pv.II,6¹¹; Vv 63¹¹; J.III,515.

--ghara the house of age (adj.) like a decayed house Th.2, 270 (=jiṇṇagharasadisa ThA.213). --jajjara feeble with age J.I,59; --jiṇṇa decrepit with age PvA.148; --dhamma subject to growing old A.I,138, 145; II,172, 247; III,54 sq., 71 sq.; --patta old J.III,394; IV,403; --bhaya fear of old age A.I,179; II,121; --vata the wind of age DhA.IV,25. --sutta the Suttanta on old age, N. of Sutta Nipāta IV.6 (p. 157 sq.; beginning with “appaṁ vata jīvitaṁ idaṁ”), quoted at DhA.III,320. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】衰退，老年。 ~jajjara, ~jiṇṇa, 【形】由于年龄而衰弱的，由于年龄而衰老的。 ~dukkha, 【中】老苦（老年的痛苦）。 ~dhamma, 【形】老法（遭受衰老的，遭受衰退的）。 ~bhaya, 【中】怕老（老年或衰退的恐惧）。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jatto: {'def': '【中】肩。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】肩。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jattu: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic jatru] the collar-bone DhA.II,55 (gloss: aṁsakūṭa); Dāvs.IV,49. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jatu: {'def': '【中】紫胶，封闭腊。 ~maṭṭhaka, 【中】被附上的紫胶的物件。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. jatu; cp. Lat. bitumen pitch; Ags. cwidu. resin, Ohg. quiti glue] lac. As medicine Vin.I,201. °maṭṭhaka a decking with lac. used by women to prevent conception Vin.IV,261; consisting of either jatu, kaṭṭha (wood), piṭṭha (flour), or mattikā (clay). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】紫胶，封闭腊。jatumaṭṭhaka,【中】树胶性具，树胶生支。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jatukā: {'def': '【阴】蝙蝠。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】蝙蝠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Java: {'def': '[Sk. java, to javati] 1. (n.) speed S.II,266; V,227; M.I,446; A.II,113; III,248; Sn.221; J.II,290; IV,2. Often comb^d with thāma, in phrase thāmajavasampanna endowed with strength & swiftness J.I,62; VvA.104; PvA.4; Miln.4. -- javena (Instr.) speedily J.II,377. -- 2. (adj.) swift, quick J.III,25; VI,244 (mano°, as quick as thought); Vv 16 (=vegavanto VvA.78); VvA.6 (sīgha°).

--cchinna without alacrity, slow, stupid (opp. sīghajava) DhA.I,262; --sampanna full of swiftness, nimbleness, or alacrity A.I,244 sq.; II,250 sq. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】速度，力量。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】速度，力量。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Javana: {'def': '(nt.) 1. alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock Ps.I,80 sq.; Vism.22; DhsA.265 (cp. Dhs.trsl. pp. 132, 156); DA.I,194. Usually in cpd. javana-pañña (adj.) of alert intellection, of swift understanding, together with hāsa-pañña (hāsu° at M.III,25; J.IV,136) & puthu° tikkha° S.V,376, 377; Nd² 235, 3^a. Also in cpds. °paññā Ps.II,185 sq.; °paññatā A.I,45; °paññattaṁ S.V,413. ‹-› 2. The twelfth stage in the function (kicca) of an act of perception (or vīthicitta): the stage of full perception, or apperception. Vism.ch. xiv. (e. g. p. 459); Abhdhs. pt. iii, § 6 (kiccaṁ); Comp. pp. 29, 115, 245. In this connection javana is taken in its equally fundamental sense of “going” (not “swiftness”), and the “going” is understood as intellectual movement. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.冲动，敏捷，机敏，奔跑(alacrity, readiness; impulse, shock)。2.速行心(=vīthicitta, “going” (not “swiftness”), and the “going” is understood as intellectual movement.)。【形】迅速的。javanapañña,【形】有机敏的智慧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】冲动，敏捷，机敏，奔跑。【形】迅速的。 ~pañña, 【形】有机敏的智慧。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Javanaka: {'def': '=java 2 (adj.) VvA.78. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Javanikā: {'def': '【阴】荧屏，帐。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】纱网(screen)，帐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Javati: {'def': '(ju去、走+a), 跑，赶紧，催促。【过】javi。【过分】javita。【现分】javamāna。【独】javitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ju + a), 跑，赶紧，催促。【过】 javi。【过分】 javita。【现分】 javamāna。【独】 javitvā。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Vedic ju javate intr. to hurry, junāti trs. to incite, urge: to run, hurry, hasten S.I,33; J.IV,213; Dāvs.V,24; DhsA.265, pp. jūta. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaya: {'def': '【阳】胜利，战胜。 ~ggaha, ~gāha, 【阳】战胜，幸运的投，幸运的签。 ~pāna,【中】胜利的饮料。 ~sumana, 【中】朱槿（见 Bandhujīvaka）。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[see jayati] vanquishing, overcoming, victory D.I,10; Sn.681; J.II,406; opp. parājaya Vism.401.

--ggaha the lucky die J.IV,322 (=kaṭaggaha, q. v.); --parājaya victory & defeat Dh.201; --pāna the drink of victory, carousing, wassail; °ṁ pivati DhA.I,193; --sumana “victory’s joy,” N. of a plant (cp. jātisumana) Vism.174; DhA.I,17, 383. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】胜利，战胜。jayaggaha, jayagāha,【阳】战胜，幸运的投，幸运的签。jayapāna,【中】胜利的饮料。jayasumana,【中】朱槿(见 Bandhujīvaka)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jayampati: {'def': '【阳】夫妻，丈夫和妻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】夫妻，丈夫和妻子。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jayati: {'def': '(ji + a), 征服，超越，击败。【过】 jayi。【过分】 jita。【现分】 jayanta。【独】 jayitvā。(p134)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(ji+a)﹐jeti, jināti﹐(Sk.jayati), 征服，超越，击败。【过】jayi﹐jini, ajini, ajesi。【过.复】jiniṁsu。【过分】jita。【现分】jayanta﹐jayaṁ。【独】jetvā, jayitvā。Pot.Jeyya, jine。3rd pl.jineyyuṁ。Fut.jessati，jayissati，jinissati。Ger. Sn 439; jetvāna It 76.-- Inf.jinituṁ。Grd.jeyya , ajeyya; jinitabba。Pass.jīyati (see parā°), jīyati is also Pass.to jarati -- Caus.1.jayāpeti to wish victory to, to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king)。2.jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite, to plunder。Des. jigiṁsati。pp. jina & jita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jeti, jināti) [Sk. jayati, ji to have power, to conquer, cp. jaya=bi/a; trans. of which the intrans. is jināti to lose power, to become old (see jīrati)] to conquer, surpass; to pillage, rob, to overpower, to defeat. -- Pres. [jayati] jeti J.II,3; jināti Sn.439; Dh.354; J.I,289; IV,71. -- Pot. jeyya Com. on Dh.103; jine Dh.103=J.II,4=VvA.69; 3rd pl. jineyyuṁ S.I,221 (opp. parājeyyuṁ). -- Ppr. jayaṁ Dh.201. -- Fut. jessati Vv 33²; jayissati ib.; jinissati J.II,183. -- Aor. jini J.I,313; II,404; ajini Dh.3; pl. jiniṁsu S.I,221 (opp. parājiṁsu), 224 (opp. parājiṁsu, with v. l. °jiniṁsu); A.IV,432 (opp. °jiyiṁsu, with v. l. °jiniṁsu). Also aor. ajesi DhA.I,44 (=ajini). -- Proh. (mā) jīyi J.IV,107. -- Ger. jetvā Sn.439; jetvāna It.76. -- Inf. jinituṁ J.VI,193; VvA.69. -- Grd. jeyya Sn.288 (a°); jinitabba VvA.69 (v. l. jetabba). -- Pass. jīyati (see parā°), jīyati is also Pass. to jarati -- Caus. 1. jayāpeti to wish victory to, to hail (as a respectful greeting to a king) J.II,213, 369, 375; IV,403. -- 2. jāpayati to cause to rob, to incite, to plunder M.I,231; It.22=J.IV,71 (v. l. hāpayati)= Miln.402; J.VI,108 (to annul); Miln.227. -- Des. jigiṁsati (q. v.). -- pp. jina & jita (q. v.). (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jayā: {'def': 'f. [Vedic jāyā] wife only in cpd. jayampatikā, the lady of the house and her husband, the two heads of the household. That the wife should be put first might seem suggestive of the matriarchate, but the expression means just simply “the pair of them,” and the context has never anything to do with the matriarchate. ‹-› husband & wife, a married couple S.II,98; J.I,347; IV,70, of birds. See also jāyampatikā. (Page 279)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jañña: {'def': '【形】纯粹的，贵族的，迷人的，好出生。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】纯粹的，贵族的，迷人的，好出生。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [=janya, cp. jātya; see kula & koleyyaka] of (good) birth, excellent, noble, charming, beautiful M.I,30 (jaññajañña, cp. p. 528); J.II,417 (=manāpa sādhu). a° J.II,436. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaññā: {'def': '愿他知(3.sg.opt.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaḷa: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. jaḍa] dull, slow, stupid D.III,265 (a°); A.II,252; Pug.13; Miln.251; DA.I,290. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】慢，愚蠢的。【阳】愚人，蠢者。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. jaḍa),【形】慢，愚蠢的(dull, slow, stupid)。【阳】愚蠢者，痴呆 (chi gai5)。jaccajaḷa, 天生愚蠢。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaṅgala: {'def': '【中】丛林，沙漠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】丛林，沙漠。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) a rough, sandy & waterless place, jungle A.V,21; J.IV,71; VvA.338. Cp. ujjaṅgala. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaṅgama: {'def': '【形】活动的。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】活动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaṅghamagga: {'def': '【阳】小路，步行道。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】小路，步行道。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jaṅghapesanika: {'def': '【中】步行运送资讯。【阳】携带资讯的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】步行运送信息。【阳】携带信息的人。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jaṅgheyya: {'def': '【中】（袈裟的）护膝部分。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(袈裟的)护膝部分。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaṅgheyyaka: {'def': '(nt.) [see jaṅghā] lit. “belonging to the knees”; the kneepiece of a robe Vin.I,287. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaṅghā: {'def': '(f.) [Vedic jaṅghā; cp. Av. zanga, ankle; Goth. gaggan, to go; Ags. gang, walk. From *gheṅgh to walk; see also jaghana] the leg, usually the lower leg (from knee to ankle) D.II,17≈(S.I,16=Sn.165 (eṇi°); Sn.610; J.II,240; V,42; VI,34; ThA.212). In cpds. jaṅgha° (except in jaṅghā-vihāra).

--ummagga a tunnel fit for walking J.VI,428; --pesanika adj. going messages on foot Vin.III,185; J.II,82; Miln.370 (°iya); Vism.17. --bala(ṁ) (nissāya) by means of his leg (lit. by the strength of, cp. Fr. à force de); --magga a footpath J.II,251; V,203; VvA.194. --vihāra the state of walking about (like a wanderer), usually in phrase °ṁ anucaṅkamati anuvicarati D.I,235; M.I,108; Sn.p. 105, p. 115; or °ṁ carati PvA.73. -- A.I,136; J.II,272; IV,7, 74; DhA.III,141. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐jaṅgha-﹐【阴】小腿，胫，腿肚子。jaṅghaṭṭhika, ,【中】胫骨。jaṅghābala,【中】腿力。jaṅghāvihāra,【阳】步行。jaṅghavihāratthāya ‹ jaṅghā-vihāra-attha，jaṅghā-vihāra「步行之状态」；-atthāya (Dat.) 或atthaṁ (Acc.) 表达「目的」，「为了(散步而来)」。又，āgato’mhi = āgato amhi; āgata, pp. ‹ ā-gam, āgacchati; amhi, pres.1sg. ‹ as, atthi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】小腿，腿肚子。 ~bala, 【中】腿力。 ~vihāra, 【阳】步行（像云游者）。(p132)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jaṇṇu: {'def': '【中】jaṇṇukā,【阴】膝。jaṇṇumatta,【形】深及膝的，没膝程度的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ka) [cp. jānu & jannu] the knee D.II,160; J.VI,332; SnA.II,230; DhA.I,80 (°ka); II,57 (id.), 80; IV,204; VvA.206 (jaṇṇu-kappara). (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 ~kā, 【阴】膝。 ~matta, 【形】深及膝的，没膝程度的。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jaṭa: {'def': 'a handle, only in vāsi° (h. of an adze) Vin.IV,168; S.III,154=A.IV,127. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】（刀等的）柄。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】(刀等的)柄。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaṭhara: {'def': '【阳、中】腹，胃。 ~aggi, 【阳】妊娠。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】腹，胃。jaṭharaggi,【阳】妊娠。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [Vedic jaṭhara, to *gelt=*gelbh (see gabbha), cp. Goth. kilpei uterus, Ags. cild=E. child] the belly Miln.175. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaṭila: {'def': '[BSk. jaṭila] one who wears a jaṭā, i. e. a braid of hair, or who has his hair matted, an ascetic. Enum^d amongst other “religious” as ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā j. paribbājakā Nd² 308; ājīvikā nig° j. tāpasā Nd² 149, 513; -- Vin.I,24=IV.108; I,38 (purāṇa° who had previously been j.)=VvA.13=PvA.22; S.I,78; Sn.p. 103, 104 (Keṇiya j.); J.I,15; II,382; Ud.6; Dpvs.I,38. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaṭilaka: {'def': '=jaṭila M.I,282; A.III,276; Miln.202; Vism.382. (Page 278)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaṭin: {'def': 'one who wears a jaṭā, an ascetic Sn.689; f. --inī J.VI,555. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jaṭita: {'def': '[pp. of jaṭ, to which also jaṭā; Dhtp 95: saṅghāte] entangled S.I,13; Miln.102, 390; Vism.1 (etym.). (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【过分】已纠缠，已打褶。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【过分】已纠缠，已打褶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaṭiya: {'def': 'jaṭila, 【阳】缠结头发的苦行。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'jaṭila,【阳】缠结头发的苦行。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jaṭā: {'def': '【阴】缠结，打褶，缠结的头发。 ~dhara, 【阳】缠结头发的苦行者。(p133)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [B.Sk. jatā] tangle, braid, plaiting, esp. (a) the matted hair as worn by ascetics (see jatila) Sn.249; Dh.241, 393; J.I,12 (ajina+); II,272. -- (b) the tangled branches of trees J.I,64. -- (c) (fig.) (the tangle of) desire, lust S.I,13=165.

--aṇḍuva (=°andu?) a chain of braided hair, a matted topknot S.I,117; --âjina braided hair & an antelope’s hide (worn by ascetics) Sn.1010 (°dhara), cp. above J.I,12; --dharaṇa the wearing of matted hair M.I,282. (Page 277)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】缠结，打褶，缠结的头发。jaṭādhara,【阳】缠结头发的苦行者。Vism.4.︰Maggakkhaṇe panesa taṁ jaṭaṁ vijaṭeti nāma. Phalakkhaṇe vijaṭitajaṭo sadevakassa lokassa aggadakkhiṇeyyo hoti.(他在修(四沙门)道的刹那叫做解结；在证(四沙门)果的刹那，他便是天界和人界最上应供的解结者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Je: {'def': '【代】叫唤女奴隶或阶级低贱的女人的称呼（＝婢女）。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【代】叫唤声(oh! ah! now then! Vin.I,232, 292.)，叫唤女奴隶或卑贱女人的称呼。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(part.) exclamation: oh! ah! now then! Vin.I,232, 292 (gaccha je); M.I,126; VvA.187, 207; DhA.IV,105. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jeguccha: {'def': '【形】卑鄙的，讨厌的。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】卑鄙的，讨厌的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) & jegucchiya (J.II,437) [sec. der. fr. jigucchā] contemptible, loathsome, detestable J.IV,305; Vism.250; Th.1, 1056; PvA.78, 192 (asuci+). Cp. pari°. -- a° not despised Sn.852; Th.1, 961. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jegucchin: {'def': '(adj.) one who detests or avoids (usually --°) M.I,77; (parama°), 78 A.IV,174, 182 sq., 188 sq., Miln.352 (pāpa°). (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jegucchitā: {'def': '(f.) [see jigucchita] avoidance, detestation, disgust Vin.I,234; M.I,30; A.IV,182 sq. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jegucchī: {'def': '【阳】厌恶的人，避免的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】厌恶的人，避免的人。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jetavana: {'def': 'n. [Jeta-vana] 祇陀(太子)の林, 祇陀林, 祇園.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'n. [Jeta-vana] 祇陀(太子)的林, 祇陀林, 祇園.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Jeti: {'def': '(ji + e) 征服，使服从。【过】 jesi。【现分】 jenta。【独】 jetvā。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'see jayati. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ji +e) 征服，使服从。【过】jesi。【现分】jenta。【独】jetvā﹐jetvāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jevanīya: {'def': '(nt.) a kind of (missile) weapon A.IV,107=110 (comb^d with āvudha & salāka; vv. ll. vedhanika, jeganika, jevanika). (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jeyya: {'def': 'jetabba, 【潜】可以被征服的。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'jetabba,【义】可以被征服的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jeṭṭha: {'def': '【形】年长的，至高的，最初的。 ~tara,【形】较老的，较高的。 ~bhaginī,【阴】姐，姊。 ~bhātu, ~bhātika, 【阳】哥，兄。 ~māsa, 【阳】逝毖吒月（月份名，大约五月至六月之间）。 ~ṭhāpacāyana, 【中】尊敬长辈（对年长者尊敬）。 ~ṭhāpacāyī, 【阳】顶礼长辈。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'Jeṭṭhaka【形】年长的，至高的，最初的。jeṭṭhatara,【形】较老的，较高的。jeṭṭhabhaginī,【阴】姐，姊。jeṭṭhabhātu, jeṭṭhabhātika,【阳】哥，兄。jeṭṭhamāsa,【阳】逝毖吒月(月份名，大约五月至六月之间，农历4月16至5月15)。jeṭṭhāpacāyana,【中】尊敬长辈(对年长者尊敬)。jeṭṭhāpacāyī,【阳】礼敬长辈。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [compar.-superl. formation of jyā power. Gr. bi/a, from ji in jināti & jayati “stronger than others,” used as superl. (& compar.) to vuḍḍha old-elder, eldest. The compar. *jeyya is a grammarian’s construction, see remarks on kaniṭṭha] better (than others), best, first, supreme; first-born; elder brother or sister, elder, eldest D.II,15 (aggo jeṭṭho seṭṭho=the first, foremost & best of all); A.I,108; II,87; III,152; IV,175; J.I,138 (°putta); II,101 (°bhātā), 128 (°yakkhinī); IV,137.

--apacāyin, in phrase kule-j.-apacāyin paying due respect to the clan-elders D.III,72, 74; S.V,468; Vism.415; DhA.I,265. Same for °apacāyikā (f.) honour to . . . Nd² 294, & °apacāyitar D.III,70, 71, 145, 169. --māsa N. of a month SnA 359. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jeṭṭhaka: {'def': '=jeṭṭha J.I,253; II,101 (°tāpasa); III,281 (°kam māra: head of the silversmith’s guild); IV,137, 161; V,282; Pv.I,11³ (putta=pubbaja PvA.57); DhA.III,237 (°sīla); IV,111 (id.); PvA.36 (°bhariyā), 42 (°pesakāra head of the weaver’s guild), 47 (°vāṇija), 75. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jeṭṭhā: {'def': '【阴】心宿（二十七星宿之一）。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】心宿(二十七星宿之一)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jh: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第九个辅音字母。发音是送气带音的 j，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第九个辅音字母。发音是送气带音的 j，汉语没有这个辅音，请参考英语或马来语的发音。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jhasa: {'def': '【阳】鱼。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(?) a window or opening in general J.II,334. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】鱼(?)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jhatta: {'def': '[pp. of jhāpeti; cp. ñatta›*jñāpayati] set on fire, consumed, dried up (w. hunger or thirst: parched) comb^d w. chāta J.II,83; VI,347. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhatvā: {'def': 'see jhāpeti. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(= jhāpetvā),【独】燃烧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(= jhāpetvā), 【独】燃烧。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jhitvā: {'def': 'is reading at Nett 145 for jhatvā (see jhāpeti). (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāma: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [jhāyati²] burning, on fire, conflagration, in °khetta charcoal-burner’s field J.I,238; II,92; °aṅgāra a burning cinder PvA.90. By itself: J.I,405; DhA.II,67. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'jhāmaka, 【形】燃烧的。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'jhāmaka,【形】燃烧的(burning, on fire, conflagration)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jhāmaka: {'def': 'N. of a plant J.VI,537; also in °bhatta (?) J.II,288. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāna: {'def': '¹ (nt.) [from jhāyati,¹ BSk. dhyāna. The (popular etym-) explⁿ of jhāna is given by Bdhgh at Vism.150 as follows: “ārammaṇ’ûpanijjhānato paccanīka-jhāpanato vā jhānaṁ,” i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse] literally meditation. But it never means vaguely meditation. It is the technical term for a special religious experience, reached in a certain order of mental states. It was originally divided into four such states. These may be summarized: 1. The mystic, with his mind free from sensuous and worldly ideas, concentrates his thoughts on some special subject (for instance, the impermanence of all things). This he thinks out by attention to the facts, and by reasoning. 2. Then uplifted above attention & reasoning, he experiences joy & ease both of body and mind. 3. Then the bliss passes away, & he becomes suffused with a sense of ease, and 4. he becomes aware of pure lucidity of mind & equanimity of heart. The whole really forms one series of mental states, & the stages might have been fixed at other points in the series. So the Dhamma-saṁgani makes a second list of five stages, by calling, in the second jhāna, the fading away of observation one stage, & the giving up of sustained thinking another stage (Dhs.167--175). And the Vibhaṁga calls the first jhāna the pañcaṁgika-jhāna because it, by itself, can be divided into five parts (Vbh.267). The state of mind left after the experience of the four jhānas is described as follows at D.I,76: “with his heart thus serene, made pure, translucent, cultured, void of evil, supple, ready to act, firm and imperturbable.” It will be seen that there is no suggestion of trance, but rather of an enhanced vitality. In the descriptions of the crises in the religious experiences of Christian saints and mystics, expressions similar to those used in the jhānas are frequent (see F. Heiler Die Buddhistische Versenkung, 1918). Laymen could pass through the four jhānas (S.IV,301). The jhānas are only a means, not the end. To imagine that experiencing them was equivalent to Arahantship (and was therefore the end aimed at) is condemned (D.I,37 ff.) as a deadly heresy. In late Pali we find the phrase arūpajjhānā. This is merely a new name for the last four of the eight Vimokkhā, which culminate in trance. It was because they made this the aim of their teaching that Gotama rejected the doctrines of his two teachers. Āḷāra-Kāḷāma & Uddaka-Rāmaputta (M.I,164 f.). -- The jhānas are discussed in extenso & in various combinations as regards theory & practice at: D.I,34 sq.; 73 sq.; S.II, 210 sq.; IV,217 sq., 263 sq.; V,213 sq.; M.I,276 sq., 350 sq., 454 sq.; A.I,53, 163; II,126; III,394 sq.; IV,409 sq.; V,157 sq.; Vin.III,4; Nd² on Sn.1119 & s.v.; Ps.I,97 sq.; II,169 sq.; Vbh.257 sq.; 263 sq.; 279 sq.; Vism.88, 415.-They are frequently mentioned either as a set, or singly, when often the set is implied (as in the case of the 4th jh.). Mentioned as jh. 1--4 e. g. at Vin.I,104; II,161 (foll. by sotāpanna, etc.); D.II,156, 186; III,78, 131, 222; S.II,278 (nikāmalābhin); A.II,36 (id.); III,354; S.IV,299; V,307 sq.; M.I,21, 41, 159, 203, 247, 398, 521; II,15, 37; Sn.69, 156, 985; Dh.372; J.I,139; VvA.38; PvA.163. -- Separately: the 1st: A.IV,422; V,135; M.I,246, 294; Miln.289; 1st-3rd: A.III,323; M.I,181; 1st & 2nd: M.II,28; 4th: A.II,41; III,325; V,31; D.III,270; VvA.4. -- See also Mrs. Rh. D. Buddh. Psych. (Quest Series) p. 107 sq.; Dhs. trsl. p. 52 sq.; Index to Saṁyutta N. for more refs.; also Kasiṇa.

--anuyutta applying oneself to meditation Sn.972; --aṅga a constituent of meditation (with ref. to the 4 jhānas) Vism.190. --kīḷā sporting in the exercise of meditation J.III,45. --pasuta id. (+dhīra) Sn.709; Dh.181 (cp. DhA.III,226); --rata fond of meditation S.I,53, 122; IV,117; It.40; Sn.212, 503, 1009; Vv 50¹⁵; VvA.38; --vimokkha emancipation reached through jhāna A.III,417; V,34; --sahagata accompanied by jh. (of paññābala) A.I,42. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '² (nt.) [from jhāyati²] conflagration, fire D.III,94; J.I,347. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1(from jhāyati,1 BSk. dhyāna),【中】禅，禅定，禅那，心意的集中，(於宗教课题上)冥想，思惟修(思惟所对之境，而研习之义)，静虑(心体寂静)(Vism.150 as follows: “ārammaṇ’ûpanijjhānato paccanīka-jhāpanato vā jhānaṁ,” i.e. called jh. from meditation on objects & from burning up anything adverse)。jhānaṅga,【中】禅支(寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境)。jhānarata,【形】喜欢禅定的。jhānavimokkha,【阳】禅解脱(经过禅定得释放)。《广释》(Vibhv.PTS:p.170；CS:p.221~2)︰ārammaṇaṁ upagantvā cintanasaṅkhātena upanijjhāyanaṭṭhena yathārahaṁ paccanīkadhammajhāpanaṭṭhena ca jhānāni ca tāni aṅgāni ca samuditānaṁ avayavabhāvena aṅgīyanti ñāyantīti jhānaṅgāni.(所谓的靠近所缘而考虑、思想之意。根据情况，又有燃烧(五)盖之意，及已升起诸禅支之意，以要素成份之意，被称为‘诸禅支’。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(Skt. dhyāna)禅那(resulting in rūpa jhāna色界禅)(resulting in arūpa jhāna无色界禅)vitakka(寻), vicāra (伺), pīti (喜), sukha(乐), ekaggatarammana (一心)', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '2 (from jhāyati2),【中】大火，火(conflagration, fire)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】禅，禅定，禅那，心意的集中，（于宗教课题上）冥想。 ~aṅga,【中】禅支（寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境）。 ~rata, 【形】喜欢禅定的。 ~vimokkha, 【阳】禅解脱（经过禅定得释放）。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jhānika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. jhāna¹] belonging to the (4) meditations Vism.111. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(fr. jhāna1),【形】1.入定者(已经达到禅定的人)。2.禅定的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 入定者（已经达到禅定的人）。 2. 属于禅定的。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jhāpaka: {'def': '(adj.) one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an incendiary J.III,71. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】纵火的，煽动的。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】【阳】纵火的，煽动的(one who sets fire to (cp. jhāpeti), an incendiary J.III,71.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jhāpana: {'def': '(nt.) setting fire to, consumption by fire, in sarīra°-kicca cremation VvA.76. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】纵火(setting fire to, consumption by fire)。sarīrajhāpana-kicca, 火葬场(cremation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】纵火。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jhāpeti: {'def': '[Caus. of jhāyati²] 1. to set fire to, to burn, to cook Vin.IV,265; J.I,255, 294; DhA.II,66; PvA.62. -- 2. to destroy, to bring to ruin, to kill (see Kern, Toev., p. 37 sq.) J.III,441 (=ḍahati pīḷeti); VvA.38 (=jhāyati¹, connected w. jhāna: to destroy by means of jhāna); inf. jhāpetuṁ J.VI,300 (+ghātetuṁ hantuṁ); ger. jhatvā ref. S.I,161 (reads chetvā)=Nett 145 (reads jhitvā, with v. l. chetvā). S.I,19 (reads chetvā, vv. ll. ghatvā & jhatvā)=J.IV,67 (T. jhatvā, v. l. chetvā; expl^d by kilametvā); S.I,41 (v. l. for T. chetvā, Bdhgh says “jhatvā ti vadhitvā”); J.II,262 (+hantvā vadhitvā; expl^d by kilametvā); VI,299 (+vadhitvā); also jhatvāna J.IV,57 (=hantvā). -- pp. jhatta & jhāpita. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jhāyati 的【使】), 燃烧，纵火烧。【过】 jhāpesi。【现分】 jhāpenta。【独】 jhāpetvā, jhāpiya。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jhāyati‘燃烧’的【使】), 燃烧，纵火烧，火葬(荼ㄔㄚˊ毘；闍毘；闍维)。【过】jhāpesi。【现分】jhāpenta。【独】jhāpetvā, jhāpiya。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jhāpita: {'def': '(Jhāpeti‘燃烧’的【过分】) 燃烧，火葬(set on fire Miln.47.)。jhāpitakāla, 火葬之时(time of cremation)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[pp. jhāpeti] set on fire Miln.47; Vism.76 (°kāla time of cremation). (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāpīyati: {'def': '(jhāpeti 的【被】), 被燃烧。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jhāpeti ‘燃烧’的【被】), 被燃烧。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jhāyaka: {'def': '【阳】修禅者，打坐者。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】修禅者，打坐者(meditator)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) meditator(one who makes a fire) D.III,94. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāyana: {'def': '² (nt.) [fr. jhāyati²] cremation, burning Pug.A 187. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '2 (fr. jhāyati2), 火葬，燃烧(cremation, burning)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1 (der. fr. jhāyati1) ,【中】禅修(meditating)。jhāyanasīla, 修禅(the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) VvA.38.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】 1. 燃烧。 2. 禅修。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [der. fr. jhāyati¹] meditating, in °sīla the practice of meditation (cp. Sk. dhyānayoga) VvA.38. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāyati: {'def': '(jhe + a), 修禅，冥想。【过】 jhāyi。【现分】 jhāyanta。【独】 jhāyitvā。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2 (Sk. ksāyati to burn, ksāy & ksī, cp. khara & chārikā), 燃烧(to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up)。【过】jhāyi。【使】jhāpeti。cp. khīyati2。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jha + ya), 燃烧，着火。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '1(Sk. dhyāyati, dhī), 禅修(to meditate, contemplate, think upon, brood over)。aor. jhāyiṁsu thought of)。【过分】jhāyita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jhā沉思+a), 修禅，冥想。【过】jhāyi。【现分】jhāyanta。【独】jhāyitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Sk. kṣāyati to burn, kṣāy & kṣī, cp. khara & chārikā] to burn, to be on fire: fig. to be consumed, to waste away, to dry up D.I,50 (=jāleti DA.I,151); III,94 (to make a fire); J.I,61, 62; Pv.I,11¹⁰ (jhāyare v. l. BB. for ghāyire); Miln.47; PvA.33 (=pariḍayhati); -- aor. jhāyi DhA.II,240 sq. -- (fig.) Dh.155; J.VI,189. -- Caus. jhāpeti. -- Cp. khīyati². (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jhā燃烧+ya), 燃烧，著火。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [Sk. dhyāyati, dhī; with dhīra, dhīḥ from didheti shine, perceive; cp. Goth. filu-deisei cunning, & in meaning cinteti›citta¹] to meditate, contemplate, think upon, brood over (c. Acc.): search for, hunt after D.II,237 (jhānaṁ); S.I,25, 57; A.V,323 sq. (+pa,° ni,° ava°); Sn.165, 221, 425, 709, 818 (=Nd¹ 149 pa°, ni°, ava°); Dh.27, 371, 395; J.I,67, 410; Vv 50¹²; Pv IV.16⁶; Miln.66; SnA 320 (aor. jhāyiṁsu thought of). -- pp. jhāyita. (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāyin: {'def': '【阳】修禅者，打坐者(meditative, self-concentrated, engaged in jhāna-practice)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [see jhāyati¹ & jhāna] pondering over (c. Acc.) intent on: meditative, self-concentrated, engaged in jhāna-practice Vin.II,75; S.I,46=52; II,284; M.I,334; A.I,24; III,355; IV,426; V,156, 325 sq.; Sn.85 (magga°), 638, 719, 1009, 1105; It.71, 74, 112; J.IV,7; Dh.23, 110, 387 (reminding of jhāyati², cp. DhA.IV,144); Nd² 264; Vv 5⁸; Pv IV.1³²; Vbh.342. Nd¹ 226= Nd² 342²=Vism.26 (āpādaka°). (Page 287)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jhāyī: {'def': '【阳】修禅者，打坐者。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jigacchā: {'def': '(f.) see jighacchā. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jighacchati: {'def': '(ghas吃+cha, gh 重叠，而前 gh 改成 ji。词根的 s 变成 c), 很饥饿，想吃。【过】jighacchi。【过分】jighacchita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ghas + cha, gh 重叠，而前 gh 改成 ji。词根的 s 变成 c), 很饥饿，想吃。【过】 ~chi。【过分】 ~chita。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Desid. to ghasati, eat] to have a desire to eat, to be hungry D.II,266; pp. jighacchita DhA.II,145. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jighacchā: {'def': '【阴】饿。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [from jighacchati] appetite, hunger, often comb^d with pipāsā, desire to drink, thirst, e. g. S.I,18; A.II,143, 153; Miln.304. -- M.I,13, 114; 364; III,97, 136; A.III,163; Dh.203 (j. paramā rogā); J.II,445; III,19; (°abhibhūta=chāta); Miln.204, 304; Sdhp.118, 388. Cp. khudā & chāta. Note. A diff. spelling as dighacchā occurs at A.II,117. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】饿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jigiŋsaka: {'def': '【形】想。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jigiŋsanā: {'def': 'jigiŋsā, 【阴】妄羡的，渴望。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jigiŋsati: {'def': '(har + sa, har 变成 giŋ，再重叠，而前 giŋ 变成 ji), 期望。【过】~ŋsi。【过分】 ~sita。【现分】 jigiŋsamāna。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jigiṁsaka: {'def': '【形】想。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [see next] one who wishes to gain, desirous of, pursuing Sn.690. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jigiṁsanatā: {'def': '(f.) [n. abstr. fr. jigiṁsati] desire for, covetousness Vbh.353 (v. l. BB. nijigīsanatā); cp. Vism. 29 (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jigiṁsanā: {'def': 'jigiṁsā,【阴】妄羡的，渴望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jigiṁsati: {'def': '[Desid. of ji, jayati. On etym. see also Kern, Toev. p. 44] to desire, to wish to acquire, to covet; Sn.700; J.II,285; III,172 (v. l. BB. jigissaṁ); IV,406 (v. l. SS. jihiṁ°, BB. jigī°); V,372; VI,268. As jigīsati Th.1, 1110. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(har+sa, har 变成 giṁ，再重叠，而前 giṁ 变成 ji), 期望。【过】jigiṁsi。【过分】jigiṁsita。【现分】jigiṁsamāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jigucchaka: {'def': '【形】不同意的人，不喜欢的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】不同意的人，不喜欢的人。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) one who dislikes or disapproves of M.I,327 (paṭhavī°, āpa° etc.) Miln.343. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jigucchana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】 ~chā, 【阴】厌恶，嫌恶，憎恶。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】jiguchanā,【阴】jigucchā,【阴】厌恶，嫌恶，憎恶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) dislike, contempt, disgust Vism.159; PvA.120. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jigucchati: {'def': '(gup + cha, gu 重叠，而前 gu 变成 ji), 避开，厌恶，被厌烦。【过】~chi。【过分】 ~chita。【现分】 ~chanta, ~chamāna。【独】 ~chitvā,~chiya。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Desid. of gup] to shun, avoid, loathe, detest, to be disgusted with or horrified at (c. Instr.) D.I,213 (iddhi-pāṭihāriyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi j.): A.IV,174 (kāyaduccaritena); Sn.215 (kammehi pāpakehi; SnA 266=hiriyati); J.II,287; Pug. 36. -- ppr. jigucchamāna It.43; grd. jigucchitabba A.I,126; pp. jigucchita Sn.901. -- See also jeguccha, jegucchin. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(gup+cha, gu 重叠，而前 gu 变成 ji), 避开，厌恶，被厌烦。【过】jigucchi。【过分】jigucchita。【现分】jigucchanta, jigucchamāna。【独】jigucchitvā, jigucchiya。A.4, P.376～7：seyyathā pi bhante itthi vā puriso vā daharo vā yuvā vā mandanakajātiko sīsaṁ nahāto ahikuṇapena vā kukkurakuṇapena vā manussakunapena va kaṇṭhe āsattena aṭṭiyeyya jiguccheyya：evam eva kho ahaṁ bhante iminā pūtikāyena aṭṭiyāmi harāyāmi jigucchāmi.(大德！犹如年轻女子、男子，喜爱装饰，沐浴头身，然而颈项间悬挂死蛇、死狗、人死屍，因此可能觉得羞、惭、愧、耻。大德！我亦为此臭腐之身而羞、惭、愧、耻。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jigucchā: {'def': '(f.) disgust for, detestation, avoidance, shunning: tapo° (detesting asceticism) D.I,174; S.I,67; A.II,200; jigucchabībhaccha-dassana detestable & fearful-looking PvA.56. Note. A diff. spelling, digucchā, occurs at DhsA.210. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jimha: {'def': '(Vedic jihma),【形】弯曲的，倾斜的，不诚实的。jimhatā,【阴】弯曲，不诚实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [Vedic jihma] crooked, oblique, slant, fig. dishonest, false (cp. vaṅka, opp. uju | M.I,31 (+vaṅka); A.V,289, 290; J.I,290 (spelled jima); III,111=V.222; VI,66; Vism.219 (ajimha=uju); PvA.51 (citta° vaṅka . . .; opp. uju). Cp. kuṭila. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】弯曲的，倾斜的，不诚实的。 ~tā, 【阴】弯曲，不诚实。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jimhatā: {'def': '(f.) [n. abstr. to jimha] crookedness, deceit (opp. ujutā) Dhs.50, 51 (+vaṅkatā); Vbh.359. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jimheyya: {'def': '(nt.) [from jimha] crookedness, deceit, fraud M.I,340 (sāṭheyyāni kūṭeyyāni vaṅkeyyāni j.°); A.IV,189 (id.) V.167. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jina: {'def': '[pp. med. of jayati] conquering, victorious, often of the Buddha, “Victor”: jitā me pāpakā dhammā tasmâhaṁ Upaka jino ti Vin.I,8=M.I,171; Vin.V,217; Sn.379, 697, 989, 996. magga° conqueror of the Path Sn.84 sq.; saṁsuddha° (id.) Sn.372. Cp khetta°. In other connections: Pv IV.3³³; Th.2, 419 (jin’amhase rūpinaṁ Lacchiṁ expl^d at ThA.268 as jinā amhase jinā vat’amha rūpavatiṁ Siriṁ).

--cakka the Buddha’s reign, rule, authority J.IV,100; --putta disciple of the B. Miln.177; --bhūmi the ground or footing of a conqueror PvA.254; --sāsana the doctrine of the B. Dpvs.IV,3, 10. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(pp. med. of jayati),【阳】征服者(conquering)，胜利者(victorious)，佛陀(often of the Buddha)。jinacakka,【中】胜轮(佛陀的教义)。jinaputta,【阳】胜子(disciple of the Buddha佛陀的弟子)。jinabhūmi,【阴】胜地(the ground or footing of a conqueror)。jinasāsana,【中】胜教(the doctrine of the Buddha佛教)。maggajina,道的胜利者(conqueror of the Path)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】征服者，胜利者，佛陀。 ~cakka, 【中】胜轮（佛陀的教义）。~putta, 【阳】胜子（佛陀的弟子）。 ~sāsana, 【中】胜教（佛教）。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jināti: {'def': '(ji + nā), 征服，使服从。【过】 jini。【过分】 jita。【现分】 jinanta。【独】 jinitvā, jitvā。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '=jayati (jeti). See also vi°. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ji(梵ji)赢+nā), 征服，使服从。【过】jini。【过分】jita。【现分】jinanta。【独】jinitvā, jitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jita: {'def': '(jināti 的【过分】), 已征服，已抑制。【中】胜利。 ~tta, 【中】征服。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of jayati, conquer] conquered, subdued, mastered: (nt.) victory. jitā me pāpakā dhammā Vin.I,8; ‹-› Dh.40, 104 (attā jitaṁ seyyo for attā jito seyyo see DhA.II,228), 105, 179; Vv 64²⁷ (jitindriya one whose senses are mastered, cp. guttindriya). -- Cp. vi°. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jināti 的【过分】), 已征服，已抑制。【中】胜利。jitatta,【中】征服。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jitatta: {'def': '(jita+atta), 抑制心意的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jita + atta), 抑制心意的人。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [n. abstr. of jita] mastery, conquest VvA.284. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jivhā: {'def': '【阴】舌。jivhagga,【中】舌端。jivhāyatana,【中】舌处(味觉感官)。jivhādhātu,【阴】舌界(即：味觉感官)。jivhāviññāṇa,【中】舌识，味觉。jivhindriya,【中】舌根(味觉官能)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic jihvā, cp. Lat. lingua (older dingua); Goth. tuggo; Ohg. zunga; E. tongue] the tongue. ‹-› (a) physically: Vin.I,34; A.IV,131; Sn.673, 716; Dh.65, 360; J.II,306; PvA.99 (of Petas: visukkha-kanthaṭṭha j.), 152. -- Of the tongue of the mahāpurusha which could touch his ears & cover his forehead: Sn.1022; p. 108; & pahūta-jivhatā the characteristic of possessing a prominent tongue (as the 27th of the 32 Mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇāni) D.I,106=Sn.p. 107; D.II,18. --dujjivha (adj.) having a bad tongue (of a poisonous snake) A.III,260. -- (b) psychologically: the sense of taste. It follows after ghāna (smell) as the 4th sense in the enumⁿ of sense-organs (jivhāya rasaṁ sāyati Nd² under rūpa; jivhā-viññeyya rasa D.I,245; II,281; M.II,42) Vin.I,34; D.III,102, 226; M.I,191; Vism.444.

--agga the tip of the tongue A.III,109; IV,137; DhA.II,33. --āyatana the organ of taste D.III,243, 280, 290; Dhs.585, 609, 653; --indriya the sense of taste D.III,239; Dhs.585, 609, 972; --nittaddana (corr. to --nitthaddhana) tying the tongue by means of a spell D.I,11 (cp. DA.I,96); --viññāṇa the cognition of taste M.I,112; D.III,243; Dhs.556, 612, 632; --samphassa contact with the sense of taste S.I,115; D.III,243; Dhs.585, 632, 787. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】舌。 ~agga, 【中】舌端。 ~āyatana, 【中】舌处（味觉感官）。~dhātu, 【阴】舌界（味觉的要素，即：味觉感官）。 ~viññāṇa, 【中】舌识，味觉。 ~indriya, 【中】舌根（味觉官能）。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jiyā: {'def': '【阴】弓弦。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Vedic jyā=Gr. biόs bow, cp. also Lat. filum thread] a bow string M.I,429 (five kinds); J.II,88; III,323; Vism.150; DA.I,207. --kāra bowstring-maker Miln.331. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】弓弦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jiñjuka: {'def': '【阳】野甘草。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'the Gunja shrub (Abrus precatorius) J.IV,333 (akkhīni j. °phalasadisāni, cp. in same application guñjā); V,156 (j. °phalasannibha); DhA.I,177 (°gumba). (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】野甘草(wild liquorice)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jiṇṇa: {'def': '[pp. of jarati] 1. decayed, broken up, frail, decrepit, old: vuḍḍha mahallaka andhagata vayo-anupatta Nd² 261; jarājiṇṇatāya jiṇṇa DA.I,283. -- Vin.II,189; D.I,114; M.II,48 sq., 66; A.II,249; IV,173; Sn.1 (urago va jiṇṇaṁ tacaṁ jahāti); Pv.I,12¹ (same simile); Sn.1120, 1144; J.I,58; III,22 (-pilotikā worn-out rags); Dh.155, 260; Pv.II,11⁴ (jarājiṇṇa PvA.147); Pug.33; Vism.119 (°vihārā), 356 (°sandamānikā), 357 (°koṭṭha); ThA.213 (-ghara a tumble-down house); PvA.40 (-goṇa=jaraggava), 55 (of a roof). Cp. °tara J.IV,108. -- 2. digested J.II,362 (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jīrati 的【过分】), 已衰退，已老，已消化。jiṇṇaka,【阳】老人。jiṇṇatā,【阴】衰老。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jīrati 的【过分】), 已衰退，已老，已消化。 ~ka, 【阳】老人。 ~tā, 【阴】衰老。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jiṇṇaka: {'def': '(adj.)=jiṇṇa Sn.98, 124; J.IV,178, 366; Sdhp.299 (sālā). (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jiṇṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. jiṇṇa, jaratā & jīraṇatā] decrepitude DA.I,283 (jarā°). (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jotaka: {'def': '(adj.) [from juti] illuminating, making light; explaining J.II,420; Dpvs XIV.50; Miln.343 (=lamp‹-› lighter). -- f. °ikā explanation, commentary, N. of several Commentaries, e. g. the Paramatthajotikā on the Sutta Nipāta (KhA 11); cp. the similar expression dīpanī (Paramatthadīpanī on Th.2; Vv & Pv.). ‹-› Jotika Np. DhA.I,385 (Jotiya); Vism.233, 382. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】照亮的，解释的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】照亮的，解释的人。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jotana: {'def': '【中】 ~nā, 【阴】光亮，解释。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】jotatinā,【阴】光亮，解释。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) & jotanā (f.) [cp. Sk. dyotana] illumination, explanation J.VI,542; Ps.II,112; VvA.17 (°nā). (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jotati: {'def': '(jut + a), 照耀，变亮。【过】 joti。【现分】 jotanta。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jut +a), 照耀，变亮。【过】joti。【现分】jotanta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. dyotate to shine, *deịā; cp. Gr. dέatai shine, dh_los clear; also Sk. dī in dīpyate; Lat. dies. Dhtp 120 gives jut in meaning “ditti,” i. e. light] to shine, be splendid Jˋ I.53; VI,100, 509; PvA.71 (jotantī=obhāsentī). (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Joteti: {'def': '[Caus. of jotati] (a) trs. to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain A.II,51=J.V,509 (bhāsaye jotaye dhammaṁ; Gloss J.V,510 katheyya for joteyya=jotaye) It.108; J.II,208; PvA.18. -- (b) intrs. to shine DhA.II,163 (ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); pp. jotita resplendent PvA.53. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jotati 的【使】), 照亮，解释，说明。【过】 jotesi。【过分】 jotita。【现分】 jotenta, jotayamāna。【独】 jotetvā。【不】 jotetuŋ。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jotati 的【使】), 照亮，解释，说明(to cause to shine, illuminate, make clear, explain)。【过】jotesi。【过分】jotita。【现分】jotenta, jotayamāna。【独】jotetvā。【不】jotetuṁ。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Joti: {'def': '【阴】光，光辉。【中】星。【阳】火。 ~pāsāṇa, 【阳】水晶发热。~sattha, 【中】天文学。(p138)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】光，光辉。【中】星。【阳】火。jotipāsāṇa,【阳】水晶发热。jotisattha,【中】天文学。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) [Sk. jyotis (cp. dyuti) nt. to dyotate, see jotati] 1. light, splendour, radiance S.I,93; A.II,85; Vv 16². -- 2. a star: see cpds. -- 3. fire S.I,169; Th.1, 415; J.IV,206; sajotibhūta set on fire S.II,260; A.III,407 sq.; J.I,232.

--parāyaṇa (adj.) attaining to light or glory S.I,93; A.II,85; D.III,233; Pug.51; --pāvaka a brilliant fire Vv 16² (expl. VvA.79: candima-suriya-nakkhatta tāraka-rūpānaṁ sādhāraṇa-nāmaṁ); --pāsāṇa a burning glass made of a crystal DhA.IV,209; --mālikā a certain torture (setting the body on fire: making a fiery garland) M.I,87=A.I,47=II.122=Nd¹ 154=Nd² 604=Miln.197; --rasa a certain jewel (wishing stone) VvA.111, 339; DhA.I,198; Miln.118; --sattha the science of the stars, astronomy: one of the 6 Vedic disciplines: see chaḷaṅga, cp. jotisā. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jotimant: {'def': '(joti+mant, cp. also P. jutimant,【形】照耀(luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge))。paññājoti-sampanna, 具有智慧的光辉(SnA 348.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [joti+mant, cp. also P. jutimant] luminous, endowed with light or splendour, bright, excellent (in knowledge) Sn.348 (=paññājoti-sampanna SnA 348). (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jotisā: {'def': '(f.) [=Sk. jyotiṣa (nt.)] astronomy Miln.3. (Page 286)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(=Sk. jyotisa (nt.)),【阴】天文学(astronomy Miln.3.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Juhana: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. juhati] offering, sacrifice D.I,12, J.II,43. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】供奉，奉献物。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】供奉，奉献物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Juhati: {'def': '(hu + a, hu 重叠，而前 h 变成 j), 注入火中，献出。【过】juhi。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(hu牺牲+a, hu 重叠，而前 h 变成 j), 注入火中，献出。【过】juhi。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. juhoti, *gheu(d); cp. Gr. xέw, xQtra, xu_los; Lat. fundo; Goth. giutan, Ohg. giozan] to pour (into the fire), to sacrifice, offer; to give, dedicate A.II,207 (aggiṁ); Sn.1046 (=Nd² 263 deti cīvaraṁ, etc.); 428 (aggihuttaṁ jūhato), p. 79 (aggiṁ); Pug.56; fut. juhissati S.I,166 (aggiṁ); caus. hāpeti² pp. huta; see also hava, havi, homa. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Juti: {'def': '【阴】光辉，灿烂，光亮。jutika,【形】有光亮的。jutindhara,【形】辉煌的，灿烂的。jutimantu,【形】灿烂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】光辉，灿烂，光亮。 ~ka, 【形】有光亮的。 ~ndhara, 【形】辉煌的，灿烂的。 ~mantu, 【形】灿烂的。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. jyuti & dyuti, to dyotate, see jotati] splendour, brightness, effulgence, light J.II,353; PvA.122, 137, 198. The spelling juti at M.I,328 (in combⁿ gati+juti) seems to be faulty for cuti (so as v. l. given on p. 557).

--dhara (jutin°) carrying or showing light, shining, resplendent, brilliant S.I,121; J.II,353; DhA.I,432. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jutika: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) having light, in mahā° of great splendour D.II,272; A.I,206; IV,248. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jutimant: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. juti] brilliant, bright; usually fig. as prominent in wisdom: “bright.” distinguished, a great light (in this sense often as v. l. to jātimant) D.II,256 (ī); S.V,24; Dh.89 (=DhA.II,163 ñāṇajutiyā jotetvā); Sn.508; Pv IV.1³⁵ (=PvA.230 ñāṇajutiyā jutimā). (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jutimantatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour SnA 453. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jutimatā: {'def': '(f.) [fr. jutimant] splendour, brightness, prominence J 14; V,405 (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Juṇha: {'def': '【形】明亮的。juṇhapakkha,【阳】明亮的半个月(初一至十五日)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】明亮的。 ~pakkha, 【阳】明亮的半个月（初一至十五日）。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Juṇhā: {'def': '【阴】月光，月光照耀的夜晚。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [Sk. jyotsnā, see also P. dosinā) moonlight, a moonlit night, the bright fortnight of the month (opp. kālapakkha) Vin.I,138, 176; J.I,165; IV,498 (°pakkha). (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】月光，月光照耀的夜晚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāgara: {'def': '【形】醒觉的，警醒的，注意的。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. jāgarti] waking, watchful, careful, vigilant S.I,3; A.II,13=It.116; M.II,31; It.41; Miln.300. -- bahu° wide awake, well aware, cautious Sn.972 (cp. rakkhita-mānasāno in same context V. 63); Dh.29. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】醒觉的，警寤的，注意的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāgarati: {'def': '[Sk. jāgarti to be awake (redupl. perf. for jājarti) *ger & gerēi; cp. Lat. expergiscor (*exprogrīscor); Gr. e)geiρw, perf. e)grήgora (for *e)gήgora). Def. at Dhtp 254 by niddā-khaya] to be awake, to be watchful, to be on the alert (cp. guttadvāra) Dh.60 (dīghā jāgarato rattī), 226; It.41; Miln.300. -- pp. jāgarita (q. v.). (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jāgar清醒+a), 清醒，注意。【过】jāgari,【现分】jāgaranta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jāgar + a), 清醒，注意。【过】 jāgari, 【现分】 jāgaranta。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jāgaratā: {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. jāgaraṇa] watchfulness, vigilance S.I,3. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāgaraṇa: {'def': '【中】保持清醒。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】保持清醒。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [der. fr. jāgara] a means for waking or keeping awake Miln.301. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāgarita: {'def': '(nt.) [pp. of jāgarti] waking, vigil It.41; Pug.59. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāgariya: {'def': '【中】熬夜，清醒。 ~yānuyoga, 【阳】警戒，注意的练习。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】熬夜，清醒，警寤。jāgariyānuyoga,【阳】警戒，注意的练习。jāgariyaṁ anuyuttā﹐警寤精进。jāgariyaṁ ananuyuttā﹐不修警寤精进。MA.39./II,316.︰Jāgariyamanuyuttāti rattindivaṁ cha koṭṭhāse katvā ekasmiṁ koṭṭhāse niddāya okāsaṁ datvā pañca koṭṭhāse jāgariyamhi yuttā payuttā.(警寤精进：日夜六时的一分(四小时)睡觉，尝试、应用五分机会清醒。)在生理上，快速眼动睡眠与非快速眼动睡眠的周期是九十分钟，所以不需要睡太多，睡眠的时间太长，反而使人「倦怠无力」。为了要容易入睡，只要在上床前稍微提高体温(如︰泡澡，或30分钟左右的有氧运动，或运动再泡澡)，在体温降低中入睡。习惯每天睡八小时的人改变成三小时，一开始时可能睡意频频，须自我暗示来调整。养成疲倦时随时随地睡觉的习惯(打瞌睡以四、五分钟为最佳)，可以让自己轻易获得休息。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāgariyā: {'def': '(f.) [BSk. M Vastu jāgarikā] keeping awake, watchfulness, vigilance, esp. in the sense of being cautious of the dangers that are likely to befall one who strives after perfection. Therefore freq. in combⁿ “indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaṁ anuyutto” (anuyuñjati: to apply oneself to or being devoted to vigilance), e. g. S.II,218; M.I,32, 273, 354 sq., 471; A.I,113 sq.; II,40. -- Also in °ṁ bhajati to pursue watchfulness (bhajetha keep vigil) It.42; Sn.926 (niddaṁ na bahulīkareyya j°ṁ bhajeyya ātāpī). -- S.IV,104; M.I,273, 355; Miln.388.

--ânuyoga application or practice of watchfulness Nd¹ 484. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāla: {'def': '(Vedic jāla),【中】网(a net)，纠缠(netting, entanglement)，台语︰交葛。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² [Sk. jvāla, from jalati] glow, blaze J.V,326; PvA.52 (=tejas), 154 (raṁsi°); Miln.357; Vism.419 (kappavināsaka°).

--roruva N. of one of the two Roruva hells (“blazes”) J.V,271; --sikhā a glowing crest i. e. a flame Nd² 11 (=accī). (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [Vedic jāla, prob. from jaṭ to plait, make a tangle cp. jaṭita & jaṭā; on l:ṭ cp. phulla: sphuṭa; cāru: cāṭu; cela: ceṭa] a net; netting, entanglement (lit. or fig.): snare, deceptíon (=māyā). -- A.I,it. Nd² 260 (=suttajāla, a plaiting of threads); SnA 115, 263 (=suttamaya) D.I,45 (anto-jālikata caught in a net); Sn.62, 71, 213, 669; J.I,52; VI,139. -- kiṅkiṇika° a row of bells D.II,183; muttā° a net of pearls J.I,9; VvA.40; loha° PvA.153; hema° Vv 35; a fowler’s net Dh.174; a spider’s web Dh.347; nets for hair J.VI,188; pabbata° a chain of mountains J.II,399; sirā° network of veins J.V,69; PvA.68. -- Freq. in similes: see J.P.T.S. 1907, 90. -- B. Fig. Very often appl^d to the snares of Māra: S.I,48 (maccuno); Sn.357 (id.); DhA.III,175 (Māra°); Sn.527 (deception); taṇhā° the snare of worldly thirst (cp. °tanhā) M.I,271; Th.1, 306; SnA 351; kāma° Th.1, 355; moha° S.III,83; mohasama Dh.251; diṭṭhi° the fallacies of heresy D.I,46; J.VI,220; ñāṇa° the net of knowledge VvA.63; DhA.III,171. bhumma° (vijjā) “earthly net,” i.e. gift of clearsight extending over the earth SnA 353.

--akkhi a mesh of a net J.I,208: --taṇhā the net of thirst Dhs.1059, 1136; DhsA.367; --pūpa a “netcake”? DhA.I,319; --hatthapāda (adj.) having net-like hands & feet (one of the 32 marks of a Mahāpurisa) prob. with reference to long nails D.II,17 (see Dial. II.14, note 3), cp. jālitambanakhehi Vv 81¹⁶ (expl^d at VvA.315: jālavantehi abhilohita-nakkehi. Tena jāli (v. l. jāla-) hatthataṁ mahāpurisa-lakkhaṇaṁ tambanakhataṁ anuvyañ anañ ca dasseti). (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】网，纠缠。 ~pūva, 【阳】薄烤饼。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jālaka: {'def': '【阳】芽，小网。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】芽，小网。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [jāla¹+ka] 1. a net J.VI,536; Dāvs.V,51. ‹-› 2. a bud A.IV,117 sq. (°jāta in bud). -- f. jālikā chain armour Miln.199. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jālakkhika: {'def': '【中】网孔。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】网孔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jālapūva: {'def': '【阳】薄烤饼(pancake)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāleti: {'def': '(jal + e), 点燃，使燃烧。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 jālita。【现分】 jālenta,jālayamāna。【独】 jāletvā。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jal+e), 点燃，使燃烧。【过】jālesi。【过分】jālita。【现分】jālenta, jālayamāna。【独】jāletvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[caus. of jalati. See also jaleti] to cause to burn, to light, kindle J.II,104; IV,290; V,32. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jālika: {'def': '【阳】使用渔网的渔夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】使用渔网的渔夫。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jālikā: {'def': '【阴】以链制成的甲胄(armour)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】网甲，锁子甲（以链制成的甲胄）。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jālin: {'def': '(adj.-n.) “having a net,” ensnaring, deceptive: (a) lit. a fisherman J.II,178. -- (b) fig. usually in f. °inī of tanhā (ensnarer, witch) S.I,107=Dh.180; A.II,211; Th.1, 162, 908; Dhs.1059; Vism.1; DhsA.363; cp. M Vastu I.166; III,92. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jālinī: {'def': '【阴】贪欲，欲望，渴望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】贪欲，欲望，渴望。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jālā: {'def': '【阴】火焰。 ~kula, 【形】被火焰环绕着的。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】火焰。jālākula,【形】被火焰环绕著的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [see jāla²] a flame J.I,216, 322; Miln.148, 357. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāmātar: {'def': '(& jāmāta J.IV,219) [Vedic jāmātar. Deriv. uncertain. BR. take it as jā+mātar, the builder up of the family, supposing the case where there is no son and the husband goes to live in the wife’s family, a bīna marriage. More likely fr. ldg *gem, to marry. Cp. Gr. gamέw; gambrόs, Lat. gener] daughter’s husband, son-inlaw Th.2, 422 (=ThA.269 duhitu pati); J.II,63; V,442. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāmātu: {'def': '【阳】女婿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】女婿。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jāna: {'def': '(adj.) [to jñā, see jānāti] knowing or knowable, understandable J.III,24 (=jānamāna). dujjāna difficult to understand D.I,170, 187; M.I,487; II,43. su° recognizable, intelligible Pv IV.1³⁵ (=suviññeyya PvA.230). Cp. ājāna. (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(to jñā, see jānāti),【形】【阳】知道(knowing or knowable, understandable (=jānamāna) )。dujjāna, 难知道(difficult to understand)。sujāna,有智的，善识的(recognizable, intelligible(=suviññeyya PvA.230) )。Cp. ājāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jānana: {'def': '【中】知识，识别。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】知识，识别。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. jñā] knowledge, cognizance, recognition; intelligence, learning, skill J.I,145 (attānaṁ --°kālato paṭṭhāya from the time of self-recognition), 200 (-°manta knowledge of a spell, a spell known by: tumhākaṁ) II.221; SnA 330; DhA.II,73 (°sabhāva= ñatta); DA.I,86 (akkhara°); Vism.391 (°atthāya in order to know), 436 (=pajānana). Cp. ājānana. ‹-› ajānana not knowing (°-) J.V,199; VI,177; not known J.I,32 (°sippa). (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jānanaka: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. *jñānaka, cp. jānana & Sk. jānaka (c. Gen.) expert Av Ś II.119, 120, as n. ib. I.216] knowing DhsA.394. (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】意的，心照不宣的，聪颖的，精明的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】会意的，心照不宣的，聪颖的，精明的。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jānanatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. jānana] the fact of knowing, knowledge KhA 144. (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jānanīya: {'def': '【形】应该知道的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】应该知道的。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jānapada: {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. janapada] belonging to the country, living in the c.; pl. country-folk (opp. negamā townsfolk) D.I,136, 142; M.II,74; J.II,287, 388; DA.I,297 (=janapada-vāsin). (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'jānapadika, 【形】属于国家的。【阳】乡巴佬。【复】乡下人。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'jānapadika,【形】国家的。【阳】乡巴佬。【复】乡下人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāni: {'def': '¹ (f.) [from jahati, confused in meaning with jayati. See jahati & cp. janti] deprivation, loss, confiscation of property; plundering, robbery; using force, ill-treatment D.I,135=A.I,201 (vadhena vā bandhena vā jāniyā vā); S.I,66 (hatajānisu), J.I,55 (v. l. jāti), 212 (mahājānikara a great robber): IV.72 (dhana,° v. l. hāni); Dh.138 (=DhA.III,70 dhanassa jāni, v. l. hāni). (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】损失，剥夺，妻子。jānipati,【阳】夫妻，妻子和丈夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² (f.) wife, in jānipatayo (pl.) wife & husband (cp. jāyā(m)pati) A.II,59 sq. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】损失，剥夺，妻子。 ~pati, 【阳】夫妻，妻子和丈夫。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jānu: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic jānu=Gr. gόnu, Lat. genu, Goth., Ohg., etc. kniu, E. knee] (also as jaṇṇu(ka), q.v.) the knee J.II,311; IV 41Q VI,471Q DA.I,254.

--maṇḍala the knee-cap, the knee A.I,67; II,21; III,241 sq.; PvA.179. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jānuka: {'def': '(nt.)=jānu A.IV,102. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jānāpeti: {'def': '(Jānāti的【使】), 使知道，告知，自己泄露。【过】jānāpesi。【过分】jānāpita, āpita。【现分】āpenta。【独】jānāpetvā, āpetvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jānāti: {'def': '(ñā+nā), 知道，发现，意识到。【过】jāni。【现分】jānanta, jānamāna。【过分】ñāta。【独】jānitvā, ñatvā。【不】jānituṁ, ñātuṁ。jaññā, Opt.3sg.。- fut. jānissati; -- aor. ajāni & jāni, 3rd pl. jāniṁsu; ger. jānitvā; inf. jānituṁ. Caus. jānāpeti. -- 2.fut. ñassati; -- aor. aññāsi & nāsi, 3rd pl. aññaṁsu.; -- grd. ñeyya & ñātabba; Pass. ñāyati to be called or named.', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic jñā, jānāti *genē & *gnē, cp. Gr. gignwζkw, gnwtόs, gnώsis; Lat. nosco, notus, (i)gnarus (cp. E. i-gnorant); Goth. kunnan; Ohg. kennan, Ags. cnāwan=E. know] to know.

I. Forms: The 2 Vedic roots jān° & jñā° are represented in P. by jān° & ñā° (ña°) 1. jān: pres. jānāti; pot. jāneyya (Sn.781) & jaññā (A.IV,366; Sn.116, 775; Dh.157, 352; J.II,346; IV,478) 2nd sg. jāneyyāsi (M. I.487; J.I,288), 1st pl. jāniyāma (Sn.873) & (archaic) jānemu (Sn.76, 599; Vv 83¹¹); -- imper. jānāhi (Sn.596, 1026; Pv.II,9¹²), 3rd. sg. jānātu (It.28); -- ppr. jānanto & jānaṁ (D.I,192; A.I,128; Sn.722), ppr. med. jānamāna (J.I,168); -- fut. jānissati (J.II,342; VI,364); -- aor. ajāni (Sn.536) & jāni (J.I,125, 269), 3rd pl. jāniṁsu (J.II,105; VvA.113); -- ger. jānitvā (J.I,293; III,276); inf. jānituṁ (J.I,125). Caus. jānāpeti (see below IV.2). -- 2. ñā: fut. ñassati (D.I,165); -- aor. aññāsi (J.I,271) & nāsi (Sn.471), 3rd pl. aññaṁsu (Vv 22⁴). -- ger. ñatvā (freq.); -- grd. ñeyya A.II,135 (see below) & ñātabba (PvA.133); -- inf. ñātuṁ (freq.) -- pp. ñāta (q. v.). ‹-› Pass. ñāyati to be called or named (Miln.25).

II. Cognate Forms: Nd² s. v. explains jānāti by passati dakkhati adhigacchati vindati paṭilabhati, & ñatvā (No. 267) by jānitvā tulayitvā tirayitva vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṁ katvā (very freq.) The 1st explⁿ is also applied to abhijānāti, & the 2nd to passitvā, viditaṁ katvā, abhiññāya & disvā. The use of the emphatic phrase jānāti passati is very frequent. Yaṁ tvaṁ na jānāsi na passasi taṁ tvaṁ icchasi kāmesi? Whom you know not neither have seen, is it she that you love and long for? D.I,193; Bhagavā jānaṁ jānāti passaṁ passati cakkhubhūto ñāṇabhūto M.I,111; similarly A.IV,153 sq. See further D.I,2, 40, 84, 157 sq, 165, 192 sq., 238 sq.; A.I,128; III,338; V,226; Sn.908; Nd² 35, 413, 517; Vism.200.

III, Meaning: (1) Intrs. to know, to have or gain knowledge, to be experienced, to be aware, to find out: mayam pi kho na jānāma surely, even we do not know D.I,216; te kho evaṁ jāneyyaṁ they ought to know ib.; jānantā nāma n’âhesuṁ “nobody knew” J.III,188; jānāhi find out J.I,184; kālantarena jānissatha you will see in time PvA.13; ajānanto unawares, unsuspecting I.223; ajānamāna id. Pv.II,3¹⁴. -- 2. Trs. to know recognize, be familiar with (usually c. Acc., but also with Gen.: J.I,337; II,243), to have knowledge of, experience, find; to infer, conclude, distinguish, state, define: yaṁ ahaṁ jānāmi taṁ tvaṁ jānāsi D.I,88; aham p’etaṁ na jānāmi Sn.989; jānanti taṁ yakkhabhūtā Pv IV.1³⁵; paccakkhato ñatvā finding out personally J.I,262; III,168; cittam me Gotamo jānāti S.I,178; jānāti maṁ Bhagavā S.I,116; kathaṁ jānemu taṁ mayaṁ? How shall we know (or identify) him? Vv 83¹¹; yathā jānemu brāhmaṇaṁ so that we may know what a b. is Sn.599; yath’âhaṁ jāneyyaṁ vasalaṁ Sn.p. 21; ajānanto ignorant PvA.4; annapānaṁ ajāṇanto (being without bread & water) PvA.169; ittaraṁ ittarato ñatvā inferring the trifling from the trifle Pv.I,11¹¹; iṅgha me uṇh’odakaṁ jānāhi find me some hot water S.I,174; seyyaṁ jānāhi Vin.IV,16; phalaṁ pāpassa jānamāna (having experi‹-› enced) J.I,168; mantaṁ j. (to be in possession of a charm) J.I,253; maggaṁ na j. Sn.441; pamāṇaṁ ajānitvā (knowing no measure) PvA.130. -- 3. With double Acc.: to recognize as, to see in, take for, identify as, etc. (cp. Caus.): petaṁ maṁ jānāhi “see in me a Peta” Pv.II,9¹² (=upadhārehi PvA.119); bhadd’itthiyā ti maṁ aññaṁsu (they knew me as=they called me) Vv 22⁴.

IV. Various: 1. Grd. ñeyya as nt.=knowledge (cp. ñāṇa): yāvatakaṁ ñeyyaṁ tāvatakaṁ ñāṇaṁ (knowledge coincides with the knowable, or: his knowledge is in proportion to the k., i. e. he knows all) Nd² 235^2m; ñāṇaṁ atikkamitvā ñeyyapatho n’atthi “beyond knowledge there is no way of knowledge” ib.; ñeyyasāgara the ocean of knowledge PvA.1. -- 2. Caus. jānāpeti to make known, to inform, or (with attānaṁ) to identify, to reveal oneself J.I,107 (att. ajānāpetvā); VI,363; Vism.92 (att.); PvA.149 (att.); DhA.II,62. (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(ñā + nā), 知道，发现，意识到。【过】 jāni。【现分】 jānanta, jānamāna。【过分】 ñāta。【独】 jānitvā, ñatvā。【不】 jānituŋ, ñātuŋ。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jāpayati: {'def': 'Caus. of jayati. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāra: {'def': '(Vedic jāra),【阳】情夫(a paramour, adulterer)。jāyāttana,【中】情夫的身份。情妇(adulteress)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic jāra] a paramour, adulterer J.I,293; II,309. f. °t adulteress Vin.II,259, 268; III,83. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】情夫。 ~ttana, 【中】情夫的身份。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jārī: {'def': '【阴】奸妇或情妇。Vin.(Pārā.III,139.；CS:Pārā.pg.202)︰Jāyattane vāti jāyā bhavissasi.(妻子的性质︰将变成妻子) Jārattane vāti jārī bhavissasi. (情妇的性质︰将变成情妇)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】奸妇或情妇。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jāta: {'def': '(jāyati 的【过分】), 已出生，已兴起，已变成，已发生。【中】搜集品，多样性。 ~divasa, 【阳】生日。 ~rūpa, 【中】黄金。 ~veda, 【阳】火。 ~ssara, 【阳、中】天然湖。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of janati (janeti), cp. Lat. (g)nātus, Goth. kunds; also Gr. (kasi/--) gnhtόs, Ohg. knabo] 1. As adj.-noun: (a) born, grown, arisen, produced (=nibbatta pātubhūta Nd² 256) Sn.576 (jātānaṁ maccānaṁ niccaṁ maraṇato bhayaṁ); jātena maccena kattabbaṁ kusalaṁ bahuṁ Dh.53=Miln.333; yakkhinī jātâsi (born a G.) J.VI,337; rukkho j. J.I,222; latā jātā Dh.340; gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyya-paṇṇāni Vism.250. -- (n.) he who or that which is born: jātassa maraṇaṁ hoti Sn.742; jātassa jarā paññāyissati J.I,59; jātaṁ+bhūtaṁ (opp. ajātaṁ abhūtaṁ) It.37. -- (b) “genuine,” i.e. natural, true, good, sound (cp. kata, bhūta, taccha & opp. ajāta like akata, abhūta): see cpds. -- 2. As predicate, often in sense of a finite verb (cp. gata): born, grown (or was born, grew); become; occurred, happened Sn.683 (Bodhisatto hitasukhatāya jāto); bhayaṁ jātaṁ (arose) Sn.207; vivādā jātā Sn.828; ekadivase j. (were born on the same day) J.III,391; aphāsukaṁ jātaṁ (has occurred J.I,291. -- So in Loc. abs. jāte (jātamhi) “when . . . has arisen, when there is . . .,” e. g. atthamhi Vin.I,350=M.III,154=Dh.331; vādamhi Sn.832; oghe Sn.1092; kahāpaṇesu jātesu J.I,121. -- 3. °jāta (nt.) characteristic; pada° pedal character S.I,86; aṅga° the sexual organ Vin.I,191; as adj. having become . . . (=bhūta); being like or behaving as, of the kind of . . ., sometimes to be rendered by an adj. or a pp. implied in the noun: cuṇṇakajātāni aṭṭhikāni (=cuṇṇayitāni) M.III,92; jālakajāta in bud A.IV,117; chandajāta=chandika Sn.767; sujāta Sn.548 (well-born, i. e. auspicious, blessed, happy); pītisomanassa° joyful & glad Sn.p. 94; J.I,60, etc.; gandhajāta a kind of perfume (see gandha). Often untranslatable: lābhappatto jāto J.III,126; vināsa-ppaccayo jāto J.I,256. -- 4. a Jātaka or Buddhist birth story DhA.I,34.

--āmaṇḍa the (wild) castor oil plant VvA.10; --ovaraka the inner chamber where he was born VvA.158; J.I,391 (so read for jāto varake). --kamma the (soothsaying) ceremony connected w. birth, in °ṁ karoti to set the horoscope PvA.198 (=nakkhatta-yogaṁ uggaṇhāti); --divasa the day of birth, birthday J.III,391; IV,38; --maṅgala birth festival, i. e. the feast held on the birth of a child DhA.II,86; --rūpa “sterling,” pure metal, i. e. gold (in its natural state, before worked, cp. jambonada). In its relation to suvaṇṇa (worked gold) it is stated to be suvaṇṇavaṇṇo (i. e. the brightcoloured metal: VvA.9; DhA.IV,32: suvaṇṇo jātarūpo); at DA.I,78 it is expl^d by suvaṇṇa only & at Vin.III,238 it is said to be the colour of the Buddha: j. Satthu-vaṇṇa. At A.I,253 it is represented as the material for the suvaṇṇakāra (the “white”--smith as opp. to “black”--smith). -- Comb^d w. hirañña Pv.II,7⁵; very freq. w. rajata (silver), in the prohibition of accepting gold & silver (D.I,5)≈ as well as in other connections, e. g. Vin.I,245; II,294 sq.; S.I,71, 95; IV,326 (the moral dangers of “money”: yassa jātarūpa-rajataṁ kappati pañca pi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti); V,353, 407; Dhs.617. -- Other passages illustr. the use & valuation of j. are S.II,234 (°paripūra); V,92 (upakkilesā); A.I,210 (id.); III,16 (id.); -- S.I,93, 117; M.I,38; A.I,215; III,38; IV,199, 281; V,290; J.II,296; IV,102; --veda [cp. Vedic jātaveda=Agni] fire S.I,168; Sn.462 (kaṭṭhā jāyati j.) Ud.93; J.I,214; II,326= IV.471; V,326; VI,204, 578; Vism.171; DA.I,226; DhA.I,44 (nirindhana, without fuel); --ssara a natural pond or lake Vin.I,111; J.I,470; II,57. (Page 280)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(janati 的【过分】), 已出生，已兴起，已变成，已发生。【中】搜集品，多样性。jātadivasa,【阳】生日。jātarūpa,【中】黄金。jātaveda,【阳】火。jātassara,【阳】【中】天然湖。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jātaka: {'def': 'n. [〃] 本生物語, 本生話, 本生經 [小誦經之一]. -bhāṇaka 本生誦者.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'n. [〃] 本生物語, 本生話, 本生経 [小誦経の一] -bhāṇaka 本生誦者.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'n. [〃] 本生物語, 本生話, 本生経 [小誦経の一] . -Aṭṭhakathā本生经注释.-bhāṇaka 本生经誦者，ジヤータカの专门家', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '【中】《本生故事》，本生经。【形】天生的，兴起的。jātakabhāṇaka,【阳】说本生故事的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】《本生故事》。【形】天生的，兴起的。 ~bhāṇaka,【阳】重复说《本生故事》的人。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (m.) [jāta+ka, belonging to what has been born] a son J.I,239; IV,138. (Page 281)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [jāta+ka, belonging to, connected with what has happened] 1. a birth story as found in the earlier books. This is always the story of a previous birth of the Buddha as a wise man of old. In this sense it occurs as the name of one of the 9 categories or varieties of literary composition (M.I,133; A.II,7, 103, 108; Vin.III,8; Pug.43. See navaṅga).-2. the story of any previous birth of the Buddha, esp. as an animal. In this sense the word is not found in the 4 Nikāyas, but it occurs on the Bharhut Tope (say, end of 3rd cent. B.C.), and is frequent in the Jātaka book. ‹-› 3. the name of a book in the Pāli canon, containing the verses of 547 such stories. The text of this book has not yet been edited. See Rh. Davids’Buddhist India, 189--209, and Buddh. Birth Stories, introd., for history of the Jātaka literature. -- jātakaṁ niṭṭhapeti to wind up a Jātaka tale J.VI,363; jātakaṁ samodhāneti to apply a Jātaka to the incident J.I,106; DhA.I,82. ‹-› Note. The form jāta in the sense of jātaka occurs at DhA.I,34.

--atthavaṇṇanā the commentary on the Jātaka book, ed. by V. Fausböll, 6 vols. with Index vol. by D. Andersen, London, 1877 sq.; --bhāṇaka a repeater of the J. book Miln.341. (Page 281)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jātaka-Aṭṭhakathā: {'def': 'f. 本生經註釋. JA.', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'f. 本生経註釈. JA.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}

Jātarūparajata: {'def': '﹐【中】金银。Na hi, gāmaṇi, kappati samaṇānaṁ sakyaputtiyānaṁ jātarūparajataṁ, na sādiyanti samaṇā sakyaputtiyā jātarūparajataṁ, nappaṭiggaṇhanti samaṇā sakyaputtiyā jātarūparajataṁ, nikkhittamaṇisuvaṇṇā samaṇā sakyaputtiyā apetajātarūparajatā. Yassa kho, gāmaṇi, jātarūparajataṁ kappati, pañcapi tassa kāmaguṇā kappanti. Yassa pañca kāmaguṇā kappanti, ekaṁsenetaṁ gāmaṇi, dhāreyyāsi assamaṇadhammo asakyaputtiyadhammoti.(聚落主！於此沙门释子等，於金银为不净，他们不允许，彼等不取此。於此沙门释子等，於金银为非净，彼等不受此，彼等不取此。沙门释子等，弃摩尼、黄金，以离金银。聚落主！以金银为净者，则於五种欲亦净。聚落主！以五种欲为净者，此应视为非沙门法，非释子法。KhA.37.︰Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṁ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo, lohamāsakadārumāsakajatumāsakādi yaṁ yaṁ tattha tattha vohāraṁ gacchati, tadubhayampi jātarūparajataṁ.(金(jātarūpa)︰为黄金。银(rajata)︰为货币、铜钱、木钱、胶钱等，凡通用的(货币)，这两者都(属於)金银。以任何方式接受那(金银)为接受，没有任何方式那(接受金钱)是可以的。如此为所应说不共的。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jātatta: {'def': '【中】天生的事实。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】天生的事实。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [abstr. fr. jāta] the fact of being born or of having grown or arisen Vism.250; DhA.I,241. (Page 281)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāti: {'def': '【阴】出生，再生，种族，民族，系谱，一种，一种类。~kosa, 【阳】肉豆蔻衣〔干皮〕（一种香料）。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】铲除再生的机会。 ~kkhetta, 【中】出生地，再生的界。 ~tthaddha, 【形】以（生）世家为骄傲的。 ~nirodha,【阳】生灭（再生的终止）。 ~phala,【中】肉豆寇（一种常绿的热带小乔木 (Myristica fragrans)，原产摩鹿加群岛，但由于它的球形黄色核果产生肉豆蔻和豆蔻香料，已广泛栽培）。 ~mantu,【形】出生的良好（好世家），有真正的质量。 ~vāda, 【阳】讨论有关亲子关系的事。 ~sampanna, 【形】出生在良好或高贵的家庭。 ~sumanā,【阴】大花素馨（一种大花的东印度群岛茉莉属植物 (Jasminumgrandiflorum)，常栽培作香料和装饰）。 ~ssara, 【形】记忆前生的。~hiṅgulaka, 【中】天然的朱红。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [see janati & cp. Gr. geneά, gέnesis; Lat. gens; Goth. kind-ins]. -- Instr. jātiyā (Sn.423) & jaccā (D.II,8; J.III,395; Dh.393); Abl. jātiyā (S.I,88) & jātito (by descent: D.II,8); Loc. jātiyaṁ (PvA.10) & jātiyā (PvA.78). -- 1. birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth, “future life” as disposition to be born again, “former life” as cause of this life. Defined (cp. the corresp. explⁿ of jarā) as: yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattanaṁ tamhi tamhi satta-nikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo āyataṇānaṁ paṭilābho D.II,305 =S.II,3=Nd² 257. -- Jāti is a condition precedent of age, sickness & death, and is fraught with sorrow, pain & disappointment. It is itself the final outcome of a kamma, resting on avijjā, performed in anterior births; & forms thus the concluding link in the chain of the Paṭicca-samuppāda. Under the first aspect it is enum^d in various formulæ, either in full or abbreviated (see Nd² 258), viz, (a) as (1) jāti, (2) jarā, (3) vyādhi, (4) maraṇa, (5) sokaparidevadukkhadomanass’upāyāsa in the dukkhaṁ ariyasaccaṁ (the noble truth of what is misfortune) Vin.I,10; A.I,176; III,416; °dhamma destined to be born, etc. M.I,161 sq., 173; -- A.V,216; Nd² 258, 304, 630, etc., in var. connections (referring to some dukkha). -- (b) as Nos. 1--4: Nd² 254, 494^b; J.I,168, etc. -- (c) as Nos. 1, 2, 4 (the standard quotation, implying the whole series 1--5): S.V,224; A.V,144; jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṁ Vin.I,1; D.II,31, 57, etc.; °ika A.II,11, 173; °īya M.I,280; Nd² 40. -- (d) to this is sometimes added (as summing up) saṁsāra: Nd² 282^f; cp. kicchaṁ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca uppajjati ca D.II,30. -- (e) as Nos. 1+4: pahīna-jātimaraṇa (adj.) (=free from life & death, i. e. saṁsāra) A.I,162; °bhayassa pāraga A.II,15; °kovida Sn.484; atāri °ṁ asesaṁ Sn.355 (cp. 500); °assa pāraga Sn.32. -- (f)=e+saṁsāra (cp. d): sattā gacchanti saṁsāraṁ jātimaraṇagāmino A.II,12=52; jātimaraṇasaṁsāraṁ ye vajanti punappunaṁ . . . avijjāy’eva sā gati Sn.729. -- (g) as Nos. 1+2, which implies the whole series: atāri so jātijaraṁ A.I,133= Sn.1048; jātijar’upaga Sn.725=It.106; saṁyojanaṁ jātijarāya chetvā It.42; -- Sn.1052, 1060; Dh.238, 348; cp. jāti ādinā nihīna PvA.198. -- Other phrases & applications: Various rebirths are seen by one who has perfect insight into all happening & remembers his former existences (D.I,81; III,50; A.I,164; M.II,20). Arahantship implies the impossibility of a future rebirth: see formula khīṇā jāti (M.I,139; Sn.p. 16, etc.) and arahant II.A: jātiyā parimuccati S.I,88; jātiṁ bhabbo pahātuṁ A.V,144 sq. -- antimā jāti the last rebirth D.II,15 (cp. carima); purimā j. a former existence PvA.1; atītajātiyaṁ in a former life (=pure) PvA.10. On jāti as dukkha see Vism.498--501. ‹-› 2. descent, race, rank, genealogy (cp. fuή, genus), often comb^d w. gotta. Two grades of descent are enum^d at Vin.IV,6 as hīnā jāti (low birth), consisting of Candāḷa, Veṇa, Nesāda, Rathakāra & Pukkusa; and ukkaṭṭhā j. (superior birth), comprising Khattiyas & Brāhmaṇas. -- The var. meanings of jāti are given by Bdhgh at Vism.498, 499 in the foll. classification (with examples) bhava, nikāya, saṅkhata-lakkhaṇa, paṭisandhi, pasūti, kula, ariya-sīla. -- Kiṁ hi jāti karissati? What difference makes his parentage? D.I,121; jāti-rājāno kings of birth, genuine kings J.I,338; na naṁ jāti nivāresi brahmalok’ûpapattiyā Sn.139; jātiṁ akkhāhi tell me the rank of his father & mother Sn.421, 1004; cp. 462; na jaccā vasalo hoti Sn.136; 142; id. w. brāhmaṇo Sn.650; with nāma & gotta in the description of a man jātiyā nāmena gottena, etc. Vin.IV,6; jātito nāmato gottato by descent, personal & family name D ii.8; cp. jāti - gotta - kula J ii.3. See also j. -- vāda. -- 3. a sort of, kind of (cp. jāta 3): catujātigandha four kinds of scent J.I,265; II,291. ‹-› 4. (jāti°) by (mere) birth or nature, natural (opp. artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent (opp. adulterated, inferior), cp. jāta 1 (b): in cpds., like °maṇi, °vīṇā, etc.

--kkhaya the destruction of the chance of being reborn S.V,168; A.I,167; Sn.209, 517, 743; Dh.423. --khetta the realm of rebirth PvA.138 (=dasa cakkavāḷasahassāni); --thaddha conceited, proud of birth Sn.104 (+dhanatthaddha, gotta°: proud of wealth & name); --thera a Th. by rank D.III,218; --nirodha the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin.I,1≈; --pabhava the origin or root of existence Sn.728; --puppha nutmeg J.VI,367; --bhaya the fear of rebirth A.II,121; --bhūmi natural ground, in °bhūmaka, °bhūmika, °bhūmiya living on nat. gr. (vassaṁ vasati) M.I,145; A.III,366; --maṇi a genuine precious stone J.II,417; --maya constituting birth, being like birth ThA.285; --vāda reputation of birth, character of descent, parentage. The 1st of the 5 characteristics constituting a “well-bred” brahmin: yāva sattamā pitāmahāyugā akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādena “of unblemished parentage back to the 7th generation” D.I,120, etc. (=DA.I,281); A.I,166; III,152, 223; Sn.315, 596. Cp. gotta-vāda (e. g. D.I,99); --vibhaṅga a characteristic of birth, a distinction in descent Sn.600; --vīṇā a first-class lute J.II,249; --sampanna endowed with (pure) birth (in phrase khattiyo muddhâvasitto j.°) A.III,152; --sambhava the origin of birth A.I,142; III,311; J.I,168; --sambheda difference of rank DhA.I,166; --saṁsāra the cycle of transmigration, the saṁsāra of rebirths (see above 1 d. f.): pahīna left behind, overcome (by an Arahant) M.I,139; A.III,84, 86; °ṁ khepetvā id. Th.2, 168; vitiṇṇo j.° n’atthi tassa punabbhavo Sn.746; --sindhava a well-bred horse J.II,97; --ssara the remembrance of (former) births (°ñāṇa) J.I,167; IV,29; DhA.II,27; IV,51; cp. cutûpapāta-ñāṇa); --hiṅgulaka (& hingulikā) natural vermilion J.V,67; VvA.4, 168, 324. (Page 281)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】1.出生，再生(birth, rebirth, possibility of rebirth, “future life” )。2.种族，民族，系谱( descent, race, rank, genealogy)。3.种，种类(a sort of, kind of)，4.本性(birth or nature, natural (opp. artificial); or genuine, pure, excellent)。Instr. jātiyā & jaccā; Abl. jātiyā & jātito; Loc. jātiyaṁ & jātiyā。jātikosa,【阳】肉豆蔻衣〔乾皮〕(一种香料)。jātikkhaya,【阳】铲除再生的机会。jātikkhetta,【中】出生地，再生的界。jātitthaddha,【形】以 (生)世家为骄傲的。jātinirodha,【阳】再生的终止(the extermination of (the cause of) rebirth Vin I.1)。jātiphala,【中】肉豆寇(一种常绿的热带小乔木 (Myristica fragrans)，原产摩鹿加群岛，但由於它的球形黄色核果产生肉豆蔻和豆蔻香料，已广泛栽培)。jātibhaya﹐再生之畏(the fear of rebirth A II.121)。jātibhūmi﹐生地，所生长之土地，乡野田舍之地(natural ground, in jātibhūmaka, jātibhūmika, jātibhūmiya living on natural)。jātimantu,【形】出生的良好(好世家)，有真正的特质。jātimada﹐种族的骄傲。jātivāda,【阳】讨论有关亲子关系的事。jātisampanna,【形】出生在良好或高贵的家庭。jātisambhava﹐生的源头(the origin of birth)。jātisumanā,【阴】大花素馨(一种大花的东印度群岛茉莉属植物 (Jasminum grandiflorum)，常栽培作香料和装饰)。jātissara,【形】记忆前生的。jātihiṅgulaka,【中】天然的朱红。jāti jāti punappunaṁ﹐生生世世。《律藏》(Vin.Mv.93.)：Yaṁ, bhikkhave, mātukucchismiṁ paṭhamaṁ cittaṁ uppannaṁ, paṭhamaṁ viññāṇaṁ pātubhūtaṁ tadupādāya sāvassa jāti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gabbhavīsaṁ upasampādetunti.(诸比丘！凡是第一心已被生在母的子宫者，第一识已出现；取它后，它如此应是‘生’。)S.12.2./II,3.作：“Katamā ca, bhikkhave, jāti？ Yā tesaṁ tesaṁ sattānaṁ tamhi tamhi sattanikāye jāti sañjāti okkanti nibbatti abhinibbatti khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo āyatanānaṁ paṭilābho. Ayaṁ vuccati, bhikkhave, jāti.(诸比丘！什么是‘生’呢？凡是各种有情，於各种有情类之生(jāti)、和合发生(sañjāti)、趣入(okkanti进入)、出现、诸蕴显现(khandhānaṁ pātubhāvo)，诸处获得(āyatanānaṁ paṭilābho)，诸比丘！以此谓之生(jāti)。) (《分别论》(Vbh.99.；CS:p.104) 同)(okkantikkhaṇa﹐投胎刹那)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jātika: {'def': '【形】是…的后裔，源於，属於…社会等级，氏族，民族。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(-°) (adj.) 1. being like, being of, having, etc. (see jāta 3): duppañña° & sappañña° M.I,225; dabba° A.I,254; mukhara° Sn.275; viññū° Sn.294; māna° J.I,88. -- 2. descended from, being of rank, belonging to the class of: maṇḍana° M.II,19; aviheṭhaka° Miln.219; samāna° (of equal rank) DhA.I,390; veṇa° (belonging to the bamboo-workers) PvA.175. (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】是…的后裔，源于，属于…社会等级，氏族，民族。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jātimant: {'def': '(adj.) [jāti+mant] of good birth, having natural or genuine qualities, noble, excellent Sn.420 (vaṇṇārohena sampanno jātimā viya khattiyo); J.I,342 (jātimanta-kulaputtā). Of a precious stone: maṇi veḷuriyo subho j.° D.I,76=M.II,17; DA.I,221; Miln.215. Sometimes in this spelling for jutimant Sn.1136= Nd² 259 (expl^d by paṇḍita paññavā). -- ajātima not of good birth J.VI,356 (opp. sujātimant ibid.). (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jātu: {'def': '【无】的确地，无疑地。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indeel.) [Vedic jātu, particle of affirmation. Perhaps for jānātu one would know, cp. Gr. oi)μai, Lat. credo, P. maññe. But BR. and Fausböll make it a contraction of jāyatu “it might happen.” Neither of these derivations is satisfactory] surely, undoubtedly (ekaṁsavacanaṁ SnA 348) usually in negative (& interrog.) sentences as na jātu, not at all, never (cp. also sādhu); mā jātu Vin.II,203; Sn.152, 348 (no ce hi jātu); J.I,293, 374; IV,261; V,503. Na jātucca at J.VI,60 is apparently for na jātu ca. (Page 282)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【无】的确地，无疑地。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jāyampatikā: {'def': '(pl.) [see jayampatikā & cp. jāyāpatī] wife & husband VvA.286. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāyana: {'def': '【中】出生，出现。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】出生，出现。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāyati: {'def': '(jāyate) [from jan, see janati] to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn. Pres. 3rd pl. jāyare J.III,459; IV,53; Miln.337; ppr, jāyanto Sn.208; aor. jāyi J.III,391; inf. jātum J.I,374. -- jāyati (loko), jīyati, miyati one is born, gets old, dies D.II,30; Vism.235. Kaṭṭhā jāyati jātavedo out of fire-wood is born the fire Sn.462. -- Vin.II,95=305; Sn.114, 296, 657; Dh.58, 193, 212, 282; Pv III,1¹⁴ (are reborn as). Cp. vi°. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jan + ya), 出生，出现。【过】 jāyi。【过分】 jāta。【现分】 jāyanta,jāyamāna。【独】 jāyitvā。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(jāyate)(jan+ya)(from jan, see janati), 出生，出现(to be born, to be produced, to arise, to be reborn)。pres. 3rd pl. jāyare。inf. jātum。【过】jāyi。【过分】jāta。【现分】jāyanta, jāyamāna。【独】jāyitvā。jāyati, jīyati, mīyati, 生、老、死(one is born, gets old, dies)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jāyattana: {'def': '【中】妻子的身份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】妻子的身份。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jāyikā: {'def': 'f. (cp. jāyā) wife M.I,451. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāyā: {'def': '(from jan),【阴】妻子。jāyāpati,【阳】夫妻，妻子和丈夫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】妻子。 ~pati, 【阳】夫妻，妻子和丈夫。(p136)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [from jan] wife Vin.II,259=264; J.IV,285.

--patī (pl.) husband & wife PvA.159; Dāvs.V,2. (Page 283)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jāṇu: {'def': '(Vedic jānu) (also as jaṇṇu(ka))﹐【阳】膝。jāṇumaṇḍala,【中】膝盖骨，髌，护膝(the knee)。jāṇumatta,【形】深及膝的。jaṇumaṇḍala﹐膝盖，膝(the knee-cap, the knee)。Jāṇussoṇi, Jāṇusoṇi(梵Jātisroṇa)生闻(婆罗门)。SA.12.47./II,75.︰Jāṇussoṇīti ṭhānantaravasena evaṁladdhanāmo asītikoṭivibhavo mahāpurohito.(生闻(婆罗门)︰处於胎内(就听教)，如此得名；(他是)有八百万财富的大典尊。)。不过，若以字义来说，也有可能尚在褓襁中，放置在膝时，听闻教法。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】膝。 ~maṇḍala, 【中】膝盖骨，髌，护膝。 ~matta, 【形】深及膝的。(p135)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jīmūta: {'def': '【阳】雨云。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】雨云。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jīna: {'def': '【形】减少了的，浪费的，被剥夺的。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[pp. of jīyati] diminished, wasted, deprived of (with Acc. or Abl.) having lost; with Acc.: J.III,153, 223, 335; V,99 (atthaṁ: robbed of their possessions; Com. parihīna vinaṭṭha). -- with Abl.: J.V,401 (read jīnā dhanā). (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】减少了的，浪费的，被剥夺的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jīraka: {'def': '¹ [Vedic jīra, lively, alert, cp. jīvati & Gr. dierόs, Lat. viridis] digestion, in ajīrakena by want or lack of digestion J.II,181. See ajīraka. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】枯茗籽，莳萝籽（枯茗—伞形花科的一种矮生植物 (Cuminum cyminum)，羽状复叶，花黄色，果实椭圆形。原产埃及和叙利亚，为了其芳香的种子〔用作香料〕而长期被栽培）。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】枯茗籽，莳萝籽(cummin seed﹐枯茗—伞形花科的一种矮生植物 (Cuminum cyminum)，羽状复叶，花黄色，果实椭圆形。原产埃及和敍利亚，为了其芳香的种子〔用作香料〕而长期被栽培)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '² cummin-seed Miln.63; J.I,244; II,363; VvA.186. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīrati: {'def': '& Jīrayati [Caus. of jarati] 1. to destroy, bring to ruin, injure, hurt Vin.I,237 (jīrati); J.V,501 (v. l. BB. for jarayetha, Com. vināseyya)=VI,375; PvA.57. ‹-› 2. (cp. jīyati) to get old A.III,54 (jarā-dhammaṁ mā jīri “old age may not get old,” or “the law of decay may not work”); Vism.235 (where id. p. D.II,30 reads jīyati); DhA.I,11 (cakkhūni jīranti). -- 3. (intrs.) to be digested Vism.101. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jīr衰老+a), 衰老，衰退。【过】jīri。【过分】jiṇṇa。【现分】jīramāna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(jir + a), 衰老，衰退。【过】 jīri。【过分】 jiṇṇa。【现分】 jīramāna。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jīraṇa: {'def': '【中】衰退，老大（年老），消化。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】衰退，老大(年老)，消化。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [fr. jīr] decaying, getting old Dhtp 252. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīraṇatā: {'def': '(f.) [n. abstr. of jīr=jar, see jarati; cp. jarā & jiṇṇatā] the state of being decayed or aged, old age, decay, decrepitude M.I,49; S.II,2; Nd² 252=Dhs.644; PvA.149. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīreti: {'def': '& Jīrāpeti [Verbal formation from jīra¹] to work out, to digest J.I,238, 274 (jīreti); DhA.I,171. Appl. to bhati, wages: bhatiṁ ajīrāpetva not working off the w. J.II,309, 381; jīrāpeti as “destroy” at ThA.269 in explⁿ of nijjareti (+vināseti). (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīrāpeti: {'def': 'jīreti (jīrati 的【使】), 使衰退，令消化。【过】jīrāpesi。【过分】jīrāpita。【现分】jīrāpenta。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'jīreti (jīrati 的【使】), 使衰退，令消化。【过】 ~esi。【过分】 jīrāpita。【现分】 jīrāpenta。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jīva: {'def': '【阳】生命。 ~danta, 【阳】生牙（活动物的牙）。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (nt.) the note of the jīvaka bird Sum. V. on D.III,201. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】生命。jīvadanta,【阳】生牙(活动物的牙)。yāva-jīva, 【阳】尽其寿。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (adj.-n.) [Sk. jīva, Idg. *gǔīǔos=Gr. bi/oQ, Lat. vīvus, Goth. quius, Ohg. queck, E. quick, Lith. gyvas] 1. the soul. Sabbe jīvā all the souls, enum^d with sattā pāṇā bhūta in the dialect used by the followers of Gosāla D.I,53 (=DA.I,161 jīvasaññī). “taṁ jīvaṁ taṁ sarīraṁ udāhu aññaṁ j. aññaṁ s.” (is the body the soul, or is the body one thing and the soul another?) see D.I,157, 188; II,333, 336, 339; S.IV,392 sq.; M.I,157, 426 sq.; A.II,41. -- Also in this sense at Miln.30, 54, 86. -- Vin.IV,34; S.III,215, 258 sq.; IV,286; V,418; A.V,31, 186, 193. -- 2. life, in yāvajīvaṁ as long as life lasts, for life, during (his) lifetime D.III,133; Vin.I,201; Dh.64; J.II,155; PvA.76.

--gāhaṁ (adv.) taken alive, in phrase j.° gaṇhāti or gaṇhāpeti S.I,84; J.I,180; II,404; cp. karamara; --loka the animate creation J.III,394; --sūla “life-pale,” a stake for execution J.II,443; --sokin (=sokajīvin) leading a life of sorrow J.VI,509. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīvaka: {'def': '(adj.)=jīva, in bandhu° N. of a plant VvA.43. -- f. °ikā q. v. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】生存的人，耆婆(人名)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. ジーヴアカ，耆婆［医者の名］. -komārabhacca童子医王耆婆，耆婆童子，ジーヴアカ. コーマーラバツチヤ', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典增补改订》日本水野弘元教授词数 1867.'}; {'def': '（居士名）基瓦咖，（古音译：）耆婆，耆域，时缚迦', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '【阳】生存的人，耆婆（人的名字）。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jīvamānaka: {'def': '(adj.) [ppr. med. of jīvati+ka] living, alive Vism.194. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīvana: {'def': '【中】生活，活命，生计。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】生活，活命，生计。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) living, means of subsistence, livelihood PvA.161. Spelt jīvāna (v. l. jīvino) (adj.) at J.III,353 (yācana°). (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīvati: {'def': '(jīv + a), 居住，维持生活。【过】 Jīvi。【现分】 jīvanta, jīvamāna。【独】jīvitvā。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic jīvati, cp. jinoti (jinvati); Dhtp 282: pāṇadhāraṇe *gQeịē =Gr. bi/omai & zw/w, zh_n; Lat. vīvo: Goth. ga-quiunan; Mhg. quicken, cp. E. quicken] to live, be alive, live by, subsist on (c. Instr. or nissāya). Imper. pres. jīva Sn.427, very freq. with ciraṁ live long . . ., as a salutation & thanksgiving. ciraṁ jīva J.VI,337; c. jīvāhi Sn.1029; Pv.II,3³³; c. jīvantu Pv.I,5⁵; -- pot. jīve Sn.440, 589; Dh.110; -- ppr. jīvaṁ Sn.427, 432; ‹-› ppr. med. jīvamāna J.I,307; PvA.39; -- inf. jīvituṁ J.I,263; Dh.123. -- Sn.84 sq., 613 sq., 804; Dh.197; J.III,26; IV,137; VI,183 (jīvare); PvA.111. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(jīv(梵jīv)活﹑住+a), 居住，活命，维持生活。【过】Jīvi。【现分】jīvanta, jīvamāna。【独】jīvitvā。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jīvaṁ-jīvaka: {'def': '(m. onom.) name of a bird, a sort of pheasant (or partridge?), which utters a note sounding like jīvaṁ jīva D.III,201; J.V,406, 416; VI,276, 538 [Fausböll reads jīvajīvaka in all the Jātaka passages. Speyer AvŚ II.227 has jīvañjīvaka]. With this cp. the Jain phrase jīvaṁjīveṇa gacchaï jīvaṁjīveṇaṁ ciṭṭhaï, Weber Bhagavatī pp. 289, 290, with doubtful interpretation (“living he goes with life”? or “he goes like the j. bird”?). (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīvikaṁ: {'def': 'kappeti, 谋生。miccnājīvena jīvikaṁ kappeti作邪命(以邪恶的生活方式来营生)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jīvikā: {'def': '【阴】生计，生活。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】生计。 Jīvikaŋ kappeti, 谋生。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. jīvaka] living, livelihood S.III,93; A.V,87, 210; J.IV,459; Miln.122; SnA 466. Freq. in combⁿ °ṁ kappeti to find or get one’s living: J.II,209; PvA.40, etc.; °kappaka finding one’s livelihood (c. ger. by) J.II,167. Cp. next. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīvin: {'def': '(adj.) (usually --°) living, leading a life (of . . .) S.I,42, 61; Sn.88, 181; Dh.164; PvA.27. Cp. dīgha°, dhamma°. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jīvita: {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic jīvita, orig. pp. of jīvati “that which is lived,” cp. same formation in Lat. vīta=*vīvita; Gr. biόth living, sustenace, & di/aita, “diet”] (individual) life, lifetime, span of life; living, livelihood (cp. jīvikā) Vin.II,191; S.I,42; IV,169, 213; M.II,73 (appaṁ); A.I,155, 255; III,72; IV,136 (appakaṁ parittaṁ); Sn.181, 440, 574, 577, 931, 1077; Dh.110, 111, 130; J.I,222; Pv.I,11¹¹ (ittaraṁ); II,6⁷ (vijahati); Dhs.19, 295; Vism.235, 236; Ps.II,245; PvA.40. -- jīvitā voropeti to deprive of life, to kill Vin.III,73; D.III,235; M.II,99; A.III,146, 436; IV,370 sq.; PvA.67.

--āsā the desire for life A.I,86; --indriya the faculty of life, vitality Vin.III,73; S.V,204; Kvu 8, 10; Miln.56; Dhs.19; Vism.32, 230 (°upaccheda destruction of life), 447 (def.); DhA.II,356 (°ṁ upacchindati to destroy life); VvA.72; --kkhaya the dissolution of life, i. e. death J.I,222; PvA.95, 111; --dāna “the gift of life,” saving or sparing life J.I,167; II,154; --nikanti desire for life A.IV,48; --parikkhārā (pl.) the requisites of life M.I,104 sq.; A.III,120; V,211; --pariyādāna the cessation or consummation of life D.I,46 (=DA.I,128); S.II,83; A.IV,13; --pariyosāna the end of life, i. e. death J.I,256; PvA.73; --mada the pride of life, enum^d under the 3 madā; viz. ārogya, yobbana, j.: of health, youth, life D.III,220; A.I,146; III,72; --rūpa (adj.) living (lifelike) J.II,190; --saṅkhaya=°khaya Sn.74; Dh.331; Nd² 262 (=°pariyosāna); --hetu (adv.) on the ground of life, for the sake of life A.IV,201, 270 (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】生命，一生。jīvitakkhaya,【阳】殒命，死亡。jīvitadāna,【中】救命。jīvitapariyosāna,【中】毕命，临终。jīvitamada,【阳】生活的自尊。jīvitavutti,【阴】生计。jīvitasaṅkhaya,【阳】生活的解决办法。jīvitāsā,【阴】想活命。jīvitindriya,【中】命根，活力。jīvitindriyassupaccheda, 【阳】命根全断。jīvitasaṁsaya,【阳】生命的危险。jīvitanavakakalāpa(jīvita-navaka-kalāpa), 【阳】命根九法聚。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】生命，一生。 ~kkhaya, 【阳】殒命，死亡。 ~dāna, 【中】救命。 ~pariyosāna, 【中】毕命，临终。 ~mada, 【阳】生活的自尊。 ~vutti,【阴】生计。 ~saṅkhaya, 【阳】生活的解决办法。 ~āsā, 【阴】想活命。 ~indriya, 【中】命根，活力。 ~saŋsaya, 【阳】生命的危险。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Jīvī: {'def': '【阳】活着者。 (在【合】中) 过…的生活。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】活著的人。(在【合】中) 过…的生活。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Jīyati: {'def': '(ji+ya), 被减少，失去，衰老，衰退。【过】jīyi。【现分】jīyamāna。【过分】jīna。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(ji + ya), 被减少，失去，衰老，衰退。【过】 jīyi。【现分】 jīyamāna。【过分】 jīna。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Pass. of ji, cp. Sk. jyāti & jīryate] to become diminished, to be deprived, to lose (cp. jayati, jāni); to decay; to become old (cp. jarati, jiṇṇa) jīyasi J.V,100; jīyanti J.III,336 (dhanā); jīyittha S.I,54; J.I,468; mā jīyi do not be deprived of (ratiṁ) J.IV,107. Koci kvaci na jīyati mīyati (cp. jāyati) D.II,30; cakkhūni jīyare the eyes will become powerless J.VI,528 (=jīyissanti); grd. jeyya: see ajeyya². Cp. parijīyati. Sometimes spelt jiyy°: jiyyati J.VI,150; jiyyāma J.II,75 (we lose= parihāyāma). pp. jīna, q. v. (Page 284)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Jūta: {'def': '(Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati),【中】赌博(gambling, playing at dice D.I,7 (jūtappamādaṭṭhāna cp. DA.I,85.)。jūtakāra,【阳】赌鬼，赌徒。jūtagīta, 赌场赌博歌(a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) J.I,289, 293)。Jūtamaṇḍala, 赌博台(dice board (=phalaka J.I,290) J.I,293.)。jūtasālā, 赌场(gambling hall J.VI,281.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. dyūta pp. of div, dīvyati, P. dibbati to play at dice] gambling, playing at dice D.I,7 (°ppamādaṭṭhāna cp. DA.I,85)≈; III,182, 186 (id.); J.I,290; III,198; VI,281; DhA.II,228. °ṁ kīḷati to play at d. J.I,289; III,187. -- See also dūta².

--gīta a verse sung at playing dice (for luck) J.I,289, 293; --maṇḍala dice board (=phalaka J.I,290) J.I,293. --sālā gambling hall J.VI,281. (Page 285)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】赌博。 ~kāra, 【阳】赌鬼，赌徒。(p137)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

K: {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第一个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 g。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '巴利文字母表的罗马化拼音第一个辅音字母。发音好像汉语中清音的 g。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Ka: {'def': '(从【疑代】 kiŋ), 谁，什么，哪个。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(从【疑代】kiṁ), 谁，什么，哪个。【阳】：单.主.ko；复.主ke；单.宾.kaṁ；复.宾.ke；单.具.kena；复.具.kehi﹑kebhi；单.离.kasmā﹑kamhā；复.离.kehi﹑kebhi；单.与.﹑属.kassa﹑kissa；复.与.﹑属.kesaṁ﹑kesānaṁ；单.处.kasmiṁ﹑kamhi(﹑kismiṁ﹑kimhi)；复.处.kesu。【阴】：单.主kā；复.主.kā﹑kāyo；单.宾.kaṁ；复.宾.kā﹑kāyo；单.具.kāya；复.具.kāhi﹑kābhi；单.离kāya；复.离.kāhi﹑kābhi；单.与.﹑属.kāya﹑kassā；复.与.﹑属.kāsaṁ﹑kāsānaṁ；单.处.kassā﹑kāyaṁ﹑kassaṁ；复.处.kāsu。【中】：单.主.kiṁ；复.主.kāni；单.宾.kiṁ；复.宾.kāni。Taṁ kissa hetu? 什么原因呢？(所以者何?)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kabala: {'def': '【阳、中】小块，一口。~liṅkāra, 【阳】许多的。~liṅkārāhāra, 【阳】实质性的食物。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa Divy 290 (+ālopa), 298, 470] a small piece (=ālopa PvA.70), a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid (i. e. as much as is made into a ball with the fingers when eating), or liquid Vin.II,214; It.18=J.III,409; IV,93; Dh.324; Miln.180, 400; Bdhd 69; DhA.II,65; PvA.39; Mhvs 19, 74. Kabale kabale on every morsel J.I,68; Miln.231; --sakabala appl. to the mouth, with the mouth full of food Vin.II,214; IV, 195; -- Sometimes written kabala.

--âvacchedaka choosing portions of a mouthful, nibbling at a morsel Vin.II,214; IV,196. (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'Kavala, Kavaḷa, (cp. Sk. kavala BSk. kavaḍa),【阳】【中】小块，一口(a small piece (=ālopa PvA.70), a mouthful, always appl. to food, either solid or liquid)。kabaliṅkāra,【阳】许多的。Kabaliṅkārāhāra(kabaḷīkāro āhāra, kabaḷiṁkāra āhāra),【阳】实质性的食物，段食(时节生色，或色聚中的食素oja)。kabaliṅkārāhārabhakkha-deva﹐搏食天，以块状食物为食之天界，指欲界诸天。kabaliṅkāro āhāro oḷāriko va sukhumo va﹐麁细之抟食。印度人一般之食法，将食物以手捏成团而食之，故谓之抟食。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kabaliṅkāra: {'def': '(adj.) [kabala in compⁿ form kabalī° before kr & bhū; kabalin for kabalī°] always in combⁿ with āhāra, food “made into a ball,” i. e. eatable, material food, as one of the 4 kinds of food (see stock phrase k° āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā . . . at M.I,48= S.II,11, 98=D.III,228, 276; Bdhd 135) Dhs.585, 646 (where fully described), 816; Miln.245; Vism.236, 341, 450, 616; Bdhd 69, 74; DA.I,120. Written kabalīkāra nearly always in Burmese, and sometimes in Singh. MSS.; s. also Nett 114--118.

--āhāra-bhakkha (of attā, soul) feeding on material food D.I,34, 186, 195; --bhakkha, same A.III,192=V.336 (appl. to the kāmâvacara devas); DA.I,120. (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kabara: {'def': '【形】有斑点的，杂色的，斑驳的，多样化的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有斑点的，杂色的，斑驳的，多样化的。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. kabara] variegated, spotted, striped; mixed, intermingled; in patches Vism.190. Of a cow (°gāvī) DhA.I,71 (°go-rūpa) ibid. 99; of a calf (°vaccha) J.V,106; of a dog (°vaṇṇa=sabala q. v.) J.VI,107; of leprosy J.V,69; of the shade of trees (°cchāya, opp. sanda°) M.I,75; J.IV,152; DhA.I,375.

--kucchi having a belly striped with many colours, of a monster J.I,273; --kuṭṭha a kind of leprosy J.V,69; --maṇi the cat’s eye, a precious stone, also called masāragalla, but also an emerald; both are prob. varieties of the cat’s eye VvA.167, 304. (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kabaḷikā: {'def': '(cp. Sk. kavalikā),【阴】绷带(包紮受伤之用)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [cp. Sk. kavalikā] a bandage, a piece of cloth put over a sore or wound Vin.I,205 (cp. Vin. Texts II.58 n⁴). (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kabba: {'def': 'Kabya,(cp. Sk. kāvya),【中】诗，诗的写作(a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in)。kabbaṁ karoti, 写歌(to compose a song)。kabbakaraṇa,作诗(making poems)。kabbakāra,诗人(=kabyakāraka, a poet)。kabyalaṅkāra, 写歌颂句(庄严偈)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】诗，诗的写作。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kāvya] a poem, poetical composition, song, ballad in °ṁ karoti to compose a song J.VI,410; --karaṇa making poems DA.I,95; and --kāra a poet Kh 21; J.VI,410. (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kabya: {'def': '=kabba in cpds. °âlaṅkāra composing in beautiful verse, a beautiful poem in °ṁ bandhati, to compose a poem ibid.; and --kāraka a poet, ibid. (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kaca: {'def': '[Sk. kaca, cp. kāñcī and Latin cingo, cicatrix] the hair (of the head), in °kalāpa a mass of hair, tresses Dāvs.IV,51. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacavara: {'def': '【阳】扫除，垃圾。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[to kaca?] 1. sweepings, dust, rubbish (usually in combⁿ with chaḍḍeti and sammajjati) J.I,292; III,163; IV,300; Vism.70; DA.I,7; DhA.I,52; SnA 311. -- 2. rags, old clothes SA 283 (=pilotikā).

--chaḍḍana throwing out sweepings, in °pacchi a dust basket, a bin J.I,290. --chaḍḍanaka a dust pan J.I,161 (+ muṭṭhi-sammjjanī). --chaḍḍani a dust pan DhA.III,7 (sammajjanī+). --chaḍḍikā (dāsī) a maid for sweeping dust, a cinderella DhA.IV,210. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.尘埃，尘土(sweepings, dust, rubbish)。2.破布(rags, old clothes SA 283 (=pilotikā))。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kaccha: {'def': '² (adj.) [ger. of kath] fit to be spoken of A.I,197 (Com.=kathetuṁ yutta). akaccha ibid. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】 1. 沼泽地。 2. 腋窝。 ~antara, 【中】腋窝之下，王宫内部。 ~puṭa, 【阳】叫卖小贩。【形】挑担子的人。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '2, (ger. of kath)适合说( fit to be spoken)。akaccha,【反】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '1(cp. Sk. kaccha),【阳】【中】1.沼泽地(marshy land, marshes)，长草、芦苇(long grass, reed)。2.箭(an arrow (made of reed))。kacchantara,【中】腋窝之下，王宫内部。kacchapuṭa,【阳】叫卖小贩。【形】挑担子的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ (nt.) [cp. Sk. kaccha, prob. dial.] 1. marshy land, marshes; long grass, rush, reed S.I,52 (te hi sotthiṁ gamissanti kacche vāmakase magā), 78 (parūḷha k-nakha-lomā with nails and hair like long-grown grass, cp. same at J.III,315 & Sdhp.104); J.V,23 (carāmi kacchāni vanāni ca); VI,100 (parūḷha-kacchā tagarā); Sn.20 (kacche rūḷhatiṇe caranti gāvo); SnA 33 (pabbata° opp. to nadī°, mountain, & river marshes). Kern (Toev. II.139) doubts the genuineness of the phrase parūḷha°. -- 2. an arrow (made of reed) M.I,429 (kaṇḍo . . . yen’amhi viddho yadi vā kacchaṁ yadi vā ropiman ti). (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchaka: {'def': '¹ a kind of fig-tree DA.I,81. -- 2. the tree Cedrela Toona Vin.IV,35; S.V,96; Vism.183. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】无花果树(figtree)。音译：揵遮耶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】无花果树。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kacchantara: {'def': '(nt.) [see kacchā²] 1. interior, dwelling, apartment VvA.50 (=nivesa). -- 2. the armpit: see upa°. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchapa: {'def': '[Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kaśyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā] a tortoise, turtle S.IV,177 (kummo kacchapo); in simile of the blind turtle (kāṇo k.) M.III,169=S.V,455; Th.2, 500 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1907, 73, 174).-f. kacchapinī a female t. Miln.67.

--lakkhaṇa “tortoise-sign,” i. e. fortune-telling on the ground of a tortoise being found in a painting or an ornament; a superstition included in the list of tiracchāna-vijjā D.I,9≈; DA.I,94. --loma “tortoise-hair,” i. e. an impossibility, absurdity J.III,477, cp. sasavisāṇa; °maya made of t. hair J.III,478. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】龟。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. kacchapa, dial. fr. *kawyapa, orig. Ep of kumma, like magga of paṭipadā),【阳】龟(a tortoise, turtle)。kāṇo kacchapo, 盲龟。Watapañcāwatka(一百五十赞佛颂), v.5.︰Mahārṇavayugacchidrakūrmagrīvārpaṇopamam (譬如巨海内，盲龟遇楂穴)。「楂ㄔㄚˊ」︰水中浮木。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kacchapaka: {'def': 'see hattha°. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchapuṭa: {'def': '[see kaccha¹] reed-basket, sling-basket, pingo, in --vāṇija a trader, hawker, pedlar J.I,111. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchati: {'def': '¹ Pass. of katheti (ppr. kacchamāna A.III,181). -- 2. Pass. of karoti. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchikāra: {'def': 'see kacci°. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchu: {'def': '(cp. Sk. kacchu),【阴】1.倒鈎毛黧豆(Carpopogon pruriens其果实能使人发痒，见 Kapikacchu)。2.痒，结疤(itch, scab, a cutaneous disease)。kacchuyā khajjati﹐为痒所食( “to be eaten by itch”)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】痒，结疤，倒钩毛黧豆（其果实能使人发痒，见 Kapikacchu）。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Derivation uncertain, cp. Sk. kacchu, dial. for kharju: perhaps connected with khajjati, eating, biting] 1. the plant Carpopogon pruriens, the fruit of which causes itch when applied to the skin DhA.III,297 (mahā° --phalāni). -- 2. itch, scab, a cutaneous disease, usually in phrase kacchuyā khajjati “to be eaten by itch” (cp. E. itch›eat) Vin.I,202, 296; J.V,207; Pv.II,3¹¹ (cp. kapi°); Vism.345; DhA.I,299.

--cuṇṇa the powdered fruit of Carpopogon pruriens, causing itch DhA.III,297. --piḷakā scab & boils J.V,207. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kacchā: {'def': '【阴】缠腰布，遮羞布，修饰象的带。 ~bandhana, 【中】缠着腰带，围着遮羞布。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (f.) & kaccha (m. nt.) [Derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣa & kakṣā, Lat. coxa, Ohg. hahsa]; the armpit Vin.I,15 (addasa . . . kacche vīṇaṁ . . . aññissā kacche ālambaraṁ); S.I,122=Sn.449 (sokaparetassa vīṁā kacchā abhassatha); It.76 (kacchehi sedā muccanti: sweat drops from their armpits); J.V,434=DhA.IV,197 (thanaṁ dasseti k°ṁ dass° nābhiṁ dass°); J.V,435 (thanāni k° āni ca dassayantī; expl^d on p. 437 by upakacchaka); VI,578. The phrase parūḷha-kaccha-nakhaloma means “with long-grown finger-nails and long hair in the armpit,” e. g. S.I,78.

--loma (kaccha°) hair growing in the armpit Miln.163 (should probably be read parūḷha-k.-nakha-l., as above). (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [derivation unknown, cp. Sk. kakṣā, Lat. cohus, incohare & see details under gaha¹] 1. enclosure, denoting both the enclosing and the enclosed, i. e. wall or room: see kacchantara.-2. an ornament for head & neck (of an elephant), veilings, ribbon Vv 21⁹=69⁹ (=gīveyyaka VvA); J.IV,395 (kacchaṁ nāgānaṁ bandhatha gīveyyaṁ paṭimuñcatha). 3. belt, loin- or waist-cloth (cp. next) Vin.II,319; J.V,306 (=saṁvelli); Miln.36; DhA.I,389. (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. kaksā),【阴】缠腰布，遮羞布，修饰象的带。kacchābandhana,【中】缠著腰带，围著遮羞布。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kacci: {'def': 'Kaccid (Sk. kaccid=kad+cid, see kad°),【形】疑问代词(常有 nu, nu kho(或许)虚词相随)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】疑问代词（常有 nu, nu kho 虚词相随）。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '& kaccid (indecl.) [Sk. kaccid=kad+cid, see kad°] indef. interrog. particle expressing doubt or suspense, equivalent to Gr. a)/n, Lat. ne, num, nonne: then perhaps; I doubt whether, I hope, I am not sure, etc., Vin.I,158, 350; D.I,50 (k. maṁ na vañcesi I hope you do not deceive me), 106; S.III,120, 125; Sn. 335, 354, p. 87; J.I,103, 279; V,373; DhA.II,39 (k. tumhe gatā “have you not gone,” answer: āma “yes”); PvA.27 (k. tan dānaṁ upakappati does that gift really benefit the dead?), 178 (k. vo piṁḍapāto laddho have you received any alms?). Cp. kin. -- Often comb^d with other indef. particles, e. g. kacci nu Vin.I,41; J.III,236; VI,542; k. nu kho “perhaps” (Ger. etwa, doch nicht) J.I,279; k. pana J.I,103. -- When followed by nu or su the original d reappears according to rules of Sandhi: kaccinnu J.II,133; V,174, 348; VI, 23; kaccissu Sn.1045, 1079 (see Nd² 186). (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kaccikāra: {'def': 'a kind of large shrub, the Caesalpina Digyna J.VI,535 (should we write with BB kacchi°?). (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kadala: {'def': '(nt.) the plantain tree Kacc 335. (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kadali: {'def': '【阴】车前草树，旗帜。~phala, 【中】香蕉。~miga, 【阳】鹿皮很尊贵的一种鹿。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】车前草(plantain)，旗帜。kadaliphala,【中】香蕉。kadalimiga,【阳】羚鹿鹿皮。kadalimigapavara-paccattharaṇa,(最好的)羚鹿(皮制)的毛毡。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kadalī: {'def': '² (f.) a kind of deer, an antelope only in °miga J.V,406, 416; VI,539; DA.I,87; and °pavara-pacc.‹-› attharaṇa (nt.) the hide of the k. deer, used as a rug or cover D.I,7=A.I,181=Vin.I,192=II.163, 169; sim. D. II.187; (adj.) (of pallaṅka) A.I,137=III,50=IV.394. (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '¹ (f.) [Sk. kadalī] -- 1. the plantain, Musa sapientium. Owing to the softness and unsubstantiality of its trunk it is used as a frequent symbol of unsubstantiality, transitoriness and worthlessness. As the plantain or banana plant always dies down after producing fruit, is destroyed as it were by its own fruit, it is used as a simile for a bad man destroyed by the fruit of his own deeds: S.I,154=Vin.II,188=S.II,241=A.II,73 =DhA.III,156; cp. Miln.166; -- as an image of unsubstantiality, Cp. III,2⁴. The tree is used as ornament on great festivals: J.I,11; VI,590 (in simile), 592; VvA.31. -- 2. a flag, banner, i. e. plantain leaves having the appearance of banners (-dhaja) J.V,195; VI,412. In cpds. kadali°.

--khandha the trunk of the plantain tree, often in similes as symbol of worthlessness, e. g. M.I,233= S.III,141=IV.167; Vism.479; Nd² 680 A^II.; J.VI,442; as symbol of smoothness and beauty of limbs VvA.280; --taru the plantain tree Dāvs.V,49; --toraṇa a triumphal arch made of pl. stems and leaves Mhbv 169; --patta a pl. leaf used as an improvised plate to eat from J.V,4; DhA.I,59; --phala the fruit of the plantain J.V,37. (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kadamba: {'def': '(cp. Sk. kadamba] the kadamba tree, Nauclea cordifolia (with orange-coloured, fragrant blossoms) J. VI,535, 539; Vism.206; DhA.I,309 (°puppha); Mhvs 25, 48 (id.). (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】迦兰波树，东印度团花(东印度群岛的茜草科的一种遮阳乔木 (Anthocephalus cadamba)，木材硬、黄色，花簇生、球形、橙色芳香)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】迦兰波树，东印度团花（东印度群岛的茜草科的一种遮阳乔木 (Anthocephalus cadamba)，木材硬、黄色，花簇生、球形、橙色芳香）。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kadanna: {'def': '【中】发霉的饭，坏的食物。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】发霉的饭，坏的食物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kadara: {'def': '(adj.) miserable J.II,136 (expl^d as lūkha, kasira). (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kadariya: {'def': '【形】小气的，吝啬的,【中】贪财，小气。kadariyatā,【阴】吝啬，小气。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. kadarya, kad + arya?] mean, miserly, stingy, selfish; usually expl^d by thaddhamaccharī (PvA.102; DhA.III,189, 313), and mentioned with maccharī, freq. also with paribhāsaka S.I,34, 96; A.II,59; IV,79 sq.; Dh.177, 223; J.V,273; Sn.663; Vv 29⁵. As cause of Peta birth freq. in Pv., e. g. I.9³; II,7⁷; IV,1⁴⁸; PvA.25, 99, 236. -- (nt.) avarice, stinginess, selfishness, grouped under macchariya Dhs.1122; Sn.362 (with kodha). (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】小气的，吝啬的, 【中】贪财，小气。~tā, 【阴】吝啬，小气。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kadariyatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. last] stinginess, niggardliness D.II,243; Miln.180; PvA.45. (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kaddama: {'def': '【阳】泥，泥潭。kaddamabahula,【形】满地烂泥。kaddamodaka,【中】泥水。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Derivation unknown. Sk. kardama] mud, mire, filth Nd² 374 (=paṅka); J.I,100; III,220 (written kadamo in verse and kaddemo in gloss); VI,240, 390; PvA.189 (=paṅka), 215; compared with moral im‹-› purities J.III,290 & Miln.35. a° free from mud or dirt, clean Vin.II,201, of a lake J.III,289; fig. pure of character J.III,290. kaddamīkata made muddy or dirty, defiled J.VI,59 (kilesehi).

--odaka muddy water Vin.II,262; Vism.127. --parikhā a moat filled with mud, as a defence J.VI,390; --bahula (adj.) muddy, full of mud DhA.I,333; (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】泥，泥潭。~bahula, 【形】满地烂泥。~modaka, 【中】泥水。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kad°: {'def': '[old form of interr. pron. nt., equal to kiṁ; cp. (Vedic) kad in kadarthaṁ=kiṁarthaṁ to what purpose] orig. “what?” used adverbially; then indef. “any kind of,” as (na) kac(--cana) “not at all”; kac-cid “any kind of; is it anything? what then?” Mostly used in disparaging sense of showing inferiority, contempt, or defectiveness, and equal to kā° (in denoting badness or smallness, e. g. kākaṇika, kāpurisa, see also kantāra & kappaṭa), kiṁ°, ku.° For relation of ku›ka cp. kutra› kattha & kadā.

--anna bad food Kacc 178. --asana id. Kacc 178. --dukkha (?) great evil (=death) VvA.316 (expl^d as maraṇa, cp. kaṭuka). (Page 184)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kadā: {'def': '【副】什么时候?', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(indecl.) [Vedic kadā. Cp. tadā, sadā in Pali, and perhaps Latin quando]. interr. adv. when? (very often foll. by fut.) Th.1, 1091--1106; J.II,212; VI, 46; DhA.I,33; PvA.2. -- Comb^d with --ssu J.V,103, 215; VI,49 sq. --ci [cid] indef. -- 1. at some time A.IV,101. -- 2. sometimes J.I,98; PvA.271. -- 3. once upon a time Dāvs.I,30. -- 4. perhaps, may be J.I,297; VI,364. + eva: kadācideva VvA.213; --kadāci kadāci from time to time, every now and then J.I,216; IV, 120; DhsA.238; PvA.253. --kadāci karahaci at some time or other, at times A.I,179; Miln.73; DhA.III,362. --na kadāci at no time, never S.I,66; J.V,434; VI,363; same with mā k° J.VI,310; Mhvs 25, 113; cp. kudācana. --kadāc‹-› --uppattika (adj.) happening only sometimes, occasional Miln.114. (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【副】什么时侯？(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kadāci: {'def': '【无】有时。~karahaci, 【无】很少，有时。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '﹐【副】某时(sometime, once (upon a time))。kathañci﹐某方式(somehow)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【无】有时。Kadācikarahaci(kadāci karahaci),【无】很少，有时。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kahaŋ: {'def': '【副】哪里？(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kahaṁ: {'def': '(Vedic kuha),【副】哪里?( where? whither?)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Vedic kuha; for a: u cp. kad°.] interr. adv. where? whither? Vin.I,217; D.I,151; Sn.p. 106; J.II,7; III,76; V,440. -- k-nu kho where then? D.I,92; II,143, 263. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kahāpaṇa: {'def': '[doubtful as regards etym.; the (later) Sk. kārṣāpaṇa looks like an adaptation of a dial. form] 1. A square copper coin M.II,163; A.I,250; V,83 sq.; Vin.II,294; III, 238; DhsA.280 (at this passage included under rajataṁ, silver, together with loha-māsaka, dārumāsaka and jatu-māsaka); S.I,82; A.I,250; Vin.II,294; IV,249; J.I,478, 483; II,388; Mhvs 30¹⁴. The extant specimens in our museums weigh about 5/6 of a penny, and the purchasing power of a k. in our earliest records seems to have been about a florin. -- Frequent numbers as denoting a gift, a remuneration or alms, are 100,000 (J.II,96); 18 koṭis (J.I,92); 1,000 (J.II,277, 431; V,128, 217; PvA.153, 161); 700 (J.III,343); 100 (DhA.III,239); 80 (PvA.102); 10 or 20 (DhA.IV,226); 8 (which is considered, socially, almost the lowest sum J.IV,138; I,483). A nominal fine of 1 k. (=a farthing) Miln.193. -- ekaṁ k° pi not a single farthing J.I,2; similarly eka-kahāpaṇen’eva Vism.312. -- Various qualities of a kahāpaṇa are referred to by Bdhgh in similes at Vism.437 and 515. Black kahāpaṇas are mentioned at DhA.III,254. -- See Rh. Davids, Ancient Measures of Ceylon; Buddh. India, pp. 100--102, fig. 24; Miln.trsl. I.239.

--gabbha a closet for storing money, a safe DhA.IV,104; --vassa a shower of money Dh.186 (=DhA.III,240). (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】迦哈钵拿(硬币，大约值12 pence(便士)的英国旧币。1971年未进行币值十进位之前，一英镑等於20先令，而1先令又等於12便士。换言之，一英镑等於240便士。)。kahāpaṇaka,【中】钱刑，以切小肉块的方式来拷问。《普端严》(Sp.Pārā.III,689.)︰kahāpaṇoti sovaṇṇamayo vā rūpiyamayo vā pākatiko vā.(货币︰金制的、银制的、天然的)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】迦利沙钵拿硬币〔大约值 12½ 便士的英国旧币〕。 ~ka,【中】钱刑以切小肉块的方式来拷问。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kahāpaṇaka: {'def': '(nt.) N. of a torture which consisted in cutting off small pieces of flesh, the size of a kahāpaṇa, all over the body, with sharp razors M.I,87=A.I,47, II.122; cp. Miln.97, 290, 358. (Page 202)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kajjala: {'def': '【中】煤烟，烟灰。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn] lamp-black or soot, used as a collyrium Vin.II,50 (read k. for kapalla, cp. J.P.T.S. 1887, 167). (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(Sk. kajjala, dial. fr. kad+jala, from jalati, jval, orig. burning badly or dimly, a dirty burn),【中】煤烟，烟灰(lamp-black or soot, used as a collyrium)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kajjopakkamaka: {'def': 'a kind of gem Miln.118 (vajira k. phussarāga lohitaṅka). (Page 175)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakaca: {'def': '(onomat. to sound root kr, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca),【阳】锯子(a saw)。kakacūpama, kakacovāda, 锯子的譬喻。kakacakhaṇḍa, 锯木屑(fragment or bit of saw)。kakacadanta, 齿锯(tooth of a saw, DA.I,37 (kakaca-danta-pantiyaṁ kīḷamāna)) 。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】锯子。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[onomat. to sound root kṛ, cp. note on gala; Sk. krakaca] a saw Th.1, 445; J.IV,30; V,52; VI,261; DA.I,212; in simile °-ūpama ovāda M.I,129. Another simile of the saw (a man sawing a tree) is found at Ps.I,171, quoted & referred to at Vism.280, 281.

--khaṇḍa fragment or bit of saw J.I,321. --danta tooth of a saw, DA.I,37 (kakaca-danta-pantiyaṁ kīḷamāna). (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakaṇṭaka: {'def': '【阳】变色龙。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'the chameleon J.I,442, 487; II,63; VI,346; VvA.258. (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】变色龙(chameleon)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kakka: {'def': '² [cp. Sk. karka) a kind of gem; a precious stone of yellowish colour VvA.111. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】浆糊，多油物质的沉淀物。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ [cp. Sk. kalka, also kalaṅka & kalusa] a sediment deposited by oily substances, when ground; a paste Vin.I,205 (tila°), 255. Three kinds enumerated at J. VI,232: sāsapa° (mustard-paste), mattika° (fragrant earth-paste, cp. Fuller’s earth), tila° (sesamum paste). At DA.I,88, a fourth paste is given as haliddi°, used before the application of face powder (poudre de riz, mukha-cuṇṇa). Cp. kakku. (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】浆糊，多油物质的沉淀物。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kakkara: {'def': '[onomat, cp. Sk. kṛkavāku cock, Gr. kέrkac, kerkiζ, Lat. querquedula, partridge; sound-root kṛ, see note on gala] a jungle cock used as a decoy J.II,162, purāṇa°, II.161; cp. dīpaka¹ & see Kern, Toev. p. 118: K°-Jātaka, N° 209. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkaratā: {'def': '(f.) roughness, harshness, deceitfulness, Pug.19, 23. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkariya: {'def': '(nt.) harshness, Pug.19, 23. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkaru: {'def': 'a kind of creeper (°jātāni=valliphalāni) J.VI,536. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkasa: {'def': '(adj.) [Sk. karkaśa to root kṛ as in kakkaṭaka] rough, hard, harsh, esp. of speech (vācā para-kaṭukā Dhs.1343), M.I,286=Dhs.1343; A.V,265=283, 293; DhsA.396. -- akakkasa: smooth Sn.632; J.III,282; V,203, 206, 405, 406 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1891--93, 13); akakkasaṅga, with smooth limbs, handsome, J.V,204. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的(roughness)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kakkassa: {'def': 'roughness Sn.328, Miln.252. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkaṭa: {'def': 'kakkaṭaka, 【阳】螃蟹。 ~yanta, 【中】为扎牢着墙而一端有钩的梯。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'kakkaṭaka(希腊文karkinos),【阳】螃蟹(a crab；台语：蟳cim5)。kakkaṭayanta,【中】为紮牢著墙而一端有鈎的梯。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'a large deer (?) J.VI,538 (expl^d as mahāmiga). (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkaṭaka: {'def': '[cp. Sk. karkaṭa, karkara “hard,” kaṅkata “mail”; cp. Gr. karki/nos & Lat. cancer; also B. Sk. kakkaṭaka hook] a crab S.I,123; M.I,234; J.I,222; Vv 54⁶ (VvA.243, 245); DhA.III,299 (mama . . . kakkaṭakassa viya akkhīni nikkhamimsu, as a sign of being in love). Cp. kakkhaḷa.

--nala a kind of sea-reed of reddish colour, J.IV,141; also a name for coral, ibid. --magga fissures in canals; frequented by crabs, DhsA.270. --yantaka a ladder with hooks at one end for fastening it to a wall, Mhvs IX.17. --rasa a flavour made from crabs, crab-curry, VvA.243. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkhalatta: {'def': '(nt.) hardness, roughness, harshness Vin.II,86; Vbh.82; Vism.365; cp. M.Vastu I.166: kakkhaṭatva. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkhaḷa: {'def': '(kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara=P. kakkaṭaka),【形】1.粗糙的，硬的(rough, hard, harsh)。2.残酷的( cruel, fierce, pitiless)。kakkhaḷatā,【阴】粗糙的事物，坚硬。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[kakkhaṭa, cp. Sk. karkara=P. kakkaṭaka] 1. rough, hard, harsh (lit. & fig.) Dhs.648 (opp. muduka Dhs.962 (rūpaṁ paṭhavīdhātu: kakkhalaṁ kharagataṁ kakkhaḷattaṁ kakkhaḷabhāvo); Vism.349 (=thaddha), 591, 592 (°lakkhaṇa); DhA.II,95; IV,104; Miln.67, 112; PvA.243 (=asaddha, akkosakāraka, opp. muduka); VvA.138 (=pharusa). -- 2. cruel, fierce, pitiless J.I,187, 266; II,204; IV162, 427. Akakkhaḷa not hard or harsh, smooth, pleasant DhsA.397. --°vacata, kind speech, ibid. (=apharusa °vācatā mudu°).

--kathā hard speech, cruel words J.VI,561. --kamma cruelty, atrocity J.III,481. --bhāva rigidity Dhs.962 (see kakkhala) MA 21; harshness, cruelty J.III,480. a° absence of hardness or rigidity DhsA.151. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】粗糙的，硬的。 ~tā, 【阴】粗糙的事物，坚硬。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kakkhaḷatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] hardness, rigidity, Dhs.859; Vbh.82; J.V,167; DhsA.166.-akakkhaḷatā absence of roughness, pleasantness Dhs.44, 45, 324, 640, 728, 859; DhsA.151; VvA.214 (=saṇha). (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkhaḷiya: {'def': 'hardness, rigidity, roughness, Vbh.350. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkola: {'def': 'see takkola. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkoṭaka: {'def': '(?) KhA 38, spelt takk° at Vism.258. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakku: {'def': '[cp. kakka=kalka] a powder for the face, slightly adhesive, used by ladies, J.V,302 where 5 kinds are enum^d: sāsapa°, loṇa°, mattika°, tila°, haliddi°. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkāreti: {'def': '[*kaṭ-kāreti to make kaṭ, see note on gala for sound-root kṛ & cp. khaṭakhaṭa] to make the sound kak, to half choke J.II,105. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkārika: {'def': 'Kakkāruka(fr. karkaru),【阴】黄瓜类(cucumber)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(and °uka) [fr. karkaru] a kind of cucumber Vv 33²⁸=eḷāluka VvA.147. (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkāru: {'def': '(Sk. karkāru, connected with karkaṭaka] 1. a pumpkin-gourd, the Beninkasa Cerifera J.VI,536: kakkārujātāni=valliphalāni (reading kakkaru to be corr.). -- 2. a heavenly flower J.III,87, 88=dibbapuppha (Page 174)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakkārī: {'def': '【阴】黄瓜。(p90)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kaku: {'def': '【阳】结，顶点，突出的角落，峰丘。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Brh. kakud, cp. kākud hollow, curvature, Lat. cacumen, & cumulus] a peak, summit, projecting corner S.I,100 (where satakkatu in Text has to be corrected to satakkaku: megho thanayaṁ vijjumālā satakkaku. Com. explⁿ sikhara, kūṭa) A.III,34 (=AA 620~kūṭa). Cp. satakkaku & Morris, J.P.T.S. 1891--93, 5. (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】山峰，顶点，突出的角落(a peak, summit, projecting corner)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kakudha: {'def': '(cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above),【阳】(公牛的)驼峰，鸡冠，阿见(产於热带亚洲的榄仁树属，参考 Ajjuna)。kakudhabhaṇḍa 【中】皇室的国旗，王位的五个标志(如王冠、宝剑、华盖、拖鞋和犁牛尾拂)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. kakuda, and kaku above] 1. the hump on the shoulders of an Indian bull J.II,225; J.VI,340. ‹-› 2. a cock’s comb: see sīsa kakudha. -- 3. a king’s symbol or emblem (nt.) J.V,264. There are 5 such insignia regis, regalia: s. kakudha-bhaṇḍa. -- 4. a tree, the Terminalia Arjuna, Vin.I,28; J.VI,519; kakudharukkha DhA.IV,153. Note. On pakudha as twin-form of ka° see Trenckner, J.P.T.S. 1908, 108.

--phala the fruit of the kakudha tree Mhvs XI.14, where it is also said to be a kind of pearl; see mutta. --bhaṇḍa ensign of royalty J.I,53; IV,151; V,289 (=sakāyura). The 5 regalia (as mentioned at J.V,264) are vāḷavījanī, uṇhīsa, khagga, chatta, pādukā: the fan, diadem, sword, canopy, slippers. -- pañcavidha-k° PvA.74. (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】（公牛的）驼峰，鸡冠，阿见（参考 Ajjuna）。~bhaṇḍa 【中】皇室的国旗，王位的五个标志（如王冠，宝剑，华盖，拖鞋和牦牛尾拂）。(p89)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kakusandha: {'def': '咖古三塔佛（拘留孙佛）。现在贤劫的咖古三塔佛；
在《长部·大传记经》中说：
“诸比库，于此贤劫中，咖古三塔世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者曾出现于世。”（D.14）', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}; {'def': '（诸佛名）咖古三塔，（古音译：）拘留孙，拘楼秦', 'xr': '《巴利语汇解》与《巴利新音译》玛欣德尊者'}

Kakutthaka: {'def': 'see ku°. (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kakuṭa: {'def': 'a dove, pigeon, only in cpds.:

--pāda dove-footed (i. e. having beautiful feet) DhA.I,119; f. pādī appl. to Apsaras, J.II,93; DhA.I,119; Miln.169. (Page 173)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '鸠，鸽子(a dove, pigeon)。kakuṭapāda,【阳】鸠脚(dove-footed; i. e. having beautiful feet. DhA.I,119) 。kakuṭapādī,【阴】鸠脚(J.II.93; DhA.I,119; Miln.169.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kala: {'def': '【阳】甜低音。kalakala,【阳】乱杂音。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】甜低音。 ~kala,【阳】乱杂音。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalabha: {'def': '[cp. Sk. kalabha] the young of an elephant: see hatthi° and cp. kalāra. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】象崽，象仔。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】象崽，象仔。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalaha: {'def': '[cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal] quarrel, dispute, fight A.I,170; IV,196, 401; Sn.862, 863 (+vivāda); J.I,483; Nd² 427; DhA.III,256 (udaka° about the water); IV,219; Sdhp.135. °ṁ udīreti to quarrel J.V,395; karoti id. J.I,191, 404; PvA.13; vaḍḍheti to increase the tumult, noise J.V,412; DhA.III,255. -- a° harmony, accord, agreement S.I,224; mahā° a serious quarrel, a row J.IV,88.

--âbhirata delighting in quarrels, quarrelsome Sn.276; Th.1, 958. --ṁkara picking up a quarrel J.VI,45; --karaṇa quarrelling, fighting J.V,413; --kāraka (f.-ī) quarrelsome, pugnacious A.IV,196; Vin.I,328; II,1; --kāraṇa the cause or reason of a dispute J.III,151; VI,336; --jāta “to whom a quarrel has arisen,” quarrelling, disputing A.I,70; Vin.I,341; II,86, 261; Ud.67; J.III,149; --pavaḍḍhanī growth or increase of quarrels, prolongation of strife (under 6 evils arising from intemperance) D.III,182=DhsA.380; --vaḍḍhana (nt.) inciting & incitement to quarrel J.V,393, 394; --sadda brawl, dispute J.VI,336. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】吵架，争论。 ~kāraka,【形】吵架者。 ~kārana,【中】争论的因素。 ~sadda,【阳】吵闹，口角，争论。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(cp. Sk. kalaha, fr. kal发声),【阳】吵架，争论，动干戈(quarrel, dispute, fight)。kalahakāraka,【形】吵架者。kalahakārana,【中】争论的因素。kalahasadda,【阳】吵闹，口角，争论。akalaha,【阳】不吵闹，不争论。mahākalaha,【阳】大吵(a serious quarrel)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalakala: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Sk. kala] any indistinct and confused noise Mhbv 23 (of the tramping of an army); in --mukhara sounding confusedly (of the ocean) ibid. 18. Cp. karakarā. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalala: {'def': '【中】泥，泥沼。 ~makkhita,【形】泥涂的，泥弄脏的。 ~rūpa,【中】胎儿形成的第一个阶段。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】泥，泥沼。kalalamakkhita,【形】泥涂的，泥弄脏的。kalalarūpa,【中】歌罗罗、羯剌蓝、羯罗蓝。意译为凝滑、杂秽。指初受胎后之七日间。SA.10.1./I,300.：atha kho tīhi jāti-uṇṇaṁsūhi katasuttagge saṇṭhitatelabinduppamāṇaṁ kalalaṁ hoti.(三事(和合)生的歌罗罗，像线端上纤毛住立的油滴大小(按：受精卵大小直径约为0.2mm))', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m. nt.) 1. mud J.I,12, 73; Miln.125, 324, 346; Mhbv 150; PvA.215 (=kaddama); DhA.III,61; IV,25. -- su° “well-muddied” i. e. having soft soil (of a field) Miln.255. -- 2. the residue of sesamum oil (tela°), used for embalming J.II,155. -- 3. in Embryology: the “soil,” the placenta S.I,206=Kvu II.494; Miln.125. Also the first stage in the formation of the fœtus (of which the first 4 during the first month are k., abbuda, pesi, ghana, after which the stages are counted by months 1--5 & 10; see Vism.236; Nd¹ 120; & cp. Miln.40). -- 4. the fœtus, appl. to an egg, i. e. the yolk Miln.49. -- In cpds with kar & bhū the form is kalalī°.

--gata (a) fallen into the mud Miln.325; --gahaṇa “mud thicket,” dense mud at the bottom of rivers or lakes J.I,329; --kata made muddy, disturbed Vv 84³¹ (VvA.343); --bhūta=prec., A.I,9, cp. J.II,100; A.III,233; Miln.35; --makkhita soiled with mud DhA.III,61. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalamba: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kalamba menispermum calumba, kalambī convolvulus repens] N. of a certain herb or plant (Convolv. repens?); may be a bulb or radish J.IV,46 (=tālakanda), cp. p. 371, 373 (where C expl^s by tāla-kanda; gloss BB however gives latā-tanta); VI,578. See also kaḍamba & kaḷimba.

--rukkha the Cadamba tree J.VI,290. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalambaka: {'def': '=kalamba, the C. tree J.VI,535. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalambukā: {'def': '(f.)=kalambaka D.III,87 (vv. ll. kaladukā, kalabakā) the trslⁿ (Dial. III,84) has “bamboo.” (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalanda: {'def': '[cp. Sk. karaṇḍa piece of wood?] heap, stack (like a heap of wood? cp. kalingara) Miln.292 (sīsa°). (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalandaka: {'def': '1. a squirrel Miln.368; -- 2. an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat J.VI,224; --nivāpa N. of a locality in Veḷuvana, near Rājagaha, where oblations had been made to squirrels D.II,116; Vin.I,137; II,105, 290, etc. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.松鼠(a squirrel)，台语：膨鼠。2.有装饰的布或蓆(an (ornamental) cloth or mat, spread as a seat J.VI,224.)。kalandakanivāpa(kalandaka(迦兰哆),栗鼠。Nivāpa,饲养处。)【阳】喂松鼠的地方。Veḷuvane Kalandakanivāpe(kalandaka松鼠+nivāpa饲养处)﹐(在)竹林迦兰哆园，又作「竹林精舍」。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】松鼠。 ~nivāpa,【阳】喂松鼠的地方。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalandaka-nivāpa: {'def': 'm. 迦蘭陀迦園, 栗鼠飼養処 [= 竹林精舎].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. 迦蘭陀迦園, 栗鼠飼養處 [= 竹林精舎].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Kalasa: {'def': '【中】小水壶。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】小水壶。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Vedic kalaśa] 1. a pot, waterpot, dish, jar M.III,141; J.IV,384; Dāvs.IV,49; PvA.162. -- 2. the female breasts (likened to a jar) Mhbv 2, 22. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalati: {'def': '(kal, kālayati)﹐发声(to utter an (indistinct) sound)。【过分】kalita。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[kal, kālayati] to utter an (indistinct) sound: pp. kalita Th.1, 22. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalatta: {'def': '【中】妻子。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】妻子。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalaṅka: {'def': '【阳】班点，标志，缺点。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】班点，标志，缺点。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalebara: {'def': '(=Kalevara, Kaḷevara),【中】1.身体(the body)。2.( a dead body, corpse, carcass)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】身体。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalevara: {'def': 'see kaḷebara. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kali: {'def': '【阳】1.击败。2.坏运气。3.罪。4.忧伤。kaliggaha,【阳】投输，败北，恶果。kaliyuga,【中】劫灭，灭期即：永世周期中四期(成、住、坏、灭)的最后一期。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m.) [cp. Sk. kali] 1. the unlucky die (see akkha); “the dice were seeds of a tree called the vibhītaka . . . An extra seed was called the kali” (Dial. II.368 n.) D.II,349; J.I,380; Dh.252 (= DhA.III,375) at J.VI,228, 282, 357 it is opposed to kaṭa, q. v. -- 2. (=kaliggaha) an unlucky throw at dice, bad luck, symbolically as a piece of bad luck in a general worldly sense or bad quality, demerit, sin (in moral sense) kaliṁ vicināti “gathers up demerit” Sn.658; appamatto kali . . . akkhesu dhanaparājayo . . . mahantataro kali yo sugatesu manam padosaye S.I,149=A.II,3=V.171, 174=Sn.659=Nett 132; cp. M.III,170; A.V,324; Dh.202 (=DhA.III,261 aparādha). -- 3. the last of the 4 ages of the world (see °yuga). -- 4. sinful, a sinner Sn.664 (=pāpaka). ‹-› 5. saliva, spittle, froth (cp. kheḷa) Th.2, 458, 501; J.V,134.

--(g)gaha the unlucky throw at dice, the losing throw; symbolically bad luck, evil consequence in worldly & moral sense (ubhayattha k° faring badly in both worlds) M.I,403=406; III,170 (in simile). See kaṭaggaha; --devatā (m. pl.) the devotees of kali, the followers of the goddess kali Miln.191 (see Miln.trsl. I.266 n.); --(p)piya one who is fond of cheating at dice, a gambler Pgdp 68; --yuga (nt.) one of the 4 (or 8) ages of the world, the age of vice, misery and bad luck; it is the age in which we are Sāsv 4, 44, Vinl 281; --sāsana (nt.) in °ṁ āropeti to find fault with others Vin.IV,93, 360. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 击败。2. 坏运气。3. 罪。4. 忧伤。 ~ggaha,【阳】投输，败北，恶果。 ~yuga,【阳】劫灭，灭期即：永世周期中四期（成、住、坏、灭）的最后一期。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalita: {'def': '[pp. of kalati] sounding indistinctly Th.1, 22. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kaliṅgara: {'def': '(m. nt.) (BB ḷ) [cp. Sk. kaḍaṅkara & kaḍaṅgara, on which in sense of “log” see Kern, Toev. s. v. kalingara] 1. a log, a piece of wood M.I,449, 451; S.II,268; DhA.III,315; often in sense of something useless, or a trifle (comb^d with kaṭṭha q. v.) Dh.41; DhA.I,321 (=kaṭṭhakhaṇḍa, a chip) Th.2, 468 (id.) as kaṭṭhakalingarāni DhA.II,142. -- 2. a plank, viz. a step in a staircase, in sopāna° Vin.II,128, cp. sopāna-kaḷevara.

--ûpadhāna a wooden block used for putting one’s head on when sleeping S.II,267; Miln.366; --kaṇḍa a wooden arrow J.III,273 (acittaṁ k°: without feeling) (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】【中】木头，槁，朽木，谷壳。S.20.8./II,268.︰Kaliṅgarūpadhānā, bhikkhave, etarahi bhikkhū viharanti appamattā ātāpino padhānasmiṁ. Tesaṁ Māro pāpimā na labhati otāraṁ na labhati ārammaṇaṁ.(诸比丘！今诸比丘以槁为枕，不放逸、热心、专心而住。因此，魔波旬不得侵犯、不得机缘。)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳、中】木头，朽木，谷壳。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kaliṅgu: {'def': '(m. nt.) [cp. Sk. kalinga & kalingaka] the Laurus camphora, the Indian laurel J.VI,537. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalla: {'def': '2,【阳】【中】灰(ashes J.III.94 (for kalala))。kallavassa, 灰雨(a shower of ashes J.IV.389.)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '¹ & Kalya (adj.) [cp. Sk. kalya] 1. well, healthy, sound Vin.I,291. -- 2. clever, able, dexterous Miln.48, 87. -- 3. ready, prepared J.II,12, cp. --citta. -- 4. fit, proper, right S.II,13 (pañha). -- nt. kallaṁ it is proper, befitting (with inf. or inf.-substitute): vacanāya proper to say D.I,168, 169; A.I,144; abhinandituṁ D.II,69; --kallaṁ nu [kho] is it proper? M.III,19; S.IV,346; Miln.25. -- a° 1. not well, unfit Th.2, 439, cp. ThA.270. ‹-› 2. unbecoming, unbefitting D.II,68; J.V,394.

--kāya sound (in body), refreshed Vin.I,291; --kusala of sound skill (cp. kallita) S.III,265; --citta of ready, amenable mind, in form. k°, mudu-citta, vinīvaraṇa°, udagga°, etc. D.I,110=148=II.41=A.IV,209=Vin.I,16=II.156; VvA.53, 286; Vv 50¹⁹ (=kammaniya-citta “her mind was prepared for, responsive to the teaching of the dhamma”); PvA.38. --cittatā the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) J.II,12 (cp citta-kalyatā); --rūpa 1. of beautiful appearance Th.1, 212, -- 2. pleased, joyful (kalya°) Sn.680, 683, 691; --sarīra having a sound body, healthy J.II,51; a°-tā not being sound in body, ill-health VvA.243. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '1 & Kalya,【形】1.健康的，健全的(well, healthy, sound)。2.聪明的，能干的(clever, able, dexterous)。3.预备好的(ready, prepared)。4.适当的(fit, proper, right)。【中】预备好，适当。kallatā,【阴】能力，准备就绪。kallasarīra,【形】有健全的身体(【反】akallasarīra)。kallaṁ nu,适当吗( [kho] is it proper?)。akalla﹐【反】不适当的(not well, unfit)。pattakalla, 【中】达成预备好的，时到。kallakusala, 很熟练(of sound skill (cp. kallita)。kallacitta, 心理预备好(of ready, amenable mind。kallacittatā, 心理预备好(the preparedness of the mind (to receive the truth) J.II.12 (cp citta-kalyatā)) 。kallarūpa, 美丽的外表(of beautiful appearance)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】 1. 聪明的，能干的。2. 健康的，健全的。3. 预备好的。4. 适当的。~tā,【阴】能力，准备就绪。 ~sarīra,【形】有健全的身体。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '² (m. nt.) ashes J.III,94 (for kalala), also in °-vassa a shower of ashes J.IV,389. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kallahāra: {'def': '【中】白荷花。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. kahlāra, the P. form to be expl^d as a diaeretic inversion kalhāra › kallahāra] the white esculent water lily J.V,37; Dpvs XVI,19. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】白睡莲花。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kallaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] in a° unwell, indisposed Vin.III,62; J.III,464; DhsA.377. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kallatā: {'def': '(f.) see kalyatā; --a° unreadiness, unpreparedness, indisposition (of citta), in explⁿ of thīna Nd² 290= Dhs.1156=1236=Nett 86; DhsA.378; Nett 26. The reading in Nd² is akalyāṇatā, in Dhs.akalyatā; follows akammaññatā. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kallita: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. kalla] pleasantness, agreeableness S.III,270, 273 (samādhismiṁ --°kusala); A.III,311; IV,34 (id.). (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kallola: {'def': '【阳】巨浪。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】巨浪。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. kallola] a billow, in --°mālā a series of billows Dāvs.IV,44. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalusa: {'def': '【中】 1. 犯。2. 不道德。【形】 1. 不纯的。2. 肮脏的。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. kaluṣa] muddy, dirty, impure; in °bhāva the state of being turbid, impure, obscured (of the mind) DA.I,275. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】1.犯。2.不道德。【形】1.不纯的。2.肮脏的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalya: {'def': 'see kalla; --rūpa pleased, glad Sn.680, 683; a° not pleased Sn.691. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalyatā: {'def': '(f.) 1. the state of being sound, able, pliant J.II,12. -- 2. pleasantness, agreeableness, readiness, in a° opp. (appl^d to citta) Dhs.1156; DhsA.377 (=gilānabhāva). (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalyāṇa: {'def': '【形】 1. 迷人的。2. 道德上好的。【中】仁慈，功绩，德行，福利。 ~kāma,【形】很好的需要。 ~kārī,【形】做好事的人，有品德的。~dassana,【形】英俊的，可爱的。 ~dhamma,【形】有品德的。【阳】良法，妙法，好行为，好教义。 ~paṭibhāṇa,【形】急智。 ~mitta,【阳】良友，好朋友，诚实的朋友。 ~ajjhāsaya,【形】有善行的意图。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】1.迷人的。2.道德上好的。【中】仁慈，功绩，德行，福利。kalyāṇakāma,【形】很好的需要。kalyāṇakārī,【形】做好事的人，有品德的。kalyāṇadassana,【形】英俊的，可爱的。kalyāṇadhamma,【形】有品德的。【阳】良法，妙法，好行为，好教义。kalyāṇapaṭibhāṇa,【形】急智。kalyāṇamitta,【阳】良友(good reputation of a man)，好朋友，诚实的朋友。kalyāṇajjhāsaya,【形】有善行的意图。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(& kallāṇa) [Vedic kalyāṇa] 1. (adj.) beautiful, charming; auspicious, helpful, morally good. Syn. bhaddaka PvA.9, 116) and kusala (S.II,118; PvA.9, 122); opp. pāpa (S.I,83; M.I,43; PvA.101, 116 and under °mitta). kata°=katûpakāra PvA.116 Appl^d to dhamma in phrase ādi° majjhe° pariyosāne° D.I,62 and ≈; S.V,152; Sn.p. 103; VvA.87; Vism.213 sq. (in var. applications); etc. -- As m. one who observes the sīlapadaṁ (opp. pāpa, who violates it) A.II,222, cp. k°-mittā=sīlâdīhi adhikā SnA 341. -- S.IV,303; V,2, 29, 78; A.III,77; IV,361; Vin.II,8, 95; J.I,4; Miln.297; --kata° (opp. kata-pāpa) of good, virtuous character, in phrase k° katakusala, etc. It.25, etc. (see kata II.1 a). k° of kitti (-sadda) D.I,49 (=DA.I,146 seṭṭha); S.IV,374; V,352; of jhāna (tividha°) Bdhd 96, 98, 99; of mittā, friends in general (see also cpd.) Dh.78 (na bhaje pāpake mitte . . . bhajetha m° kalyāṇe), 116, 375 (=suddhâjīvin); Sn.338. -- 2. (nt.) (a) a good or useful thing, good things Vin.I,117; A.III,109; cp. bhadraṁ. ‹-› (b) goodness, virtue, merit, meritorious action J.V,49 (kalyāṇā here nt. Nom. in sense of pl.; cp. Vedic nt.), 492; -- °ṁ karoti to perform good deeds S.I,72; A.I,138 sq.; Vin.I,73; PvA.122. -- (c) kindness, good service J.I,378; III,12 (=upakāra), 68 (°ṁ karoti). ‹-› (d) beauty, attraction, perfection; enum^d as 5 kalyāṇāni, viz. kesa°, maṁsa°, aṭṭhi°, chavi°, vaya° i. e. beauty of hair, flesh, teeth, skin, youth J.I,394; DhA.I,387.

--ajjhāsaya the wish or intention to do good DhA.I,9; --âdhimuttika disposed towards virtue, bent on goodness S.II,154, 158; It.70, 78; Vbh.341; --kāma desiring what is good A.III,109; --kārin (a) doing good, virtuous (opp. pāpa°) S.I,227, cp. J.II,202=III,158; DhsA.390; (m.) who has rendered a service J.VI,182; --carita walking in goodness, practising virtue Vbh.341; --jātika one whose nature is pleasantness, agreeable J.III,82; --dassana looking nice, lovely, handsome Sn.551=Th.1, 821 (+kañcanasannibhattaca); --dhamma (1) of virtuous character, of good conduct, virtuous Vin.I,73; III,133; S.V,352; Pug.26; It.96; Pv IV.1³⁵; Miln.129; DhA.I,380; J.II,65 (=sundara°), PvA.230 (=sundara-sīla); sīlavā+k° (of bhikkhu, etc.) M.I,334; S.IV,303; PvA.13. -- k°ena k°atara perfectly good or virtuous A.II,224. -- (2) the Good Doctrine DhA.I,7. --°tā the state of having a virtuous character A.II,36; --pañña “wise in goodness” possessed of true wisdom Th.1, 506; It.97; --paṭipadā the path of goodness or virtue, consisting of dāna, uposathakamma & dasakusalakammapathā J.III,342; --paṭibhāṇa of happy retort, of good reply A.III,58, cp. Miln.3; --pāpaka good and bad J.V,238; VI,225; Kvu 45; (nt.) goodness and evil J.V,493; --pīti one who delights in what is good Sn.969; --bhattika having good, nice food Vin.II,77; III,160 (of a householder); --mitta 1. a good companion, a virtuous friend, an honest, pure friend; at Pug.24 he is said to “have faith, be virtuous, learned, liberal and wise”; M.I,43 (opp. pāpa°); S.I,83, 87 (do.); A.IV,30, 357; Pug.37, 41; J.III,197; Bdhd 90; a° not a virtuous friend DhsA.247. -- 2. as t.t. a spiritual guide, spiritual adviser. The Buddha is the spiritual friend par excellence, but any other Arahant can act as such S.V,3; Vism.89, 98, 121; cp. kammaṭṭhāna-dāyaka. --mittatā friendship with the good and virtuous, association with the virtuous S.I,87; such friendship is of immense help for the attainment of the Path and Perfection S.V,3, 32; it is the sign that the bhikkhu will realize the 7 bojjhaṅgas S.V,78=101; A.I,16, 83, it is one of the 7 things conducive to the welfare of a bhikkhu D.III,212; A.IV,29, 282; Th.2, 213; It.10; Dhs.1328=Pug.24; Vism.107. -- a° not having a virtuous friend and good adviser DhsA.247. --rūpa beautiful, handsome J.III,82; V,204; --vākkaraṇa, usually comb. with °vāca, of pleasant conversation, of good address or enunciation, reciting clearly D.I,93, 115; A.II,97; III,114, 263; IV,279; Vin.II,139; Miln.21; DA.I,263 (=madhura-vacana); a° not pronouncing or reciting clearly D.I,94. 122; --°tā the fact of being of good and pleasing address A.I,38; --vāca, usually in form. k° k°-vākkaraṇo poriyā vācāya samannāgato D.I,114; A.II,97; III,114, 195, 263; IV,279; Vin.II,139; DA.I,282; --sadda a lucky word or speech J.II,64; --sampavaṅka a good companion A.IV,357 (in phrase k°-mitta k°-sahāya k°-s°); Pug.37; --°tā companionship with a virtuous friend S.I,87. --sahāya a good, virtuous companion A.IV,284; 357; Pug.37; cp. prec., --°tā=prec. S.I,87; --sīla practising virtue, of good conduct, virtuous Th.1, 1008; It.96. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalyāṇaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. last] good, virtuous DA.I,226; DhsA.32. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalyāṇatā: {'def': '【阴】仁慈，美人。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】仁慈，美人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. kalyāṇa] beauty, goodness, virtuousness Vism.4 (ādi); k°-kusala clever, experienced in what is good Nett 20. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalyāṇin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kalyāṇa] (a) beautiful, handsome Vv IV.⁵; -- (b) auspicious, lucky, good, proper J.V,124; Ud.59; -- (c) f. [cp.--ī Vedic kalyāṇī] a beautiful woman, a belle, usually in janapada° D.I,193=M.II,40; S.II,234; J.I,394; V,154. (Page 200)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalyāṇī: {'def': '【阴】1.美女。2.在锡兰的一条河名和一个城名。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阴】 1. 美女。2. 在锡兰的一条河名和一个城镇的名字。(p98)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalā: {'def': '【阴】全部的一小部分，艺术。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic kalā *squel, to Lat scalpo, Gr. skaλlw, Ohg scolla, scilling, scala. The Dhtp. (no 613) expl^s kala by “saṅkhyāne.”] 1. a small fraction of a whole, generally the 16th part; the 16th part of the moon’s disk; often the 16th part again subdivided into 16 parts and so on: one infinitesimal part (see VvA.103; DhA.II,63), in this sense in the expression kalaṁ nâgghati soḷasiṁ “not worth an infinitesimal portion of”=very much inferior to S.I,19; III,156=V.44=It.20; A.I,166, 213; IV,252; Ud.11; Dh.70; Vv 43⁷; DhA.II,63 (=koṭṭhāsa) DhA.IV,74. -- 2. an art, a trick (lit. part, turn) J.I,163.-kalaṁ upeti to be divided or separated Miln.106; DhA.I,119; see sakala. -- In cpd. with bhū as kalī --bhavati to be divided, broken up J.I,467 (=bhijjati). Cp. vikala. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阴】全部的一小部分，艺术。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalābuka: {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kalāpaka] a girdle, made of several strings or bands plaited together Vin.II,136, 144, 319; (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalāpa: {'def': '[cp. Sk. kalāpa] 1. anything that comprises a number of things of the same kind; a bundle, bunch; sheaf; a row, multitude; usually of grass, bamboo- or sugar-canes, sometimes of hair and feathers S.IV,290 (tiṇa°); J.I,158 (do.); 25 (naḷa°), 51 (mālā°), 100 (uppalakumuda°); V,39 (usīra°); Miln.33; PvA.257, 260 (ucchu°), 272 (veḷu°); 46 (kesā), 142 (mora-piñja°) -- 2. a quiver Vin.II,192; It.68; J.VI,236; Miln.418; PvA.154, 169. -- 3. in philosophy: a group of qualities, pertaining to the material body (cp. rūpa°) Vism.364 (dasadhamma°) 626 (phassa-pañcamakā dhammā); Bdhd 77 (rūpa°) 78, 120.

--agga (nt.) “the first (of the) bunch,” the first (sheaves) of a crop, given away as alms DhA.I,98. --sammasanā grasping (characteristics) by groups Vism.287, 606, 626 sq. (Page 198)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】1.捆，束。2.箭袋。3.色聚(a group of qualities, 一组基本粒子，有八、九、十、十一、十二、十三个)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 捆，束。2. 箭袋。3. 一组基本粒子。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalāpaka: {'def': '1. a band, string (of pearls) Vin.II,315; Mhvs 30, 67. -- 2. a bundle, group J.I,239. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalāpin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kalāpa] having a quiver J.VI,49 (Acc. pl. °ine). f. kalāpinī a bundle, sheaf (yava°) S.IV,201; II,114 (naḷa°). (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalāpī: {'def': '【阳】1.孔雀。2.有箭袋或捆人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 1. 孔雀。2. 有箭袋或捆人。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kalāra: {'def': 'in hatthi° at Ud.41, expl^d in C by potaka, but cp. the same passage at DhA.I,58 which reads kalabha, undoubtedly better. Cp. kaḷārikā. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalāya: {'def': 'a kind of pea, the chick-pea M.I,245 (kaḷāya); S.I,150; A.V,170; Sn.p. 124; J.II,75 (=varaka, the bean Phaseolus trilobus, and kālarāja-māsa); J.III,370; DhA I,319. Its size may be gathered from its relation to other fruits in ascending scale at A.V,170=S.I,150= Sn.p. 124 (where the size of an ever-increasing boil is described). It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi).

--matta of the size of a chick-pea S.I,150.; A.V,170.; Sn.p. 124 (ḷ); J.III,370.; DhA.I,319. (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '﹐【中】豌(ㄨㄢ)豆(a kind of pea, the chick-pea, It is larger than a kidney bean (mugga) and smaller than the kernel of the jujube (kolaṭṭhi))。kalāyamatta, 豌(ㄨㄢ)豆大小(of the size of a chick-pea)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kalāyati: {'def': '[denom. fr. kalā] to have a measure, to outstrip J.I,163 (taken here as “trick, deceive”). (Page 199)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kalīra: {'def': '【中】棕榈树茎上的软部份。(p97)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】棕榈树茎上的软部份。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kama: {'def': '[fr. kram, cp. Vedic krama (-°) step, in uru°, BSk. krama reprieve, Divy 505] -- 1. (nt.) going, proceeding, course, step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth’âvihatakkama “having a course on all sides unobstructed” Sdhp.425; vaḍḍhana° process of development Bdhd 96 paṭiloma° (going) the opposite way Bdhd 106; cp. also Bdhd 107, 111. a fivefold kama or process (of development or division), succession, is given at Vism.476 with uppattik°, pahāna°, patipattik°, bhūmik°, desanāk°, where they are illustrated by examples. Threefold applied to upādāna at Vism.570 (viz. uppattik°, pahānak°, desanāk°) -- 2. oblique cases (late and technical) “by way of going,” i. e. in order or in due course, in succession: kamato Vism.476, 483, 497; Bdhd 70, 103; kamena by & by, gradually Mhvs 3, 33; 5, 136; 13, 6; Dāvs.I,30; SnA 455; Bdhd 88; yathākkamaṁ Bdhd 96. -- 3. (adj.) (-°) having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (=catuppāda) Pv.I,11³. (Page 188)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】正常（工作）状态，方式，进程，方法。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(‹kam(梵kram)行, cp. Vedic krama (kama-) step, in urukama, BSk. krama reprieve),【阳】1.正常(工作)状态，方式，进程，方法(going, proceeding, course, step, way, manner, e. g. sabbatth’qvihatakkama “having a course on all sides unobstructed” )。purisaparakkama﹐人的超常状态。kamakama, 【形】以某方式进行(having a certain way of going: catukkama walking on all fours (=catuppāda)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kamala: {'def': '【中】睡莲。kamaladala,【中】睡莲的花瓣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) a lotus, freq. comb^d with kuvalaya; or with uppala J.I,146; DA.I,40, expl^d as vārikiñjakkha PvA.77. 1. lotus, the lotus flower, Nelumbium J.I,146; DA.I,40; Mhbv 3; Sdhp.325; VvA.43, 181, 191; PvA.23, 77; -- At J.I,119, 149 a better reading is obtained by corr. kambala to kamala, at J.I,178 however kamb° should be retained.- 2. a kind of grass, of which sandals were made Vin. I.190 (s. Vin. Texts II.23 n.) -- 3. f. kamalā a graceful woman J.V,160;

--komalakarā (f.) (of a woman) having lotus-like (soft) hands Mhbv 29; --dala a lotus leaf Vism.465; Mhbv 3; Bdhd 19; DhsA.127; VvA.35, 38. -- --pādukā sandals of k. grass Vin.I,190. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】睡莲。~dala, 【中】睡莲的花瓣。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kamalin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kamala] rich in lotus, covered with lotuses (of a pond) in kamalinī-kāmuka “the lover of lotuses,” Ep. of the Sun Mhbv. 3 (v. l. °sāmika perhaps to be preferred). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamalinī: {'def': '【阴】莲池。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】莲池。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kamalāsana: {'def': '【阳】梵天，造物主。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】梵天，造物主。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kamanīya: {'def': '【形】令人想要的，可爱的，美丽的。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【形】令人想要的，可爱的，美丽的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(adj.) [grd of kāmayati] (a) desirable, beautiful, lovely J.V,155, 156; Miln.11; (b) pleasant, sweet (-sounding) D.II,171; J.I,96. -- As nt. a desirable object S.I,22. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamasaṅkhyā: {'def': '﹐【阴】序数。paṭhama=第一, dutiya=第二, tatiya=第三﹐ catthutha=第四, pañcama=第五, chaṭṭha=第六, sattama=第七, aṭṭhama=第八, navama=第九, dasama=第十, ekādasama=第十一, dvādasama=第十二, terasama=第十三, cuddasama=第十四, pañcadasama=第十五﹐soḷasama=第十六, sattarasama=第十七, aṭṭhārasama=第十八, ekūnavīsatima=第十九, vīsatima=第二十, tiṁsatima=第三十, cattāḷīsatima=第四十, paññāsatima=第五十, saṭṭhatitama=第六十, sattatima=第七十, asītima=第八十, navutima=第九十, satama=第一百。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kamati: {'def': ' [kram, Dhtp. expl^d by padavikkhepe; ppr. med. kamamāna S.I,33; Sn.176; Intens. caṅkamati.] to walk. (I) lit. 1. c. Loc. to walk, travel, go through: dibbe pathe Sn.176; ariye pathe S.I,33; ākāse D.I,212=M.I,69=A.III,17; -- 2. c. Acc. to go or get to, to enter M.II,18; J.VI,107; Pv.I,1² (saggaṁ) -- (II) fig. 1. to succeed, have effect, to affect M.I,186; J.V,198; Miln.198; -- 2. to plunge into, to enter into A.II,144; ‹-› 3. impers. to come to (c. dat) S.IV,283. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kam行+a), 1.行走(to walk)。2.去(to go or get to, to enter)。3.参与。kami,【过】。kanta,【过分】。kamitvā, -kamitūna, -kamma,【独】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kam + a), 去，参与。kami, 【过】。kanta, 【过分】。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kamatthaṁ: {'def': '(adv.) [kaṁ atthaṁ] for what purpose, why? J.III,398 (=kimatthaṁ). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamaṇa: {'def': 'a step, stepping, gait J.V,155, in explⁿ J.V,156 taken to be ppr. med. -- See san°. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamaṇḍalu: {'def': '(m., nt.) [etym. uncertain] the waterpot with long spout used by non-Buddhist ascetics S.I,167; J.II,73 (=kuṇḍikā); IV,362, 370; VI,86, 525, 570; Sn.p. 80; DhA.III,448--adj. kamaṇḍaluka [read kā°?] “with the waterpot” A.V,263 (brāhmaṇā pacchābhūmakā k.). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】（带柄和倾口的）大水罐。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】【中】(带柄和倾口的)大水罐。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kambala: {'def': '(m., nt.) [cp. Sk. kambala] 1. woollen stuff, woollen blanket or garment. From J.IV,353 it appears that it was a product of the north, probably Nepal (cp. J.P.T.S. 1889, 203); enum^d as one of the 6 kinds of cīvaras, together w. koseyya & kappāsika at Vin.I,58=96, also at A.IV,394 (s. °sukhuma); freq. preceded by ratta (e. g. DA.I,40. Cp. also ambara² and ambala), which shows that it was commonly dyed red; also as paṇḍu Sn.689; Bdhd 1. -- Some woollen garments (aḍḍhakāsika) were not allowed for Bhikkhus: Vin.I,281; II,174; see further J.I,43, 178, 322; IV,138; Miln.17, 88, 105; DhA.I,226; II,89 sq. 2. a garment: two kinds of hair‹-› (blankets, i. e.) garments viz. kesa° and vāla° mentioned Vin.I,305=D.I,167=A.I,240, 295. -- 3. woollen thread Vin.I,190 (expl^d by uṇṇā) (cp. Vin. Texts II.23); J.VI,340; -- 4. a tribe of Nāgas J.VI,165.

--kañcuka a (red) woollen covering thrown over a temple, as an ornament Mhvs 34, 74; --kūṭâgāra a bamboo structure covered with (red) woollen cloth, used as funeral pile DhA.I,69; --pādukā woollen slippers Vin.I,190; --puñja a heap of blankets J.I,149; --maddana dyeing the rug Vin.I,254 (cp. Vin. Texts II.154); --ratana a precious rug of wool J.IV,138; Miln.17 (16 ft. long & 18 ft. wide); --vaṇṇa (adj.) of the colour of woollen fabric, i. e. red J.V,359 (°maṁsa); --silāsana (paṇḍu°) a stone-seat, covered with a white k. blanket, forming the throne of Sakka DhA.I,17; --sukhuma fine, delicate woollen stuff D.II,188=A.IV,394; Miln.105; --sutta a woollen thread J.VI,340. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】毛织品，毛毯。~balī, 【形】穿绒衣的人。~līya, 【中】绒衣。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】毛织品，毛毯，音译：钳婆罗宝。kambalī,【形】穿绒衣的人。kambalīya,【中】绒衣。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kambalin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kambala] having a woollen garment D.I,55; II,150. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kambalīya: {'def': '(nt.) [fr. kambala] (a sort of) woollen garment Pv.II,1¹⁷ (cp. PvA.77). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamboja: {'def': '【阳】剑浮，剑浮沙，一个国家的名字。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】1.剑浮，剑浮沙，剑蒲，绀蒲，甘菩。印度十六大国之一。在印度西北，犍陀罗(Gandhāra)附近，生产牛、马等。kambojaka,【阳】，剑浮沙国人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'm. 剣浮闍 [十六大国の一].', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': 'm. 劍浮闍 [十六大國之一].', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}

Kambojaka: {'def': 'a. Kamboja(劍浮闍)所出産的, 由Kamboja來的 (coming from Kamboja).', 'xr': '《汉译パーリ语辞典》黃秉榮譯词数 7735.'}; {'def': 'a. ヵンボージャ産の.', 'xr': '《パーリ语辞典》日本水野弘元教授词数 13772.'}; {'def': '(adj.) coming fr. Kamboja J.IV,464 (assatara). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamboji: {'def': '【阳】(马蹄)决明(Cassia tora假绿豆)，或翅果铁刀木(Cassia alata)。(kamojagumba= eḷagalāgumba耶罗伽罗)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(m., nt.) [meaning & etym. unexpl^d] the plant Cassia tora or alata J.III,223 (°gumba=elagalāgumba; vv. ll. kammoja° & tampo° [for kambo°]). (Page 190)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kambojā: {'def': '(f.) N of a country J.V,446 (°ka raṭṭha); Pv.II,91 (etc.); Vism.332, 334, 336. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kambu: {'def': '【阳】【中】黄金，海螺壳。kambugīva,【形】脖子有三条皱纹的人。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[cp. Sk. kambu, Halāyudha=śaṅkha; Dhtp. saṁvaraṇe] 1. a conch, a shell: saṇha-kambu-r-iva . . . sobhate su gīvā Th.2, 262 (for kampurī’va); s. cpds. -- 2. a ring or bracelet (made of shells or perhaps gold: see Kern. Toev. s. v.) J.IV,18, 466 (+kāyūra); Pv.II,12⁷, III,9³ (=PvA.157, saṅkhavalaya) Vv 36² (=VvA.167 hatth’âlaṅkāra), worn on the wrist, while the kāyūra is worn on the upper part of the arm (bhujâlaṅkāra ibid.); -- 3. a golden ring, given as second meaning at VvA.167, so also expl. at J.IV,18, 130; J.V,400.

--gīva (adj.) having a neck shaped like a shell, i. e. in spirals, having lines or folds, considered as lucky J.IV,130 (=suvaṇṇālingasadisagīvo), cp. above 1; --tala the base or lower part of a shell, viz. the spiral part, fig. the lines of the neck J.V,155 (°ābhāsā gīvā, expl^d on p. 156 as suvaṇṇālingatala-sannibhā); also the (polished) surface of a shell, used as simile for smoothness J.V,204, 207; --pariharaka a wristlet or bracelet VvA.167. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳、中】黄金，海螺壳。~gīva, 【形】脖子有三条行或皱纹的人。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kambussa: {'def': '[fr. preceding] gold or golden ornament (bracelet) J.V,260, 261 (: kambussaṁ vuccati suvaṇṇaṁ). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamma: {'def': '(Skt. karma)业', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}; {'def': '【中】业(action﹐volitional，造作身口意的善因、恶因)，行为(deed)，工作(job)，造作(work)。kammakara, kammakāra,【阳】工人，劳工。kammakaraṇa,【中】造业，劳动，服务，工作。kammakāraṇā,【阴】体罚。kammakāraka,【中】(语法)宾格。 kammakaraporisa, 【阳】男仆。kammakkhaya,【阳】消业。kammaja,【形】业生的。kammajāta,【中】各种业，各种不同的行动或工作。kammadāyāda,【形】受作业分(受业的嗣)，业的继承者。kammanānatta,【中】多种业。kammanibbatta,【形】通过业而生的。kammaniyāma﹐业的定律。kammapaṭisaraṇa,【形】依靠业。kammapatha,【阳】业道，行动的方法。kammappaccaya,【形】业缘的。kammaphala(=vipāka异熟),【中】业的果，因果的报应。kammabandhu,【形】业的眷属，业为亲戚。kammabala,【中】业力，因果报应的力量。kammayoni,【形】业的生，业为母胎。kammavāda,【阳】业论，因果报应的观点。kammavādī,【形】信业，信仰因果报应。kammavipāka,【阳】业的异熟，业的报应。kammavega,【阳】业的推动力，因果报应的动力。kammasamuṭṭhāna,【形】由业而生起的。kammasambhava,【形】业生的。kammasarikkhaka,【形】与业有相似的因果关系。kammassaka,【形】自作业，自己造的业，业的主人。kammassakadiṭṭhi,【形】自作业之见。kammāyūhana,【中】业的堆积。kammaupacaya,【阳】业的积聚。dasakammapatha﹐十业道。十不善业道：pāṇātipātā(=pāṇaṁ hanati)杀生、adinnādānā (=adinnaṁ ādiyati) sammādiṭṭhikā不与取、kāmesumicchācārā(=kāmesu micchā carati)邪淫(与妻非处行淫亦属邪淫，‘非处’谓口及大便处)、musāvādā(=musā vadati)妄语、pisuṇāya vācāya(=pisuṇaṁ katheti)离间、pharusāya vācāya(=pharusaṁ bhāsati)粗语、samphappalāpā(= samphaṁ palapati)绮语、abhijjhā贪、byāpannacittā瞋、micchādiṭṭhi邪见。十善业道：离杀生、离不与取、离邪淫、离妄语、离离间、离粗语、离绮语、无贪、无瞋、正见。kammassakatā sammādiṭṭhi﹐自业正见，视「业」为个自的财产的正见。有六种自业正见：sabbe sattā kammassakā, kammadāyādā, kammayoni, kammabandhū, kammappaṭisaraṇā, yaṁ kammaṁ karissanti kālayānaṁ vā pāpakaṁ vā tassa dāyādā bhavissanti.一切众生各有己业、业的承继人、业是母胎、业是眷属、业是所依，他们都是自己所造善恶业的主人由业区分有情而有贵贱尊卑等(A.5.57./III,75.)。Yathā yathā’yaṁ puriso kammaṁ karoti tathā tathā taṁ paṭisamvediyati﹐随人所作业则受其报(=如此如此那人作业，他自受如是如是〔报〕)。AA.5.89./III,274.：Kammārāmatāti navakamme ramanakabhāvo. (好(起)事业：乐於新的营作。)AA.6.14./III,348.：Kammārāmoti-ādīsu āramaṇaṁ ārāmo, abhiratīti attho. Vihārakaraṇādimhi navakamme ārāmo assāti kammārāmo.(寺)园的营作等：乐於(寺)园的目标之意。於盖精舍等新的营作(寺)园--给这个「(寺)园的工作」(之定义)。D.16./II,78.：“Yāvakīvañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhū na kammārāmā bhavissanti na kammaratā na kammārāmatamanuyuttā, vuddhiyeva, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṁ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihāni.(「又，诸比丘！只要诸比丘不喜营作、不喜好(起)事业，诸比丘！则应可预期诸比丘之兴盛而非衰亡。」DA.16./I,528.：kammanti itikātabbakammaṁ vuccati. Seyyathidaṁ-- cīvaravicāraṇaṁ, cīvarakaraṇaṁ, upatthambhanaṁ, sūcigharaṁ, pattatthavikaṁ, asaṁbaddhakaṁ, kāyabandhanaṁ, dhamakaraṇaṁ, ādhārakaṁ, pādakathalikaṁ, sammajjanī-ādīnaṁ karaṇanti.(营作：诸如此类的工作之谓。如：审查衣物，做衣服，支撑物，针盒，钵带，非系属物(带子?)，腰带，吹具，凳子，脚凳，扫帚等。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【中】业，行为，工作，造作。~kara, ~kara, 【阳】工人，劳工。~karaṇa, 【中】造业，劳动，服务，工作。~kāraṇā, 【阴】体罚。~kāraka,【中】（语法）宾格。~kkhaya, 【阳】消业。~ja, 【形】业生的。~jāta,【中】各种业，各种不同的行动或工作。~dāyāda, 【形】受作业分（受业的嗣），业的继承者。~nānatta, 【中】多种业。~nibbatta, 【形】通过业而生的。~paṭisarana, 【形】业的坚固。 ~patha, 【阳】业道，行动的方法。~ppaccaya, 【形】业缘的。~phala, 【中】业的果，因果的报应。~bandhu, 【形】业的眷属，业为亲戚。~bala, 【中】业力，因果报应的力量。~yoni, 【形】业的生，业为母胎。~vāda, 【阳】业论，因果报应的观点。~vādī, 【形】信业，信仰因果报应。~vipāka, 【阳】业的异熟，业的报应。~vega, 【阳】业的推动力，因果报应的动力。~samuṭṭhāna,【形】由业而生起的。 ~sambhava, 【形】业生的。~sarikkhaka, 【形】与业有相似的因果关系。 ~saka, 【形】自作业，业的主人。 ~āyūhana,【中】业的堆积。 ~upacaya,【阳】业的积聚。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Vedic karman, work esp. sacrificial process. For ending °man=Idg. *men cp. Sk. dhāman=Gr. dh=ma, Sk. nāman=Lat nomen] the doing, deed, work; orig. meaning (see karoti) either building (cp. Lit. kùrti, Opr. kūra to build) or weaving, plaiting (still in mālākamma and latā° “the intertwining of garlands and creepers”; also in kamma-kara possibly orig. employed in weaving, i. e. serving); cp. Lat. texo, to weave=Sk. takṣan builder, artisan, & Ger. wirken, orig. weben. Grammatically karman has in Pāli almost altogether passed into the --a decl., the cons. forms for Instr. & Abl. kammā and kammanā Gen. Dat. kammuno, are rare. The Nom. pl. is both kammā and kammāni.

I. Crude meaning. 1. (lit.) Acting in a special sense, i. e. office, occupation, doing, action, profession. Two kinds are given at Vin.IV,6, viz. low (hīna) & high (ukkaṭṭha) professions. To the former belong the kammāni of a koṭṭhaka and a pupphacchaḍḍaka, to the latter belong vāṇijjā and gorakkhā.-Kamma as a profession or business is regarded as a hindrance to the religious life, & is counted among the ten obstacles (see palibodha). In this sense it is at Vism.94 expl^d by navakamma (see below 2a).-kassa° ploughing, occupation of a ploughman Vism.284; kumbhakāra° profession of a potter J.VI,372; tunna° weaving Vism.122; PvA.161. purohita° office of a high-priest (=abstr. n. porohiccaṁ) SnA 466; vāṇija° trade Sāsv. 40.-kammanā by profession Sn.650, 651; kammāni (pl.) occupations Sn.263=Kh V.6 (anavajjāni k.=anākulā kammantā Sn.262). paresaṁ k°ṁ katvā doing other people’s work=being a servant VvA.299; sa° pasutā bent upon their own occupations D.I,135, cp. attano k°- kubbānaṁ Dh.217. kamma-karaṇa-sālā work-room (here: weaving shed) PvA.120.

2. Acting in general, action, deed, doing (nearly always --°) (a) (active) act, deed, job, often to be rendered by the special verb befitting the special action, like cīvara° mending the cloak VvA.250; uposatha° observing the Sabbath Vbh.422; nava° making new, renovating, repairing, patching Vin.II,119, 159 (°karoti to make repairs); J.I,92: Vism.94, adj. navakammika one occupied with repairs Vin.II,15; S.I,179; patthita° the desired action (i. e. sexual intercourse) DhA.II,49; kammaṁ karoti to be active or in working, to act: nāgo pādehi k.k. the elephant works with his feet M.I,414; kata° the job done by the thieves DhA.II,38 (corehi), as adj. kata° cora (& akata °cora) a thief who has finished his deed (& one who has not) Vism.180, also in special sense: occasion for action or work, i. e. necessity, purpose: ukkāya kammaṁ n’atthi, the torch does not work, is no good Vism.428. (b) (passive) the act of being done (-°), anything done (in its result), work, often as collect. abstr. (to be trsl^d. by E. ending --ing): apaccakkha° not being aware, deception Vbh.85; daḷhī° strengthening, increase Vbh.357, Vism.122; citta° variegated work, mālā° garlands, latā° creeper (-work) Vism.108; nāma° naming Bdhd 83; pañhā° questioning, “questionnaire” Vism.6. -- So in definitions niṭṭhuriya°=niṭṭhuriya Vbh.357; nimitta°= nimitta, obhāsa°=obhāsa (apparition › appearing) Vbh.353. -- (c) (intrs.) making, getting, act, process (-°). Often trsl. as abstr. n. with ending --ion or --ment, e. g. okāsa° opportunity of speaking, giving an audience Sn.p. 94; pātu° making clear, manifestation DhA.IV,198 anāvi°, anuttāni° concealment Vbh.358; kata° (adj.) one who has done the act or process, gone through the experience SnA 355; añjali°, sāmīci° veneration, honouring (in formula with nipaccakāra abhivādana paccuṭṭhāna) D.III,83 (≈Vin.II,162, 255); A.I,123; II,180; J. I.218, 219.

3. (Specialised) an “act” in an ecclesiastical sense; proceedings, ceremony, performed by a lawfully constituted chapter of bhikkhus Vin.I,49, 53, 144, 318; II,70, 93; V,220 sq.; Khus J.P.T.S. 1883, 101. At these formal functions a motion is put before the assembly and the announcement of it is called the ñatti Vin.I,56, after which the bhikkhus are asked whether they approve of the motion or not. If this question is put once, it is a ñattidutiyakamma Vin.II,89; if put three times, a ñatticatuttha° Vin.I,56 (cp. Vin. Texts I.169 n²). There are 6 kinds of official acts the Saṅgha can perform: see Vin.I,317 sq.; for the rules about the validity of these ecclesiastical functions see Vin.I,312--333 (cp. Vin T. II.256--285). The most important ecclesiastical acts are: apalokanakamma, ukkhepanīya° uposatha° tajjaniya° tassapāpiyyasikā° nissaya°, patiññākaraṇīya°, paṭipucchākaraṇīya° paṭisāraṇiya° pabbājaniya°, sammukhākaraṇīya°. -- In this sense: kammaṁ karoti (w. Gen.) to take proceedings against Vin.I,49, 143, 317; II,83, 260; kammaṁ garahati to find fault with proceedings gone through Vin.II,5; kammaṁ paṭippassambheti to revoke official proceedings against a bhikkhu Vin.III,145.

4. In cpds.:-âdhiṭṭhāyaka superintendent of work, inspector Mhvs 5, 174; 30, 98;-âdhipateyya one whose supremacy is action Miln.288; -ārambha commencement of an undertaking Mhvs 28, 21; -âraha (a) entitled to take part in the performance of an “act” Vin.IV,153; V,221; --ārāma (a) delighting in activity D.II,77; A.IV,22; It.71, 79; -ārāmatā taking pleasure in (worldly) activity D.II,78=A.IV,22, cp. Vbh.381; A.III,116, 173, 293 sq., 330, 449; IV,22 sq., 331; V,163; It.71; âvadāna a tale of heroic deeds J.VI,295; -kara or °kāra: used indiscriminately. 1. (adj.) doing work, or active, in puriso dāso+pubbuṭṭhāyī “willing to work” D.I,60 et sim. (=DA.I,168: analaso). A.I,145; II,67; Vv 75⁴; 2. (n.) a workman, a servant (a weaver?) usually in form dāsā ti vā pessā ti vā kammakarā ti vā Vin.I,243; D.I,141=Pug.56 (also °kārā); A.II,208; III,77, 172; Th.2, 340; J.I,57. Also as dāsā pessā k°kārā A.III,37=IV.265, 393, and dāsā k° kārā Vin.I,240, 272; II,154; D.III,191; S.I,92;--a handyman J.I,239; Miln.378; (f) --ī a female servant Vin.II,267; °kāra Vin.IV,224, kārī Dhs.A98=VvA.73 (appl. to a wife); -karaṇa 1. working, labour, service J.III,219; PvA.120; DA.I,168; 2. the effects of karma J.I,146; -karanā and kāraṇā see below; -kāma liking work, industrious; a° lazy A.IV,93=J.II,348; -kāraka a workman, a servant DA.I,8; Mhvs 30, 42; Nd² 427; a sailor J.IV,139; -garu bent on work Miln.288; -ccheda the interruption of work J.I,149; 246; III,270; --jāta sort of action J.V,24 (=kammam eva); -dhura (m. nt.) draught-work J.I,196; -dheyya work to be performed, duty A.IV,285=325; cp. J.VI,297; -dhoreyya “fit to bear the burden of action” Miln.288 (cp. Mil. trsl. II.140); --niketavā having action as one’s house or temple ibid.; -nipphādana accomplishing the business J.VI,162; -ppatta entitled o take part in an eccles. act Vin.I,318; V,221; -bahula abounding in action (appl. to the world of men) Miln.7; -mūla the price of the transaction Miln.334; -rata delighting in business D.II,78; It.71; -vatthu objects, items of an act Vin.V,116; -vācā the text or word of an official Act. These texts form some of the oldest literature and are embodied in the Vinaya (cp. Vin.I,317 sq.; III,174, 176; IV,153, etc.). The number of officially recognized k° is eleven, see J.P.T.S. 1882, 1888, 1896, 1907; k°ṁ karoti to carry out an official Act Mhvs 5, 207; DhsA.399; --°ṁ anussāveti to proclaim a k°, to put a resolution to a chapter of bhikkhus Vin.I,317; -vossagga difference of occupation J.VI,216; -sajja (a) “ready for action,” i. e. for battle J.V,232; -sādutā “agreeableness to work” DhsA.151 (cp. kammaññatā & kamyatā); --sāmin “a master in action,” an active man Miln.288; -sippī an artisan VvA.278; -sīla one whose habit it is to work, energetic, persevering Miln.288; a° indolent, lazy J.VI,245; a°-ttaṁ indolence, laziness Mhvs 23, 21; --hīna devoid of occupation, inactive Miln.288.

II. Applied (pregnant) meaning: doing, acting with ref. to both deed and doer. It is impossible to draw a clear line between the source of the act (i. e. the acting subject, the actor) and the act (either the object or phenomenon acted, produced, i. e. the deed as objective phenomenon, or the process of acting, i. e. the deed as subjective phenomenon). Since the latter (the act) is to be judged by its consequences, its effects, its manifestation always assumes a quality (in its most obvious characteristics either good or bad or indifferent), and since the act reflects on the actor, this quality is also attached to him. This is the popular, psychological view, and so it is expressed in language, although reason attributes goodness and badness to the actor first, and then to the act. In the expression of language there is no difference between: 1. the deed as such and the doer in character: anything done (as good or bad) has a corresponding source; 2. the performance of the single act and the habit of acting: anything done tends to be repeated; 3. the deed with ref. both to its cause and its effect: anything done is caused and is in itself the cause of something else. As meanings of kamma we therefore have to distinguish the foll. different sides of a “deed,” viz.

1. the deed as expressing the doer’s will, i. e. qualified deed, good or bad; 2. the repeated deed as expression of the doer’s habit=his character; 3. the deed as having consequences for the doer, as such a source qualified according to good and evil; as deed done accumulated and forming a deposit of the doer’s merit and demerit (his “karma”). Thus pāpakamma=a bad deed, one who has done a bad deed, one who has a bad character, the potential effect of a bad deed=bad karma. The context alone decides which of these meanings is the one intended by the speaker or writer.

Concerning the analysis of the various semantic developments the following practical distinctions can be made: 1. Objective action, characterized by time: as past=done, meaning deed (with kata); or future=to be done, meaning duty (with kātabba). 2. Subjective action, characterized by quality, as reflecting on the agent. 3. Interaction of act and agent: (a) in subjective relation, cause and effect as action and reaction on the individual (individual “karma,” appearing in his life, either here or beyond), characterized as regards action (having results) and as regards actor (having to cope with these results): (b) in objective relation, i. e. abstracted from the individual and generalized as Principle, or cause and effect as Norm of Happening (universal “karma,” appearing in Saṁsāra, as driving power of the world), characterized (a) as cause, (b) as consequence, (c) as cause-consequence in the principle of retribution (talio), (d) as restricted to time.

1. (Objective): with ref. to the Past: kiṁ kammaṁ akāsi nārī what (deed) has this woman done? Pv.I,9²; tassā katakammaṁ pucchi he asked what had been done by her PvA.37, 83, etc. -- with ref. to the Future: k. kātabbaṁ hoti I have an obligation, under 8 kusītavatthūni D.III,255=A.IV,332; cattāri kammāni kattā hoti “he performs the 4 obligations” (of gahapati) A.II,67.

2. (Subjective) (a) doing in general, acting, action, deed; var. kinds of doings enum. under micchājīva D.I,12 (santikamma, paṇidhi°, etc.); tassa kammassa katattā through (the performance of) that deed D.III,156; dukkaraṁ kamma-kubbataṁ he who of those who act, acts badly S.I,19; abhabbo taṁ kammaṁ kātum incapable of doing that deed S.III,225; sañcetanika k. deed done intentionally M.III,207; A.V,292 sq.; pamāṇakataṁ k. D.I,251=S.IV,322. kataraṁ k°ṁ karonto ahaṁ nirayaṁ na gaccheyyaṁ? how (i. e. what doing) shall I not go to Niraya? J.IV,340; yaṁ kiñci sithilaṁ k°ṁ . . . na taṁ hoti mahapphalaṁ . . . S.I,49=Dh.312=Th.1, 277; kadariya° a stingy action PvA.25; k. classed with sippa, vijjā-caraṇa D.III,156; kāni k°āni sammā-niviṭṭha established slightly in what doings? Sn.324; (b) Repeated action in general, constituting a person’s habit of acting or character (cp. kata II.1. a.); action as reflecting on the agent or bearing his characteristics; disposition, character. Esp. in phrase kammena samannāgata “endowed with the quality of acting in such and such a manner, being of such and such character”: tīhi dhammehi samannāgato niraye nikkhitto “endowed with (these) three qualites a man will go to N.” A.I,292 sq.; asucinā kāyak°ena sam° asucimanussā “bad people are those who are of bad ways (or character)” Nd² 112; anavajja kāya-k° sam° A.II,69 (cp. A.IV,364); kāya-kammavacī-kammena sam° kusalena (pabbajita) “a bhikkhu of good character in deed and speech” D.I,63; kāya . . . (etc.) --k°sam° bāla (and opp. paṇḍita) A.II,252 (cp. A.I,102, 104); visamena kāya (etc.) --k° sam° A.I,154=III,129; sāvajjena kāya (etc.) --k° sam° A.II,135 -- kammaṁ vijjā ca dhammo ca sīlaṁ jīvitam uttamaṁ, etena maccā sujjhanti, na gottena dhanena vā S.I,34=55; M.III,262, quoted at Vism.3, where k. is grouped with vipassanā, jhāna, sīla, satipaṭṭhāna as main ideals of virtue; kammanā by character, as opp. to jaccā or jātiyā, by birth: Sn.136; 164; 599; nihīna° manussā (of bad, wretched character) Sn.661; manāpena bahulaṁ kāya (etc.) --kammena A.II,87=III,33, 131; and esp. with mettā, as enum. under aparihāniyā and sārāṇīyā dhammā D.II,80; A.III,288; mettena kāya‹-› (etc.)--kammena D.II,144; III,191; A.V,350 sq. (c) Particular actions, as manifested in various ways, by various channels of activity (k°-dvārā), expressions of personality, as by deed, word and thought (kāyena, vācāya, manasā). Kamma kat) e)coxήn means action by hand (body) in formula vacasā manasā kammanā ca Sn.330, 365; later specified by kāya-kamma, for which kāya-kammanta in some sense (q. v.), and complementing vacī-k° mano-k°; so in foll. comb^ns: citte arakkhite kāya-k° pi arakkhitaṁ hoti (vacī° mano°) A.I,261 sq.; yaṁ nu kho ahaṁ idaṁ kāyena k° kattukāmo idaṁ me kāya-k° attabyādhāya pi saṁvatteyya . . . “whatever deed I am going to do with my hands (I have to consider:) is this deed, done by my hands, likely to bring me evil?” M.I,415; kāya-(vacī- etc.) kamma, which to perform & to leave (sevitabbaṁ and a°) A.I,110=III,150; as anulomika° A.I,106; sabbaṁ kāya-k° (vacī° mano°) Buddhassa ñāṇânuparivattati “all manifestation of deed (word & thought) are within the knowledge of Buddha” Nd² 235; yaṁ lobhapakataṁ kammaṁ karoti kāyena vā vācāya vā manasā vā tassa vipākaṁ anubhoti . . . Nett 37; kin nu kāyena v° m° dukkaṭaṁ kataṁ what evil have you done by body, word or thought? Pv.II,1³ and freq.; ekūna-tiṁsa kāyakammāni Bdhd 49. (d) Deeds characterized as evil (pāpa-kammāni, pāpāni k°, pāpakāni k°; pāpakamma adj., cp. pāpa-kammanta adj.). pāpakamma: n’atthi loke raho nāma p° pakubbato “there is no hiding (-place) in this world for him who does evil” A.I,149; so p°-o dummedho jānaṁ dukkaṭaṁ attano . . . “he, afflicted with (the result of) evil-doing . . .” A.III,354; p°-ṁ pavaḍḍhento ibid.; yaṁ p°-ṁ kataṁ sabban taṁ idha vedanīyaṁ “whatever wrong I have done I have to suffer for” A.V,301; pabbajitvāna kāyena p°-ṁ vivajjayī “avoid evil acting” Sn.407; nissaṁsayaṁ p°-ṁ . . . “undoubtedly there is some evil deed (the cause of this) i. e. some evil karma Pv IV.16¹.-pāpaṁ kammaṁ: appamattikam pi p° k° kataṁ taṁ enaṁ nirayaṁ upaneti “even a small sin brings man to N.” A.I,249, tayā v’etaṁ p° k° kataṁ tvañ ñeva etassa vipākaṁ paṭisaṁvedissasi “you yourself have done this sin you yourself shall feel its consequences” M.III,180= A.I,139, na hi p° kataṁ k° sajju khīraṁ va muccati Dh.71=Nett 161; yassa p° kataṁ k° kusalena pithīyati so imaṁ lokaṁ pabhāseti “he will shine in this world who covers an evil deed with a good one” M.II,104= Dh.173=Th.1, 872; p°-ssa k°-ssa samatikkamo “the overcoming of evil karma” S.IV,320; p°ssa k°ssa kiriyāya “in the performance of evil” M.I,372; p°āni k°āni karaṁ bālo na bujjhati “he, like a fool, awaketh not, doing sinful deeds” Dh.136=Th.1, 146; pāpā p°ehi k°ehi nirayaṁ upapajjare “sinners by virtue of evil deeds go to N.” Dh.307; te ca p°esu k°esu abhiṇham upadissare Sn.140. -pāpakāni kammāni: p°ānaṁ k°ānaṁ hetu coraṁ rājāno gāhetvā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārenti “for his evil deeds the kings seize the thief and have him punished” A.I,48; ye loke p°āni k° karonti te vividhā kamma-kāraṇā karīyanti “those who do evil deeds in this world, are punished with various punishments” M.III,186=A.I,142; k°ṁ karoti p°ṁ kāyena vācā uda cetasā vā Sn.232 (=kh 190); similarly Sn.127; karontā p°ṁ k°ṁ yaṁ hoti kaṭukapphalaṁ, “doing evil which is of bitter fruit” Dh.66= S.I,57=Nett 131; k°ehi p°ehi Sn.215. -- In the same sense: na taṁ k°ṁ kataṁ sādhu yaṁ katvā anutappati “not well done is that deed for which he feels remorse” S.I,57=Dh.67=Nett 132; āveni-kammāni karonti (with ref. to saṅgha-bheda) A.V,74; adhammikakammāni A.I,74; asuci-k°āni (as suggested by 5 and attributes: asuci, duggandha, etc.) A.III,269; sāvajjakammāni (as deserving Niraya) (opp. avajja › sagga) A.II,237; kammāni ānantarikāni deeds which have an immediate effect; there are five, enum^d at Vbh.378. ‹-› (e) deeds characterized as good or meritorious (kusala, bhaddaka, etc.) taṁ k°ṁ katvā kusalaṁ sukhudrayaṁ D.III,157; puñña-kammo of meritorious (character) S.I,143; kusalehi k°ehi vippayuttā carati viññāṇacariyā Ps.I,80; kusalassa k°ssa katattā Vbh.173 sq.; 266 sq.; 297 sq.; kusala-k°-paccayāni Bdhd 12; puññakamma, merit, comp^d with kapparukkha in its rewarding power VvA.32 (cp. puññânubhāva-nissandena “in consequence of their being affected with merit” PvA.58) -- Cp. also cpds.: kamma-kilesa, k°-ṭṭhāna, k°-patha; k°lakkhaṇa k°-samādāna.

3. (Interaction) A. in subjective relation; (a) character of interaction as regards action; action or deed as having results: phala and vipāka (fruit and maturing); both expressions being used either singly or jointly, either°-or independ^t; phala: tassa mayhaṁ atīte katassa kammassa phalaṁ “the fruit of a deed done by me in former times” ThA.270; Vv 47⁹ (=VvA.202); desanā . . . k-phalaṁ paccakkhakāriṇī “an instruction demonstrating the fruit of action” PvA.1; similarly PvA.2; cp. also ibid. 26, 49, 52, 82 (v. l. for kammabala). vipāka: yassa k°ssa vipākena . . . niraye pacceyyāsi . . . “through the ripening of whatever deed will you be matured (i. e. tortured) in N.” M.II,104; tassa k°ssa vipākena saggaṁ lokaṁ uppajji “by the result of that deed he went to Heaven” S.I,92; II,255; k-vipāka-kovida “well aware of the fruit of action,” i. e. of retribution Sn.653; kissa kvipākena “through the result of what (action)” Pv.I,6⁵; inunā asubhena k-vipākena Nett 160; k-vipāka with ref. to avyākata-dhammā: Vbh.182; with ref. to jhāna ibid. 268, 281; with ref. to dukkha ibid. 106; k-vipāka-ja produced by the maturing of (some evil) action, as one kind of ābādha, illness: A.V,110=Nd² 304¹; same as result of good action, as one kind of iddhi (supernatural power) Ps.II,174; --vipāka (adj.). asakkaccakatānaṁ kammānaṁ vipāko the reaper of careless deeds A.IV,393; der. vepakka (adj.) in dukkha-vepakka resulting in pain Sn.537. -phala+vipāka: freq. in form. sukaṭa dukkhaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko: D.I,55=III,264=M.I,401=S.IV,348=A.I,268=IV.226= V.265, 286 sq.; cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 8; nissanda-phalabhūto vipāko ThA.270; tiṇṇaṁ k°ānaṁ phalaṁ, tiṇṇaṁ k-ānaṁ vipāko D.II,186 -- (b) the effect of the deed on the doer: the consequences fall upon the doer, in the majority of cases expressed as punishment or affliction: yathā yathâyaṁ puriso kammaṁ karoti tathā tathā taṁ paṭisaṁvedissati “in whichever way this man does a deed, in the same way he will experience it (in its effect)” A.I,249; na vijjati so jagati-ppadeso yathā ṭhito muñceyya pāpa-kammā “there is no place in the world where you could escape the consequences of evil-doing” Dh.127=Miln.150=PvA.104, cp. Divy 532; so the action is represented as vedaniya, to be felt; in various combinations: in this world or the future state, as good or bad, as much or little A.IV,382; the agent is represented as the inheritor, possessor, of (the results of) his action in the old formula: kammassakā sattā k-dāyādā k-yonī k-bandhū . . . yaṁ k°ṁ karonti kalyānaṁ vā pāpakaṁ vā tassa dāyādā bhavanti M.III,203=A.III,72 sq.=186=V.88~288 sq. (see also cpds.). The punishment is expressed by kammakaraṇa (or °kāraṇa), “being done back with the deed,” or the reaction of the deed, in phrase kamma-karaṇaṁ kāreti or kārāpeti “he causes the reaction of the deed to take place” and pass, kamma-karaṇā karīyati he is afflicted with the reaction, i. e. the punishment of his doing. The 5 main punishments in Niraya see under kāraṇaṁ, the usual punishments (beating with whips, etc.) are enumerated passim, e. g. M.III,164, 181; and Nd² 604. [As regards form and meaning Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 76 and 1893, 15 proposes kāraṇā f. “pain, punishment, “ fr. kṝ to tear or injure, “the pains of karma, or torture”; Prof. Duroiselle follows him, but with no special reason: the derivation as nt. causative-abstr. fr. karoti presents no difficulty.] -- ye kira bho pāpakāni k°-āni karonti te diṭṭh’eva dhamme evarūpā vividhā k-kāraṇā karīyanti, kim aṅga pana parattha! “Those who, as you know, do evil are punished with various tortures even in this world, how much more then in the world to come!” M.III,181; M.III,186=A.I,142; sim. k°-kāraṇāni kārenti (v. l. better than text-reading) S.IV,344; Sdhp.7; Nd² on dukkha. As k-karaṇaṁ saṁvidahiṁsu J.II,398; kamma-kāraṇa-ppatta one who undergoes punishment Vism.500. See also examples under 2d and M.I,87; A.I,47; J.V,429; Miln.197.

B. in objective relation: universal karma, law of cause and consequence. -- (a) karma as cause of existence (see also d, purāṇa° and pubbe kataṁ k°): compared to the fruitful soil (khetta), as substratum of all existence in kāma, rūpa, arūpa dhātu A.I,223 (kāmadhātu-vepakkañ ce kammaṁ nâbhavissa api nu kho kāmabhavo paññāyethā ti? No h’etaṁ . . . iti kho kammaṁ khettaṁ . . .); as one of the 6 causes or substrata of existence A.III,410; kammanā vattati loko kammanā vattati pajā “by means of karma the world goes on, mankind goes on” Sn.654; kamma-paccayā through karma PvA.25 (=Kh 207); k°ṁ kilesā hetu saṁsārassa “k. and passions are the cause of saṁsāra (renewed existence)” Nett 113; see on k. as principle: Ps.II,78; 79 (ch. VII., kamma-kathā) M.I,372 sq.; Nett. 161; 180--182; k. as 3 fold: Bdhd 117; as 4 fold M.III,215; and as cause in general Vism.600 (where enum^d as one of the 4 paccaya’s or stays of rūpa, viz. k., citta, utu, āhāra); Bdhd 63, 57, 116, 134 sq.; Vbh.366; Miln.40 sq. as a factor in the five-fold order (dhammatā or niyama) of the cosmos: k°-niyama DA. on D 11, 12; DhsA. 272; Cp. cpds.: kammaja (resulting from karma) Bdhd 68, 72, 75; °-vātā, birth-pains i. e. the winds resulting from karma (caliṁsu) DhA.I,165; DhA.II,262; k°-nimitta Bdhd 11, 57, 62; k°-sambhava Bdhd 66; k°-samuṭṭhāna Vism.600; Bdhd 67, 72; see further cpds. below. -- (b) karma as result or consequence. There are 3 kamma-nidānāni, factors producing karma and its effect: lobha, dosa, moha, as such (tīṇi nidānāni kammānaṁ samudayāya, 3 causes of the arising of karma) described A.I,134=263=III,338=Nd² 517; so also A.V,86; 262; Vbh.208. With the cessation of these 3 the factor of karma ceases: lobha-kkhayā kamma-nidāna-saṁkhayo A.V,262. There are 3 other nidānāni as atīte anāgate paccuppanne chanda A.I,264. and 3 others as producing or inciting existence (called here kamma-bhava, consequential existence) are puñña, apuñña, ānejja (merit, demerit and immovability) Vbh.137=Nd² 471. -- (c) karma as causeconsequence: its manifestation consists in essential likeness between deed and result, cause and effect: like for like “as the cause, so the result.” Karma in this special sense is Retribution or Retaliation; a law, the working of which cannot be escaped (cp. Dh.127, as quoted above 3 A (b), and Pv.II,7¹⁷: sace taṁ pāpakaṁ kammaṁ karissatha karotha vā, na vo dukkhā pamutt’atthi) -- na hi nassati kassaci kammaṁ “nobody’s (trace, result of) action is ever lost” Sn.666; puññâpuñña-kammassa nissandena kanaka vimāne ekikā hutvā nibbatti “through the consequence of both merit and demerit” PvA.47; cp. VvA.14; yatth’assa attabhāvo nibbattati tattha taṁ k°ṁ vipaccati “wherever a man comes to be born, there ripens his action” A.I,134; -- correspondence between “light” and “dark” deeds and their respective consequence are 4 fold: kaṇha-kamma›kaṇha vipāka, sukka°, kaṇhasukka, akaṇha-asukka: D.III,230=M.I,389=A.II,230 sq.; so sakena kammena nirayaṁ upapajjati Nd² 304^III; k°-ânubhāva --ukkhitta “thrown, set into motion, by the power of k.” PvA.78; sucarita-k-ânubhavâvanibbattāni vimānāni “created by the power of their result of good conduct” VvA.1²⁷; k-ânubhāvena by the working of k. PvA.77; k°-vega-ukkhittā (same) PvA.284; yathā kamm-ûpaga “undergoing the respective consequences (of former deeds) affected with respective karma: see cpds., and cp. yathā kammaṁ gato gone (into a new existence) according to his karma J.I,153 & freq.; see cpds.; k-sarikkhatā “the karma-likeness,” the correspondence of cause and consequence: taṁ k-s°ṁ vibhāventaṁ suvaṇṇamayaṁ ahosi “this, manifesting the karma-correspondence, was golden” VvA.6; so also k-sarikkhaka, in accordance with their deed, retributionary, of kamma-phalaṁ, the result of action: tassa kamma-sarikkhakaṁ kammaphalaṁ hoti “for her the fruit of action became like action,” i. e. the consequence was according to her deed. PvA.206; 284; 258; as nt.: k-s°ṁ pan’assa udapādi “the retribution for him has come” DhA.I,128; J.III,203; cp. also Miln.40 sq.; 65 sq.; 108. -- (d) The working and exhaustion of karma, its building up by new karma (nava°) and its destruction by expiration of old karma (purāṇa). The final annihilation of all result (°kkhaya) constitutes Arahantship. nava›purāṇa-kamma: as aparipakka, not ripe, and paropakka, ripe D.I,54=S.III,212; as pañca-kammuno satāni, etc. ibid.; kāyo . . . purāṇaṁ k°ṁ abhisaṅkhataṁ (“our body is an accumulation of former karma”) S.II,65=Nd² 680 D; see also A.II,197; Pv IV.7¹; PvA.1, 45; Nett 179; and with simile of the snake stripping its slough (porāṇassa k°ssa parikkhīṇattā . . . santo yathā kammaṁ gacchati) PvA.63. -- k°-nirodha or °kkhaya: so . . . na tāva kālaṁ karoti yāva na taṁ pāpakammaṁ vyanti hoti “He does not die so long as the evil karma is unexhausted” A.I,141≈; nava-purāṇāni k°āni desissāmi k°-nirodhaṁ k°-nirodha-gāminiñ ca paṭipadaṁ “the new and the old karma I shall demonstrate to you, the destruction of k. and the way which leads to the destruction of k.” S.IV,132~A.III,410; . . . navānaṁ k°ānaṁ akaraṇā setughātaṁ; iti k-kkhayā dukkhakkhayo . . . (end of misery through the end of karma) A.I,220=M.II,214; same Ps.I,55--57; cp. also A.I,263; Nd² 411 (expl. as kamma-parāyaṇa vipāka-p°: “gone beyond karma and its results,” i. e. having attained Nibbāna). See also the foll. cpds.: k°-âbhisaṅkhīsa, °āvaraṇa, °kkhaya, °nibandhana.

--âdhikata ruled by karma, Miln.67, 68; °ena by the influence of k. ibid. --âdhiggahita gripped by karma Miln.188, 189; --ânurūpa (adj.) (of vipāka) according to one’s karma J.III,160; DA.I,37; --âbhisaṅkhāra (3 B) accumulation of k. Nd² 116, 283, 506. --âbhisanda in °ena in consequence of k. Miln.276, cp. J.P.T.S. 1886, 146; --âraha see I.; --âyatana 1. work Vbh.324, cp. Miln.78; 2. action=kamma J.III,542; cp. J.IV,451, 452. --âyūhana the heaping up of k. Vism.530; DhsA.267, 268; cp. k°ṁ āyūhi Miln.214 and J.P.T.S. 1885, 58. --āvaraṇa the obstruction caused by k. A.III,436= Pug.13=Vbh.341 (in defin. of sattā abhabbā: kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā, kiles°, vipāk° . .), Kvu 341; Miln.154, 155; Vism.177 (=ānantariya-kamma); --ūpaga in yatha kamm-û page satte: the beings as undergoing (the consequences of) their respective kamma (3B) in form. cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate . . . pajānāti (or passati) Vin.III,5=D.I,82=S.II,122 (214)= V.266=A.IV,178=V.13 (35, 200, 340)=Vbh.344; abbreviated in M.III,178; Nett. 178; see also similar Sn.587; Bdhd 111; --upacaya accumulation of k. Kvn A. 156; --kathā exposition of k.; chapter in Ps.II,98; --kāma (adj.) desirous of good karma Th.2, 275; PvA.174; a° opp.= inactive, indolent A.IV,92, PvA.174; --kiriyā-dassana (adj.) understanding the workings of k. J.I,45; --kiliṭṭha bad, evil k. Dh.15 (=DhA.I,129, expl. kiliṭṭha-k°); --kilesa (2) depravity of action, bad works, there are 4 enum^d at D.III,181=J.III,321, as the non-performance of sīla 1--4 (see sīla), equal to pāpa-kāya-k°; --kkhaya (3 B) the termination, exhaustion of the influence of k.; its destruction: sabba-k°-kkhayaṁ patto vimutto upadhi-saṅkhaye S.I,134; as brought about by neutral, indifferent kamma: D.III,230=A.II,230 sq.; M.I,93, DhsA.89; --ja (3 B) produced by k. J.I,52; as one mode of the origin of disease Miln.135; Nd² 304¹; appl^d. to all existence Miln.271; Vism.624 (kammajaṁ āyatanadvāra-vasena pākaṭaṁ hoti); appl^d to rūpa Vism.451, 614; appl. to pains of childbirth (°vātā) J.I,52, DhA.I,165; a° not caused by k., of ākāsa and nibbāna Miln.268, 271; --ṭṭhāna (2) 1. a branch of industry or occupation, profession, said of diff. occupations as farmer, trader, householder and mendicant M.II,197; A.V,83. 2. occasion or ground for (contemplating) kamma (see ṭhāna II.2. c.), kamma-subject, a technical term referring to the instruments of meditation, esp. objects used by meditation to realize impermanence. These exercises (“stations of exercise” Expos. 224) are highly valued as leading to Arahantship DhA.I,8 (yāva arahattaṁ kamma-ṭṭhānaṁ kathesi), 96; PvA.98 (catu-saccakamma-ṭṭhāna-bhāvanā meditation on the 4 truths and the objects of meditation). Freq. in phrase kammaṭṭhāne anuyutto (or anuyoga vasena) na cirass’eva arahattaṁ pāpuṇi: J.III,36; Sāsv 49; see also J.I,7, 97, 182, 303, 414; Sdhp.493. These subjects of meditation are given as 38 at DhsA.168 (cp. Cpd. 202), as 32 (dvattiṁs’ākāra-k°) at Vism.240 sq., as 40 at Vism.110 sq. (in detail); as pañca-sandhika at Vism.277; some of them are mentioned at J.I,116; DhA.I,221, 336; IV,90; --°ṁ anuyuñjati to give oneself up to meditation Sāsv 151; PvA.61; --°ṁ uggaṇhāti to accept from his teacher a particular instrument of meditation Vism.277 sq. (also °assa uggaho & uggaṇhana); KhA 40; DhA.I,9, 262; IV,106; PvA.42; --°ṁ katheti to teach a pupil how to meditate on one of the k° DhA.I,8, 248, 336; PvA.61; --°ṁ adāsi DhA.IV,106; °gaṇhāti J.III,246; Vism.89; °ācikkhana instruction in a formula of exercise DhsA.246; °dāyaka the giver of a k-ṭṭh° object, the spiritual adviser and teacher, who must be a kalyāṇamitta (q. v.), one who has entered the Path; Vism.89; Bdhd 89, 91, cp. Vism.241; --ṭṭhānika a person practising kammaṭṭhāna Vism.97, 187, 189; DhA.I,335; --tappana the being depressed on acct. of one’s (bad) karma DhA.I,150. --dāyāda (3 A (b) and cp. °ssaka) the inheritor of k., i. e. inheriting the consequences of one’s own deeds M.I,390; Miln.65=DhsA.66; --dvāra “the door of action,” i. e. the medium by which action is manifested (by kāya, vacī, mano) (s. 2b) J.IV,14; KvuA 135; DhsA.82; Bdhd 8; --dhāraya name of a class of noun-compounds Kacc 166; --nānatta manifoldness of k. DhsA.64 (also --nānākaraṇa ib.); --nibandhana (3 B) bound to k. (: rathass’āṇī va yāyato, as the linchpin to the cart) Sn.654; --nibbatta (3 B) produced through k. Miln.268; DhsA.361; --nimitta the sign, token of k. DhsA.411; --nirodha the destruction of k. [see 3 B (d)]; --paccaya the ground, basis of karma Vism.538; KvuA 101; °paccayena by means of k. J.VI,105, Vism.538; (adj.) J.V,271, DhsA.304; --paṭisaraṇa (a) having k. as a place of refuge or as a protector J.VI,102; Miln.65; cp. DhsA.66; --paṭibāḷha strong by k. Miln.301; --pathā (2 b) pl. the ways of acting (=sīla q. v.), divided into kusala (meritorious, good) and akusala (demeritorious, evil) and classified according to the 3 manifestations into 3 kāya°, 4 vācī°, 3 mano°, altogether 10; so at Vin.V,138, S.II,168, A.V,57, 268; as kus° and akus° at D.III,71, 269, 290; as 7 only at S.II,167; as akus° only at A.V,54, 266; Vbh.391; Nett 43; Bdhd 129, 131; °ppatta having acquired the 10 items of (good) action Sdhp.56, 57. --phala [3 A (a)] the fruit of k., the result of (formerly) performed actions J.I,350; VvA.39, PvA.1, 26, 52; °-upajīvin 1. living on the fruit of one’s labour (ad I) J.IV,160; -- 2. living according to the result of former deeds A.II,135; --bandhu having k. as one’s relative, i. e. closely tied to one’s karma (see °ssaka) Th.1, 496; cp. J.VI,100, etc. --bala the power of k. J.VI,108; PvA.82. --bhava [3 B (b)] karmic existence, existence through karma Vbh.137; DhsA.37; --bhūmi 1. the place of work J.III,411; 2. the ground of actions, i. e. the field of meritorious deeds Miln.229; --mūla (good) k. as a price (for long life, etc.) Miln.333, 334, 341; --mūlaka produced by k. Miln.134; --yoni having k. for matrix, i. e. as the cause of rebirth Miln.65; DhsA.66. --lakkhaṇa having k. as distinctive characteristic A.I,102; AA 370; --vagga name of section in Nipāta IV of Aṅguttara (Nos. 232--238) A.II,230 sq.; --vavaṭṭhāna the continuance of k. DhsA.85; --vāda (a) holding to the view of (the power and efficacy of) k. S.II,33 sq.; A.I,287 (+kiriyavāda, viriyavāda); --vādin believing in k. D.I,115; Vin.I,71; J.VI,60; --vipāka [3 A (a)] the ripening of k., the result of one’s actions (see above) Vbh.106, 182, 268, 281; as one of the four mysteries (acinteyyāni) of Buddhism at Miln.189. --°ja produced as a result of k.: D.II,20; Mhbv 78; Ps.II,174, 213; Miln.135; Vism.382 (appl^d to iddhi); concerning disease as not produced by k., see A.V,110; Miln.134, 135; AA 433, 556. --visuddhi meritorious karma Dh.16 (=Dh.I,132); --visesa variety or difference of k. DhsA.313; --vega the impetus of k. PvA.284; --sacca (adj.) having its reality only in k.; said of loka, the world A.II,232. --samādāna (2) the acquisition of ways of acting, one’s character, or the incurring of karma, either as micchādiṭṭhi° (of wrong views) or sammādiṭṭhi (conforming to the right doctrine), so in yathākamm-ûpaga passage (q. v.): D.III,96; M.I,70; III,178, 179; four such qualities or kinds of karma enum. at Nett 98; of Buddha’s knowledge as regards the quality of a man’s character: S.V,304; A.III,417 sq.; Ps.II,174; Vbh.338; --samārambha [3 B (a)] having its beginning in k.; said of loka, the world of men; with °ṭṭhāyin: lasting as long as the origin (cause) of k. exists A.II,232; --samuṭṭhāna [3 B (a)] rising from k. Miln.127; DhsA.82; Kvn 100; --sambhava produced by k. Miln.127; --sarikkhaka [see above 3 B (c)] similar or like in consequence to the deed done DhA.III,334 (°vipāka). --sarikkhatā (do.) the likeness between deed and result; --sahāya “companion to the deed,” said of thought DhsA.323; --socana sorrowing for one’s (bad) deeds DhA.I,128. --(s)saka [3 A (b), q. v.] (a) one whose karma is his own property, possessed of his own k. M.III,203, etc. (in phrase k., kamma-dāyāda, kamma-bandhu, etc.; cp. Vism.301); J.IV,128; Miln.65; DA.I,37=who goes according to his own karma (attano k°ânurūpaṁ gatiṁ gacchanti, n’eva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena . . .); der. °tā the fact that every being has his very own karma A.III,186; Dhs.1366; Vbh.324; °ta as adj.; qualifying ñāṇa, i. e. the knowledge of the individual, specific nature of karma Dhs.1366, Vbh.328. (Page 190)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kammabhava: {'def': '﹐Kammabhāva,【阳】业有。Pṭs.(CS:p.50)：47. Purimakammabhavasmiṁ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṁ upādānaṁ, cetanā bhavo. Ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṁ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayā.(於以前的‘业有’的痴为无明，努力为行，欲求为爱，接近为取，思为有，这些於以前的业有的五法是今生结生的诸缘。) PsA(CS:p.1.223)：purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṁ kammabhave kariyamāneti attho.(在以前的业有：在以前的业有，带来在过去生所作的业有。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammadhāraya: {'def': '【阳】与形容词有关的或用作形容词的复合词。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '阳】与形容词有关的或用作形容词的复合词。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammaja-vāta: {'def': '【阳】业生风，出生时的剧痛，分娩的痛苦。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】业生风，出生时的剧痛。分娩的痛苦。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammajarūpa: {'def': '〔业生色，〕由业所生的色。', 'xr': '《巴英术语汇编》 -《法的医疗》附温宗堃'}

Kammaka: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kamma] connected with, depend^t on karma Miln.137 (a°). Kammanīya, °iya & kammañña (adj.) “workable,” fit for work, dexterous, ready, wieldy. Often of citta “with active mind” in formula vigatūpakkilesa mudubhūta k° ṭhita ānejjappatta D.I,76, etc.=M.I,22= Pug.68; S.III,232; V,92, 233; A.I,9; DhA.I,289; Bdhd 101, expl^d at Vism.377 (°iya). Further of citta (muduñ ca kammaññañ ca pabhassarañ ca) A.I,257 (reads °iyañ)=Vism.247; of upekhā and sati Nd² 661, cp. Bdhd 104; of kāya & citta Bdhd 121. Said of a lute=workable, ready for playing A.III,375=Vin.I,182. Of the body A.IV,335. -- a° not ready, sluggish A.IV,333; Vism.146. -- kammañña-bhāva the state of being workable, readiness, of kāya Dhs.46, of vedanā, etc., Dhs.326, of citta DhsA.130, see next; a° unworkable condition DhsA.130. (Page 194)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kammanta: {'def': '【中】工作。职业。~ṭṭhāna,【中】办事处，工场，工作的地方。~ntika,【形】劳动者。工匠。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(Sk. karmānta; kamma+anta),【中】工作，职业。kammaṭṭhāna,【中】办事处，工场，工作的地方。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Sk. karmānta; kamma+anta, cp. anta ¹4.] 1. doing, acting, working; work, business, occupation, profession. paṭicchanna° of secret acting Sn.127= Vbh.357; as being punished in Niraya A.I,60; S.IV,180; as occupation esp. in pl. kammantā: S.V,45=135; DhA.I,42 (kammantā nappavattanti, no business proceeds, all occupations are at a standstill); anākula° Sn.262=Kh V.5; abbhantarā k° uṇṇā ti vā, kappāsā ti vā as housework, falling to the share of the wife A.III,37=IV.365; khetta° occupation in the field A.III,77; see also D.I,71; M.III,7; S.I,204; Miln.9, 33; and below; as place of occupation: Sn.p. 13, PvA.62. Phrases: °ṁ adhiṭṭhāti to look after the business A.I,115; PvA.141; jahati give up the occupation S.IV,324; PvA.133; °ṁ payojeti to do or carry on business D.I,71; II,175; III,66, 95; A.III,57; °ṁ pavatteti to set a business on foot PvA.42 (and vicāreti: PvA.93); °ṁ saṁvidahati to provide with work A.IV,269=272. Mhvs VI,16. -- 2. deed, action in ethical sense= kamma, character, etc., Kh 136 (k°=kamma); pāpa° doing wrong Pv IV.81; IV,161; J.VI,104 (opp. puñña°); as specified by kāya° vacī °mano° A.V,292 sq.; VvA.130 (in parisuddha-kāya-kammantatā); dhammikā k°ā M.II,191; ākiṇṇa-k° (evam-) of such character S.I,204; kurūra-k° (adj.) of cruel character A.III,383=Pug.56 (in def. of puggalo orabbhiko); sammā° of right doing, opp. micchā°, as constituting one element of character as pertaining to “Magga” (: q. v.) D.II,216; S.II,168; V,1; A.III,411; Bdhd 135; expl. as kāya-kamma (=sīla 1--3) at S.V,9=Vbh.105; Vbh.235; as kāya-duccaritehi ārati virati . . . Vbh.106.

--âdhiṭṭhāyika superintendent of work DhA.I,393; --ṭṭhāna: 1. the spot where the ceremonies of the Ploughing Festival take place J.I,57; 2. the common ground of a village, a village bazaar J.IV,306; --dāsa a farm-servant J.I,468; --bheri the drum announcing the (taking up of) business DhA.III,100; --vipatti “failure of action,” evil-doing A.I,270 opp. --sampadā “perfection of action, right-doing” A.I,271; --saṁvidhāna the providing of work D.III,191 (one of the 5 duties of the gahapati). (Page 194)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kammantika: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kammanta] 1. a business manager J.I,227. -- 2. a labourer, artisan, assistant J.I,377. (Page 194)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(‹kammanta),【形】经理，劳动者，工匠(a business manager, a laborer, artisan, assistant)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammapaccaya: {'def': '【阳】业缘(kamma condition)。sahajāta-kammapaccaya, 俱生业缘。anantara-kammapaccaya, 无间业缘。pakatūpanissayapaccaya, 自然亲依止(业)缘。nānākkhaṇikakammapaccaya, 异刹那业缘。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammappatta: {'def': '【形】即席者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】即席者。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammasamuṭṭhāna-rūpa: {'def': '﹐【中】业生色(或业等起色)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammassakadiṭṭhi: {'def': '【形】自作业之见。A.5.57./III,72.︰‘Kammassakomhi, kammadāyādo kammayoni kammabandhu kammapaṭisaraṇo. Yaṁ kammaṁ karissāmi– kalyāṇaṁ vā pāpakaṁ vā– tassa dāyādo bhavissāmī’ti (我是自业者︰业的继承者，以业为胎，以业为亲属，以业为归趣。凡我所造的业，无论美恶，我将是它的继承者。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammassāmī: {'def': '【阳】生意的拥有者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】生意的拥有者。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammavācā: {'def': '【阴】议会的正式宣言。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阴】议会的正式宣言。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammañña: {'def': 'kammaniya﹐kammani(C.)﹐【形】适合工作的，预备好的状态，易於使用的。Kammaññatā(kamma+nya+tā),【阴】kammabhāva,【阳】预备，能工作，适宜，业有。DhsA.(CS:DhsA.pg.195)：Kammaññatāti kammani sādhutā; kusalakiriyāya viniyoga-kkhamatāti attho.(适应性：适合工作的善性；善应用於忍耐的状态。) Abhidhammatthavibhāvinīṭīkā《广释》(CS:p.110)：Tā kāya-citta-thaddha-bhāva-vūpasama-lakkhaṇā. Kammani sādhu kammaññaṁ, tassa bhāvo kammaññatā, kāyassa kammaññatā kāyakammaññatā.(它平息心所僵硬的状态，容易使用的易适应，它的存在的适应性，为‘心所适应性’。)。 Dhs.#46.：Katamā tasmiṁ samaye kāyakammaññatā hoti? Yā tasmiṁ samaye vedanākkhandhassa saññākkhandhassa saṅkhārakkhandhassa 1kammaññatā 2kammaññattaṁ 3kammaññabhāvo--ayaṁ tasmiṁ samaye kāyakammaññatā hoti.(在此时什么是‘心所适应性’？此时是凡是受蕴、想蕴、行蕴的1适应性、2适应、3适应状态，即「此时是心所适应性」。) Dhs.#47.：Katamā tasmiṁ samaye cittakammaññatā hoti? Yā tasmiṁ samaye viññāṇakkhandhassa 1kammaññatā 2kammaññattaṁ 3kammaññabhāvo--ayaṁ tasmiṁ samaye cittakammaññatā hoti.(在此时什么是‘心适应性’？此时是凡是识蕴的1适应性、2适业、3适业的态，即「此时是心适应性」。)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': 'kammaniya, 【形】适合工作的，预备好的状态，易于使用的。~ñatā,【阴】 ~bhāva,【阳】预备，能工作，适宜。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammaññatā: {'def': '(f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] workableness, adaptability, readiness, appl. to the wood of the sandal tree (in simile) A.I,9; said of kāya and citta in connection with kammaññattaṁ k°bhāvo k°mudutā: Dhs.46, 47=326=641=730; cp. Dhs.585; similar Bdhd 16, 20, 71; DhsA.136, 151 (=kammasādutā) a° unworkableness, inertness, unwieldiness, sluggishness Miln.300; Nett 86, 108, cp. Dhs.1156, 1236; DhsA.255; expl^d as cittagelaññaṁ DhsA.377; as cetaso līnattaṁ Vbh.373. (Page 194)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kammaṭṭhāna: {'def': '【中】业处，禅修的方式（科目），工业的一个部门。~ṭhānika,【阳】业处者，修禅者。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【中】业处(工作之处、作业之地)，工业的一个部门。kammaṭhānika,【阳】业处者，修禅者。 rūpakammaṭṭhāna﹐色业处。nāmakammaṭṭhāna﹐名业处。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '业处', 'xr': '《巴利文-汉文佛学名相辞汇》翻译:张文明居士'}

Kammika: {'def': 'kammī, (在【合】中) 【阳】做，执行者，照顾者。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.-n.) [fr. kamma] 1. (-°) one who does or looks after; one whose occupation is of such & such a character: āya° revenue-overseer, treasurer DhA.I,184; sabba° (always with ref. to amacca, the king’s minister) one who does everything, the king’s confidant Vism.130; PvA.81. -- On term ādi° beginner (e. g. Vism.241) see Cpd. 53, 129 n.2. -- 2. a merchant, trader, in jalapatha° and thalapatha° by sea & by land J.I,121. -- 3. a superintendent, overseer, manager J.II,305 (executioner of an order); VI,294; Mhvs 30, 31. -- 4. one connected with the execution of an ecclesiastical Act Vin.II,5 (cp. p. 22); Bdhd 106. (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'kammī, (在【合】中) 【阳】做，执行者，照顾者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kammin: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. kamma, cp. kammaka] doing, performing, practising J.VI,105; Sdhp.196, 292. (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kammādhiṭṭhāyaka: {'def': '【阳】主管，负责人，指挥者，管理者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】主管，负责人，指挥者，管理者。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammānurūpa: {'def': '【形】依照业的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】依照业的。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammāra: {'def': '(Vedic karmāra), 【阳】铁匠、金匠(a smith, a worker in metals generally D II.126, A V.263; a silversmith Sn 962= Dh 239; J I.223; a goldsmith J III.281; V.282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black-, gold- and silver-smiths; J III.282 and VvA 250, where the smith is the maker of a needle)。kammāruddhana, 铁匠炉灶(a smith’s furnace, a forge J VI.218; kammārakula, 铁匠世家(a smithy M I.25)。kūṭa)。a smith’s hammer Vism 254)。kammāragaggarī, 铁匠的风箱(a smith’s bellows S I.106; J VI.165; Vism 287 (in comparison) )。kammāraputta, 铁匠之子( “son of a smith,” i. e. a smith by birth and trade D II.126; A V.263; as goldsmith J VI.237)。kammārabhaṇḍu, 秃头金匠(bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin I.76)。kammārasālā, 【阴】锻工场( a smithy Vism 413; Mhvs 5, 31. )。 kammārabhasta﹐炼铁的风箱。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】铁匠。 ~sālā,【阴】锻工场。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Vedic karmāra] a smith, a worker in metals generally D.II,126, A.V,263; a silversmith Sn.962= Dh.239; J.I,223; a goldsmith J.III,281; V,282. The smiths in old India do not seem to be divided into black-, gold- and silver-smiths, but seem to have been able to work equally well in iron, gold, and silver, as can be seen e. g. from J.III,282 and VvA.250, where the smith is the maker of a needle. They were constituted into a guild, and some of them were well-to-do as appears from what is said of Cunda at D.II,126; owing to their usefulness they were held in great esteem by the people and king alike J.III,281.

--uddhana a smith’s furnace, a forge J.VI,218; --kula a smithy M.I,25; kūṭa a smith’s hammer Vism.254; --gaggarī a smith’s bellows S.I,106; J.VI,165; Vism.287 (in comparison); --putta “son of a smith,” i. e. a smith by birth and trade D.II,126; A.V,263; as goldsmith J.VI,237, Sn.48 (Nd² ad Loc.: k° vuccati suvaṇṇakāro); --bhaṇḍu (bhaṇḍ, cp. Sk. bhāṇḍika a barber) a smith with a bald head Vin.I,76; --sālā a smithy Vism.413; Mhvs 5, 31. (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kammāraha: {'def': '【形】有参加权的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】有参加权的。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammārambha: {'def': '【阳】一项事业的开始。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】一项事业的开始。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammārāma: {'def': '【形】对工作有兴趣的。kammārāmatā,【阴】乐於世间的活动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】对工作有兴趣的。 ~tā,【阴】乐于世间的活动。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kammāsa: {'def': '【形】1.有斑点的，混杂的。2.不一致的。akammāsa,【形】无斑点的，无混杂的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[Vedic kalmāṣa, which may be referred, with kalana, kaluṣa, kalaṅka and Gr. kelainόs to *qel, fr. which also Sk. kāla black-blue, Gr. khlaζ, khliζ; Lat. cālīgo & callidus] 1. variegated, spotted, blemished J.V,69 (°vaṇṇa), said of the spotted appearance of leprosy. -- fig. inconsistent, varying A.II,187. -- 2. (nt.) inconsistency, blemish, blot A.IV,55; Vism.51. -- a° not spotted, i. e. unblemished, pure, said of moral conduct D.II,80; A.II,52; III,36, 572; VI,54, 192; Bdhd 89.

--kārin in a° not acting inconsistently A.II,187; cp. ibid. 243. --pāda 1. (a) having speckled feet J.V,475; (b) (m) one who has speckled feet, i. e. an ogre; also N. of a Yakkha J.V,503, 511 (cp. J.P.T.S. 1909, 236 sq.). (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】 1. 有斑点的，混杂的。2. 不一致的。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kampa: {'def': '(-°) [fr. kamp] trembling, shaking; tremor DA.I,130 (paṭhavi°); Sdhp.401; a° (adj.) not trembling, unshaken; calm, tranquil Sdhp.594; Mhvs 15, 175. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kampaka: {'def': '【形】摇动者。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】摇动者。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kampa] shaking, one who shakes or causes to tremble Miln.343 (paṭhavi°). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kampana: {'def': '【中】kampā,【阴】发抖，运动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '[fr. kamp] 1. adj. causing to shake DhA.I,84, trembling Kacc 271; 2. (nt) (a) an earthquake J.I,26 47; (b) tremor (of feelings) J.III,163.

--rasa (adj.) “whose essence is to tremble,” said of doubt (vicikicchā) DhsA.259. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】 kampā, 【阴】发抖，运动。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kampati: {'def': '(kamp摇动+a), 战栗，波动。kampi,【过】。kampamāna, kampanta,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kamp + a), 战栗，波动。kampi, 【过】。kampamāna, kampanta, 【现分】。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': ' [kamp to shake Dhtp. 186: calane; p. pres. kampanto, kampaṁ, kampamāna; aor. akampi; caus. kampeti; p. pres. kampetan Dpvs XVII.51; ger. kampayitvāna D.II,108; J.V,178] -- to shake, tremble, waver Kh 6; J.I,23; Sn.268 (expl. KhA 153: calati, vedhati); Bdhd 84;--Cp. anu°, pa°, vi°, sam°.-kampamāna (adj.) trembling J.III,161; agitated, troubled (°citta) J.II,337; a° not trembling, unhesitating, steadfast J.VI,293. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kampeti: {'def': '(kampati 的【使】), 摇动，令战栗。kampesi,【过】。kampenta,【现分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kampati 的【使】), 摇动，令战栗。kampesi, 【过】。kampenta, 【现分】。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kampetvā: {'def': 'kampiya, 【独】摇动了。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': 'kampiya,【独】摇动了。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kampin: {'def': '(adj.) [fr. kampa] see vi°. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kampita: {'def': '(kampeti 和 kampati 的【过分】), 已摇动，已激动。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(kampeti 和 kampati 的【过分】), 已摇动，已激动。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kampiya: {'def': '(adj.) [grd. of kampati] in a° not to be shaken, immovable, strong Th.2, 195; Miln.386; (nt.) firmness, said of the 5 moral powers (balāni) DA.I,64. (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【形】活动的，可摇动的。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【形】活动的，可摇动的。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kampurī: {'def': '(va.) at Th.2, 262 is to be corr. into kambu-r-iva (see Morris, J.P.T.S. 1884, 76). (Page 189)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamuka: {'def': '【阳】槟榔树。(p95)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】槟榔树(areca nut tree)。现代北印度语中则称‘槟榔’为Pan。Abhidhānappadīpikāṭīkā (CS:p.573,#1051)：Kamuke tambūlaphalarukkhe.(槟榔：槟榔果的树)。槟榔子在中药材具有止痢、驱虫、缩瞳、兴奋等效果，其主要成分包括多酚化合物、槟榔硷、粗纤维、脂肪、醣类等。其成份会促使口腔黏膜细胞合成胶原蛋白质的量增加，同时会使分解及吞食胶原蛋白质的能力下降；因此形成过量之胶原纤维堆积，并因而成为口腔黏膜纤维化症，其中咀嚼后可产生提神(兴奋性)及保暖感觉的成分来自於槟榔硷，槟榔硷含有致突变性之物质，对人类口腔纤维母细胞有细胞毒性。其中的是槟榔素，是一种副交感神经作用药剂，在一般剂量有催涎及发汗的作用，高剂量则会作用在肌肉及中枢神经。槟榔素在肝脏中会被转变成槟榔啶，高剂量槟榔啶有镇静的效果。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kamya: {'def': '(adj.) (-°) [fr. kām] wishing for, desiring DhsA.365 (sādhu°; v. l. °kāma); kamyā, Abl. in the desire for, see next. (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kamyatā: {'def': '(在【合】中) 【阴】希望，渴望。(p96)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(-°) & kammatā (Nd) [fr. kām] wish, desire, longing for, striving after; with inf. or equivalent: kathetu° VvA.18; muñcitu° (+paṭisaṅkhā) Ps.I,60, 65; Bdhd 123; asotu°, adaṭṭhu° and adassana° Vbh.372. Esp. in definitions, as of chanda: kattu° Vbh.208; Bdhd 20; of jappā: puñcikatā sādhu° Vbh.351; 361=Dhs.1059; Nd² s. v. taṇhā^II (: has the better reading mucchañci katā asādhu°; v. l. pucchañci°; both Vbh.and Dhs.have sādu in text which should be corrected to asādhu°; see detail under puñcikatā); of māna; ketu° Nd² 505; Dhs.1116=1233; Vbh.350 sq.; Bdhd 24; of lapanā: pāṭu° (v. l. cāṭu°) Vbh.246= 352. -- As Abl. (=kamyā) in dassana° S.I,193=Th.1, 1241; Sn.121 (expl. as icchāya SnA 179). Cp. kammaññatā & kamma-sādutā. (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(在【合】中) 【阴】希望，渴望。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kamyā: {'def': '(-°) in Abl. function (of kamyā f. for kamyāya or kamya adj.?) in the desire for: S.I,143=J.III,361 (expl^d by kāmatāya); Sn.854, 929. (Page 195)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kanaka: {'def': '【中】黄金。kanakacchavī, kanakattaca,【形】金肤色。kanakappabhā,【阴】金色。kanakavimāna,【中】金宫。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '(nt.) [cp. Sk. kanaka; Gr. knh_kos yellow; Ags. hunig=E. honey. See also kañcana] gold, usually as uttatta° molten gold; said of the colour of the skin Bu I.59; Pv III,3²; J.V,416; PvA.10 suvaṇṇa).

--agga gold-crested J.V,156; --chavin of golden complexion J.VI,13; --taca (adj.) id. J.V,393; --pabhā golden splendour Bu XXIII,23; --vimāna a fairy palace of gold VvA.6; PvA.47, 53; --sikharī a golden peak, in °rājā king of the golden peaks (i. e. Himālayas): Dāvs.IV,30. (Page 185)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【中】黄金。 ~cchavī, ~ttaca, 【形】金肤色。~ppabhā, 【阴】金色。~vimāna, 【中】金宫。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kanda: {'def': '[Sk. kanda] a tuberous root, a bulb, tuber, as radish, etc. J.I,273; IV,373; VI,516; VvA.335; °mūla bulbs and roots (°phala) D.I,101; a bulbous root J.V,202. (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '【阳】块茎，薯蓣。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '【阳】块茎，薯蓣(yam)。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kandala: {'def': 'N. of a plant with white flowers J.IV,442. --makuḷa knob (?) of k. plant Vism.253 (as in description of sinews). (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kandana: {'def': 'kandita, 【中】哭，悲叹。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '(nt.) [Sk. krandana] crying, lamenting PvA.262 (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': 'kandita,【中】哭，悲叹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kandanta: {'def': '(Kandati的【现分】) 哭，悲叹。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kandara: {'def': '【阳】kandarā,【阴】窟穴，在山壁中的洞穴。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】 kandarā, 【阴】在山壁中的洞穴。(p94)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. kandara] -- 1. a cave, grotto, generally, on the slope or at the foot of a mountain Vin.II,76, 146; used as a dwelling-place Th.1, 602; J.I,205; III,172. ‹-› 2. a glen, defile, gully D.I,71=A.II,210=Pug.59; A.IV,437; Miln.36; expl^d at DA.I,209 (as a mountainous part broken by the water of a river; the etym. is a popular one, viz. “kaṁ vuccati udakaṁ; tena dāritaṁ”). k-padarasākhā A.I,243=II.240; PvA.29. (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kandati: {'def': '(kand + a), 哭，悲叹，哀悼。kandi, 【过】。kandita, 【过分】。(p93)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}; {'def': '[Sk. krandati to *q(e)lem; cp. Gr. kalέw, kέlados, Lat. clamor, calare, calendae, Ohg. hellan to shout] to cry, wail, weep, lament, bewail Dh.371; Vv 83¹²; J.VI,166; Miln.11, 148; freq. of Petas: PvA.43, 160, 262 (cp. rodati). -- In kāmaguṇā pass. urattāḷiṁ k. M. I.86=Nd² s. v.; A.III,54 (urattāḷī for °iṁ v. l.); in phrase bāhā paggayha k° Vin.I,237; II,284; J.V,267. (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}; {'def': '(kand哭+a), 哭，悲叹，哀悼。kandi,【过】。kandita,【过分】。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}

Kandaḷa: {'def': 'N. of esculent water lily, having an enormous bulb D.I,264. (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kandita: {'def': '(adj.) [pp. of kandati] weeping, lamenting Dāvs.IV,46; a° not weeping J.III,58. (n. nt.) crying, lamentation J.III,57; Miln.148. (Page 186)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kanduka: {'def': '【阳】(游戏中用的)球。', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》明法尊者增订'}; {'def': '【阳】（游戏中用的）球。(p94)', 'xr': '《巴汉词典》 Mahāñāṇo Bhikkhu编著'}

Kanha: {'def': '(adj.) [cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa, Lith. kérszas] dark, black, as attr. of darkness, opposed to light, syn. with kāḷa (q. v. for etym.); opp. sukka. In general it is hard to separate the lit. and fig. meanings, an ethical implication is to be found in nearly all cases (except 1.). The contrast with sukka (brightness) goes through all applications, with ref. to light as well as quality. I. Of the sense of sight: k-sukka dark & bright (about black & white see nīla & seta), forming one system of coloursensations (the colourless, as distinguished from the red-green and yellow-blue systems). As such enum^d in connection with quasi definition of vision, together with nīla, pīta, lohita, mañjeṭṭha at D.II,328=M.I,509 sq. =II.201 (see also mañjeṭṭha). -- II. (objective). 1. of dark (black), poisonous snakes: kaṇhā (f.) J.II,215 (=kāḷa-sappa C); °sappa J.I,336; III,269, 347; V,446; Vism.664 (in simile); Miln.149; PvA.62; °sīsā with black heads A.III,241 (kimī). -- 2. of (an abundance of) smooth, dark (=shiny) hair (cp. in meaning E. gloom: gloss=black: shiny), as Ep. of King Vasudeva Pv.II,6¹, syn. with Kesavā (the Hairy, cp. *)apoλlwn *ou)laίos Samson, etc., see also siniddha-, nīla-, kāla-kesa). sukaṇha-sīsa with very dark hair J.V,205, also as sukaṇha-kaṇha-sīsa J.V,202 (cp. susukāḷa). °jaṭi an ascetic with dark & glossy hair J.VI,507, cp. V.205 sukaṇhajaṭila. °añjana glossy polish J.V,155 (expl^d as sukhumakaṇha-lom’ācitattā). -- 3. of the black trail of fire in °vattanin (cp. Vedic kṛṣṇa-vartaniṁ agniṁ R. V. VIII,23, 19) S.I,69=J.III,140 (cp. III,9); J.V,63. ‹-› 4. of the black (fertile) soil of Avanti “kaṇh-uttara” black on the surface Vin.I,195. -- III, (Applied). 1. °pakkha the dark (moonless) half of the month, during which the spirits of the departed suffer and the powers of darkness prevail PvA.135, cp. Pv III,6⁴, see also pakkha¹ 3. -- 2. attr. of all dark powers and anything belonging to their sphere, e. g. of Māra Sn.355, 439 (=Namuci); of demons, goblins (pisācā) D.I,93 with ref. to the “black-born” ancestor of the Kaṇhāyanas (cp. Dh.I,263 kāḷa-vaṇṇa), cp. also kāḷa in °sunakha, the Dog of Purgatory PvA.152. -- 3. of a dark, i. e. miserable, unfortunate birth, or social condition D.III,81 sq. (brāhmano va sukko vaṇṇo, kaṇho añño vaṇṇo). °abhijāti a special species of men according to the doctrine of Gosāla DA.I,162; A.III,383 sq. °abhijātika “of black birth,” of low social grade D.III,251=A. III,384; Sn.563; cp. Th.1, 833 and J.P.T.S. 1893, 11; in the sense of “evil disposition” at J.V,87 (expl^d as kāḷaka-sabhāva). -- 4. of dark, evil actions or qualities: °dhamma A.V,232=Dh.87; D.III,82; Sn.967; Pug.30; Miln.200, 337; °paṭipadā J.I,105, and °magga the evil way A.V,244, 278; °bhāvakara causing a low (re-)birth J.IV,9 (+ pāpa-kammāni), and in same context as dhamma comb^d with °sukka at A.IV,33; Sn.526 (where kaṇhā° for kaṇha°): Miln.37; °kamma “black action” M.I,39; °vipāka black result, 4 kinds of actions and 4 results, viz. kaṇha°, sukka°, kaṇha-sukka°, akaṇha-asukka° D III,230=M.I,389 sq.=A.II,230 sq.; Nett 232. akaṇha 1. not dark, i. e. light, in °netta with bright eyes, Ep. of King Pingala-netta J.II,242 in contrast with Māra (although pingala-cakkhu is also Ep. of Māra or his representatives, cp. J.V,42; Pv.II,4¹). -- 2. not evil, i. e. good A.II,230, 231. --atikaṇha very dark Vin.IV,7; sukaṇha id. see above II.2. (Page 180)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

Kanikāra: {'def': '(m. nt.) & kaṇṇikāra J.IV,440; V,420; the difference stated at J.V,422 is kaṇi°=mahāpupphā kaṇṇi°=khuddakapupphā) [Sk. karṇikāra]--1. (m.) the tree Pterospermum acerifolium J.I,40; V,295; VI,269, 537. -- 2. (nt.) its (yellow) flower (k-puppha), taken metaphorically as typical emblem of yellow and of brightness. Thus in similes at D.II,111 (=pīta)= M.II,14 (ṇṇ)=A.V,61 (ṇṇ); DhA.I,388; of the yellow robes (kāsāyāni) J.II,25; with ref. to the blood of the heart Vism.256;=golden VvA.65; DhA.II,250 (v. l. ṇṇ).

--makula a k. bud J.II,83. (Page 178)', 'xr': "《PTS Pali-English dictionary》 The Pali Text Society's Pali-English dictionary"}

【經文資訊】
【原始資料】原始资料皆来自网络
【其他事項】本資料庫可自由免費流通，詳細內容請參閱【中華電子佛典協會資料庫版權宣告】